faq.jpg (3371 bytes) Frequently Asked Questions
Click link for archived FAQ's
Questions and answers covering a wide range of Vandersteen design principles and system set-up recommendations.

SUBMIT YOUR TECHNICAL QUESTIONS TO RICHARD VANDERSTEEN.  RICHARD  WILL REVIEW AND POST THE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS THAT WILL HAVE A WIDE INTEREST ON THE FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTION SECTION OF OUR WEB SITE.  THE QUESTIONS WILL BE LISTED NEXT TO THE FIRST NAME OF THE PERSON WHO SUBMITTED THE QUESTION, SO PLEASE BE SURE TO INCLUDE YOUR FIRST NAME WITH YOUR QUESTION.  ANY QUESTIONS THAT ARE NOT ANSWERED SHOULD BE ASKED DIRECTLY TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER OR CALL THE FACTORY AT 559-582-0324.  PLEASE REMEMBER TO SEARCH THE FAQ'S ALREADY POSTED FOR AN ANSWER TO YOUR QUESTION.  THANK YOU.


Please include your first name with the question or the question will be discarded.

Please remember to visit the FAQ section of the website for additional questions and answers.

Question:

Oliver (1/4/06): I am looking to buy a subwoofer which is suitable for HT/Stereo. I am currently using a Time Coherent speakers from Meadowlark and am looking for a Sub that would do them justice mainly in the HT.  I play mainly at about  5db below reference so in my 2600cubic feet room, I probably need about 105db or so of subwoofer action. Does the V2W with lfe input able to drive my room at about 105db from 20hz to 80hz?

Answer: THE V2W IN PAIRS SHOULD BE USED IN THIS ROOM. THE ADDED ADVANTAGE OF INJECTING THE LFE BASS INTO THE ROOM FROM TWO LOCATIONS WILL MAKE THE BASS RESPONSE MUCH MORE LINEAR. THE V2W IS PROPERLY Q' ED (NOT BOOMY) SO THEY SHOULD BE PLACED IN THE CORNERS WHERE RESPONSE WILL BE MOST UNIFORM THROUGHOUT. THIS WILL GIVE THE SPL YOUR ASKING FOR AT LOW DISTORTION.

Stan (1/5/06): I have a Vandersteen sub-woofer, honestly I don't know what model. I assume it's a 2W, probably even before the 2Wq model.  Q1.) I bought when it was just stereo and turntables were still in  style and surround sound wasn't around except for the first generation  Lexicon. Can I integrate my sub into a surround sound environment?  Q2.) Why did you design it by having the sub attach itself to the binding posts of the AMP?  Thinking about it (after the fact and how sound signals work) the sound signal should come form the pre-amp to a crossover which should  split the signal at a frequency point (ie 120Hz), the sound above this  point (120Hz -  20KHz) goes to the amp which the main speakers are attached and the  sound below (20Hz - 120Hz) should go to the amp with the sub-woofer...  This is pure physics and logic... How is the supplied Vandersteen crossover supposed to achieve this separation by sitting between the pre and power amp with the same signal going to the power amp? And with both the mains and the sub attached to the same power amp on the same terminals  a.) How is each loudspeaker able to gets it supposed  separated signals in  such a parallel fashion? b.) Physics says if you attached a double load to a  terminal in such parallel a fashion the impedance will (not may) drop as well from 8ohms to 4ohms causing an additional strain the power amp and many amps are designed to handle a 4ohm load?

Answer: HELLO STAN, PLEASE REFER TO THE  FAQ SECTION OF OUR WEBSITE YOUR ANSWER IS ALREADY THERE UNDER ONE OF THE SUBWOOFER Q&A. THIS SECTION WILL BE MODIFIED HERE IN THE NEAR FUTURE TO REFERENCE EACH QUESTION BY A SPECIFIC CATEGORY, EXAMPLE: SUBWOOFER, WIRES, AMPLIFIERS, ETC.

Unknown (1/7/06): Which subwoofer should I use to connect to my integrated amp? 2w or  2wq It has an output connection for the subwoofers. I have a DK  Design mk II reference amp. Is there a difference in the sound quality?

Answer: HELLO UNKNOWN, THE 2W AND 2WQ BOTH WORK THE SAME WAY THE ONLY DIFFERENCE IS THE 2W IS THE OLD DISCONTINUED VERSION AND THE 2WQ IS CURRENT. THEY ARE NOT COMPATIBLE BY THE WAY. THEY CAN ONLY BE USED WITH INTEGRATED AMPLIFIERS THAT HAVE "PRE OUT" "MAIN IN" JACKS ON THE REAR OF THE UNIT, THIS IS WERE YOU INSTALL THE WX-2 OR X-2 HIGH PASS X-OVER. DO NOT USE THE 2W OR 2WQ WITH OUT A HIGH PASS OR EXPENSIVE DAMAGE TO THE SUB WILL OCCUR.

Martin (1/7/06): I read somewhere that it is possible to increase the volume of the 2wq subs by use of jumpers. How is this done and why does it work?

Answer: HELLO MARTIN, THIS ONLY WORKS WHEN YOU HAVE STEREO SUBS. THE 2WQ HAS STEREO INPUTS (RIGHT AND LEFT) WHICH ARE SUMMED TOGETHER TO DRIVE THE SUB AMP. WHEN YOU DRIVE BOTH INPUTS WITH THE SAME SIGNAL THE WOOFER GAIN GOES UP 6DB, THIS IS ONLY REQUIRED WITH VERY HIGH SENSITIVITY LOUDSPEAKERS WERE THE WOOFER LEVEL WON'T GO HIGH ENOUGH. IF THE SUB LEVEL IS WITHIN THE RANGE OF YOUR SPEAKERS ONLY ONE INPUT SHOULD BE USED BECAUSE SIGNAL TO NOISE IS IMPROVED JUST LEAVE ONE INPUT UNUSED.

Curt (1/10/06): Is there any type of adapter or configuration that would allow me to use banana plugs on my 2Ce Signature's?

Answer: HELLO CURT, THE INPUT BARRIER STRIP ON THE 2CE SIG'S ARE THE BEST SOUNDING, GAS TIGHT CONNECTION WE COULD FIND. USING AN ADAPTER WOULD COMPROMISE THE SOUND SIGNIFICANTLY.  YOU COULD GO TO AN AUTO PARTS STORE AND BUY SOME O-LUGS MADE FOR A #10 SCREW AND 12GA WIRE, STRIP THE END OF YOUR WIRE AND CRIMP THE CONNECTOR ON. SOLDER THE CRIMPED CONNECTION TO MAKE IT GAS TIGHT. YOU NOW HAVE A STATE OF THE ART CONNECTION THAT WILL REMAIN THAT WAY FOR YEARS WITHOUT HAVING TO CLEAN THEM. BE SURE TO INSULATE THE LUGS SO THEY WILL NOT SHORT AGAINST THE ALUMINUM DRESS PLATE.

Unknown (1/11/06): Is it normal for the X-2 crossover to increase the bass level volume very dramatically from the factory wx-2? Both are set at 33k.

Answer: THE BASS LEVEL SHOULD BE ABOUT THE SAME BETWEEN THE TWO. IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THE WX-2 X-OVER IS NOT ADJUSTED PROPERLY BE SURE THE SWITCH IS ON NOT OFF. WE HAVE USED MANY SWITCHES OVER THE YEARS YOU WANT TO LOOK FOR THE WORD "OPEN" OR ON. THE SWITCH IS USUALLY MARKED ONE OR THE OTHER BUT NOT BOTH. THE CHART WILL TELL YOU WHICH SWITCH (S) NEED TO BE ON. I SUSPECT YOU HAVE THE SWITCHES ON THAT SHOULD BE OFF.

Dave (1/14/06): I've owned a pair of Vandersteen II (circa 1979)speakers for many many years now and still love them! I have used them with a B&K ST202 amp and Stereophon Revelation Preamp. I am planning to use them with a tube amp and preamp I never had the "specs" on these speakers.  Could you supply me with the specs of these speakers? The tube gear I am planning to use them with are in kit form from the Bottlehead website. The amps are mono-block 2 watts and they are- suggesting speakers with a minimum of  93db and preferably 96db. Wondering where the Vandersteen II fall  into?

Answer: HELLO DAVE, LITERATURE AND SPECIFICATIONS ON A SPEAKER THIS OLD IS NOT AVAILABLE. SENSITIVITY IS APX 86DB FOR 2.83 VOLTS. TWO WATTS IS NOT ENOUGH POWER FOR YOUR 2'S I WOULD RECOMMEND A PUSH PULL AMP OF ABOUT 60 WATTS. YOU MIGHT GOOGLE D.I.Y. 2ND HARMONIC DISTORTION GENERATOR FOR THAT SINGLE ENDED SOUND AT LEAST YOU COULD TURN IT OFF WHEN YOU DON'T NEED IT. WE HAVE ALL THE PARTS STILL IN STOCK TO REPAIR YOUR 79 VINTAGE SPEAKERS. HAPPY LISTENING.

Unknown (1/14/06): I have had my speakers for a long time. Have always worked so wonderfully. I recently tried to hook up a little Sony turntable my daughter have  me for Christmas, and now I have no sound from the speakers at all.  Could it be a fuse? Please advise.

Answer: HELLO, THERE ARE NO FUSES AND ALL CONNECTIONS ARE SOLDERED CHECK AND SEE IF THE CD PLAYER STILL WORKS.

1B Owner (1/14/06): I own a pair of Vandersteen 1B speakers from 1984! I returned them once becuase the tweeters were "fuzzing" out and you replaced the  tweeters.  The new tweeters continued to do the same.......frustrated and not wanting  to send them back again from Saratoga CA(near San Jose) I replaced the tweeters myself a few times with various results....bottom line is the fuzzing still comes back intermittently.  Good thing I did not throw out the replaced tweeters since an EE  friend of mine tested them and said they were fine. I also have eliminated the tweeter setting knob on the back of the speaker as the culprit and now the only item left is the cross over circuitry.  I have a NAD amp which is a very good quality amp with clipping protection etc...........bottom line is I also have a Pioneer and a Yamaha and the speakers behave the same on all.  It does seem that they fuzz out more when the volume is low. I love the imaging of these speakers but cannot stand listening  to them like this.  Any suggestions? Any upgrade kit? New crossover electronics????

Answer: HELLO 1B OWNER, WHEN YOU SEND THE COMPLETE SPEAKER TO VANDERSTEEN FOR REPAIR THEY GO THROUGH A COMPLETE CHECK OUT INCLUDING A TRIP THROUGH THE CHAMBER. I ASSURE YOU THEY WERE NOT "FUZZING" OUT WHEN YOU RECEIVED THEM, SO WHAT COULD IT BE IN YOUR INSTALLATION. MY BEST GUESS WOULD BE THAT YOU ARE USING AFTER MARKET BANANA PLUGS AND THEY ARE LONGER THAN THE ONES WE SUPPLY. THEY COULD SHORT INTERMITTENTLY CAUSING THE SOUND YOU DESCRIBE. PULL YOUR PLUGS OUT ABOUT 1/8TH OF AN INCH AND SEE WHAT HAPPENS.

Francisco (1/14/06): I have talked to you several times over the telephone to ask different question Re: the various Vandersteen speakers that I own and/or have owned in the past (I have been an active classical music lover for over 50 years now). This note is more of a comment than a question  however, I am very interested in your feedback and or insights.  At the present time I am using a pair of 5As. Until recently I used the 5As in conjunction with a pair of $20K mono-blocks. A few months ago I tried, at the suggestion of my son, a couple of Pathos Classic  One "INPOL" amps (each Pathos bi-amplifying each speaker). The Pathos  input impedance is specified at 100 KOhm. I set the 5As crossover at this value and there was not bass.  Next, I proceeded as recommended in the 5A manual to use an oscilloscope to determine the value of the crossover that would produce a 3dB at 100 Hz (relative to 1 KHz) reduction in output voltage from the amplifier. That point was at a crossover set of 10 KOhm (balanced  input/output). Then I connected the system and what an incredible glorious sound came from those speakers! Truly natural and transparent with extraordinary resolution.  Since last November I have used the system connected as described. I  never heard better sound, all my friends and family agree.  Comments on your part? The Pathos use a very interesting first stage-I have the schematics provided by the factory. Kind regards,

Answer: HELLO FRANCISCO, THANK YOU FOR YOUR KIND REMARKS. THIS IS MORE COMMON THAN I WOULD LIKE BECAUSE SOME AMP MANUFACTURERS ARE VERY CASUAL ABOUT THEIR INPUT IMPEDANCE ESPECIALLY AT 100HZ. I BELIEVE THERE IS NOT A BETTER WAY TO IMPROVE THE SOUND THAN BY USING AN INTEGRAL SUBWOOFER WITH ITS OWN SPECIALLY DESIGNED AMP UNIQUE TO THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SUBWOOFER AND ITS PLACEMENT.  THIS REQUIRES A HIGH PASS AT 80 OR 100HZ WHICH CAN NOT BE ACCOMPLISHED SATISFACTORILY IN THE SPEAKER. THE LARGE CAPS AND COILS NEEDED AND THE FACT THAT THE IMPEDANCE'S ARE FLYING ALL OVER THE PLACE MAKES IT IMPOSSIBLE TO DO STATE OF THE ART. THE MOST TRANSPARENT WAY TO DO THIS IS WITH A BIASED HIGH QUALITY CAPACITOR ACTING WITH THE INPUT RESISTOR OF THE AMPLIFIER TO FORM A SPECIFIC HIGH PASS. THIS REQUIRES VERY ACCURATE INPUT IMPEDANCE VALUES AND IS WHY THE OWNERS MANUAL SPECIFIES A WAY TO CHECK. I AM SORRY YOUR DEALER DID NOT VERIFY THIS BEFORE INSTALLATION AS VERY EXPENSIVE DAMAGE CAN OCCUR, MOST DO. HAPPY LISTENING.

Lori (1/14/06): Hi Richard, I would like to know if I need any upgrading for my system to handle the new LCD HDTV's, etc. I have the 2W, a pair of model  3's, a pair of model 1's and a VCC. I think we bought them somewhere between 1996 and 1999. I will look forward to hearing form you. Thank you.

Answer: HELLO LORI, HIGHER DEFINITION EQUIPMENT WILL IMPROVE YOUR PICTURE, NO CHANGES REQUIRED. SOON WE MAY HAVE HIGHER DEFINITION SOURCES FOR BETTER SOUND, STILL NO SPEAKER CHANGES REQUIRED EXCEPT YOUR EXISTING ONES WILL SOUND BETTER.

Ned (1/15/06): I own a pair of Vandersteen 2Ce's that are ten years old. Can I drive these with a 4 ohm Amp? And if I do, what are pro's & con's over driving them with  8 ohms?

Answer: HELLO NED, 8 OHM AND 4 OHM AMPLIFIERS DON'T REALLY EXIST. SOME AMPS ARE VERY LOW CURRENT DESIGNS AND MAY REQUIRE 8 OHM SPEAKERS BECAUSE THEY WOULD CURRENT LIMIT OR RUN VERY HOT INTO A 4 OHM SPEAKER. MY EXPERIENCE IS THAT THESE AMPLIFIERS ARE NOT SATISFACTORY FOR HIGH END SOUND AND SHOULD BE AVOIDED. AMPLIFIERS DESIGNED WITH ADEQUATE CURRENT CAPABILITY COULD CARE LESS WHETHER THEY ARE 4 OHM OR 8 OHMS AND GENERALLY SOUND MUCH BETTER. HIGH CURRENT BETTER SOUNDING AMPLIFIERS ARE NOT NECESSARILY VERY EXPENSIVE (NAD,ROTEL). THE ONLY EXCEPTION WOULD BE TUBE AMPLIFIERS AND THIS IS IMPEDANCE MATCHING FOR BETTER POWER TRANSFER, AGAIN MY EXPERIENCE IS THAT MOST TUBE AMPS WILL WORK ON 4 OR 8 OHMS BUT WILL SOUND DIFFERENT. LISTEN TO BOTH AND LEAVE IT HOOKED UP TO THE BEST SOUNDING ONE. SOME LOUDSPEAKER DESIGNERS ALLOW FOR VERY LOW IMPEDANCE, MY EXPERIENCE IS THERE IS NO REASON FOR THIS AND HAVING AN EASY LOAD WILL MAKE ANY AMP SOUND BETTER.

Jonas (1/16/06): Hi Richard. I am thinking of adding HT to my stereo setup. Two questions:  First, will having the surrounds on the ceiling work ok and if so  would you recommend the VSMs for this? Second, if a maximum of 4  people will be watching from 11' away will a center channel be necessary or can I just use my 5As?  Thanks very much in advance for your help.

Answer: HELLO JONAS, ADDING HT CAPABILITY TO YOUR SYSTEM IS A WONDERFUL THING AS LONG AS IT DOESN'T COMPROMISE YOUR 2 CHANNEL PERFORMANCE. BE SURE TO CONTINUE THE USE OF A 2 CHANNEL PRE-AMP AND IMPORT YOUR HT THROUGH A UNUSED INPUT, SOME HAVE THEATER BYPASS FOR THIS. I USE TUBE AMPS FOR STEREO AND CLASS D DIGITAL FOR THE REMAINING 5 CHANNELS. IF YOUR AMPS ARE DIFFERENT CHECK THAT THEY ARE THE SAME PHASE. THE BEST PLACE FOR REAR CHANNEL IMO IS THE REAR WALL ABOUT 18" ABOVE EAR HEIGHT. THIS WAY IF AN EFFECT GOES OVERHEAD AND TO THE REAR IT WILL DO SO. SIDE WALL PLACEMENT WORKS WELL IF THEY ARE PLACED BEHIND THE LISTENER FOR THE SAME REASON. REMEMBER THE CAUTION IN THE OWNERS MANUEL ABOUT POINTING THE SIDE OR CENTER DIRECTLY AT THE LISTENER, DON'T DO IT. POINT SOURCES LIKE OUR CENTER CHANNEL AND REAR CHANNEL SPEAKERS MEASURE AND SOUND GREAT AS LONG AS YOU ARE INDIRECT (ON AXIS MEASUREMENTS AND SOUND ARE NOT GOOD). PHANTOM CENTER IS BETTER FOR THE PERSON SITTING ON THE CRACK IN THE COUCH, IF A VIEWER IS EVEN SLIGHTLY OFF CENTER DIALOG WILL BE COMPROMISED. THERE IS ALWAYS THE CHANCE YOU GET THE CENTER BUT A MOVIE MAY BE ALL YOU GET FOR THE EVENING.

Unknown (1/17/06): HOW DO I KNOW I AM BUYING THE MODEL 2 CE . I FOUND ONE PAIR THAT HAS  CE AT THE END OF THE SERIAL NUMBER IS THAT MEAN IS A CE SERIES?

Answer: HELLO, THERE ARE MANY VERSIONS OF THE 2CE SPEAKERS OVER THE YEARS. ALL 2 SERIES SPEAKERS STILL SAY "MODEL II" ON THE REAR PANEL, YOU ARE CORRECT ABOUT THE LETTERS AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER IDENTIFYING THEM AS 2CE'S. OVER THE 10 YEARS THEY WERE IN PRODUCTION THERE HAVE BEEN MANY MODIFICATIONS THAT ARE NOT UPGRADEABLE.  I SUGGEST YOU FIND A PAIR SN# 77000 AND ABOVE AS THEY ARE FACTORY UPGRADEABLE TO 2CE SIG'S. THE 1 AND 2 SERIES WERE NEVER DESIGNED TO BE UPGRADEABLE AND STILL ARE NOT, BUT THE LAST YEAR OF PRODUCTION HAD MANY CHANGES PART OF WHICH BECAME THE SIGNATURE SERIES MAKING IT POSSIBLE. WHEN BUYING USED MAKE SURE YOU ARE ABLE TO AUDITION THEM BEFORE PURCHASE AND ASSURE THEY ARE WORKING CORRECTLY. ONE WAY FOR A LAY PERSON TO ASSES THEY ARE WORKING IS TO PUT THEM SIDE BY SIDE AND PLAY A MONO SOURCE, THEY SHOULD SOUND PERFECTLY THE SAME ASSURING YOU THEY HAVE NOT HAD ANY UNAUTHORIZED REPAIRS.

Sheldon (1/17/06): First, my sincere thanks for producing the speakers that I have enjoyed since 1989.  I have the 2C's and am considering upgrading to the 2ce Signature. I have heard there are significant improvements. I believe the new ones are 2db less efficient than my 2C's. I am concerned that my Linn LK140 amplifier, 90 into 8 and 140 into 4, will not be enough to drive these at a pleasing level.  What are your thoughts?  Thanks in advance

Answer: HELLO SHELDON, THE SENSITIVITY OF THE 2CE SIG'S MEASURES ABOUT 2DB LESS HOWEVER THEY ARE EASIER TO DRIVE, SHOULD WORK OUT ABOUT THE SAME. THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW FOR SURE IS TO HOOK THE AMP UP, PUT THE VOLUME CONTROL AT APPROX 12 O'CLOCK (WHERE MOST AMPLIFIERS BEGIN TO CLIP WITH A CD PLAYER) PLAY SOME OF YOUR FAVORITE MUSIC. IF YOUR COMMENT IS "THAT IS AS LOUD AS I WOULD EVER WANT" IT IS ENOUGH. IF YOUR COMMENT IS "I WOULD LIKE IT A LITTLE LOUDER SOMETIMES" YOU WILL NEED MORE POWER.

Randall (1/18/06): I own a pair of Vandersteen Model II. Is there any upgrades on the drivers and / or x-over?  Thank you for your attention and the best value in loudspeakers.

Answer: HELLO RANDALL, THE MODEL 1 AND 2 SERIES LOUDSPEAKER ARE NOT UPGRADEABLE. IF THIS IS AN ISSUE I SUGGEST YOU INVEST IN A PAIR OF MODEL THREES, QUATROS OR FIVES, AS THEY ARE GUARANTIED TO BE UPGRADEABLE.

Jacques (1/19/06): I have ordered a pair of Quatros.  Can you please give me a few links by email through which I can directly access a number of reviews on this product?  Or kindly post the links on this website.  I find it difficult to find reviews on it; perhaps because it is such a new product.

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, CONGRATULATIONS ON THE PURCHASE OF A FINE SPEAKER, I AM VERY PROUD OF HOW THEY TURNED OUT. WE HAVE NOT SENT THE QUATRO OUT FOR REVIEW SINCE THE QUATRO IS VERY NEW HAVING ONLY BEEN IN THE MARKET PLACE SINCE LAST FEB 05. WHEN A NEW PRODUCT IS INTRODUCED THE DEMAND IS ALWAYS HIGH BECAUSE OUR DEALERS MUST SET UP DEMO'S PLUS EVERY DESIGNER HAS FANS WHICH WILL BUY EVERYTHING THEY DESIGN RIGHT OUT OF THE GATE. IT TAKES ABOUT A YEAR FOR THIS TO EQUALIZE SO A REVIEW WOULD ONLY MAKE THE CUSTOMERS MORE ANGRY. SOME PEOPLE PURCHASE PRODUCT BASED ON A GOOD REVIEW ONLY TO FIND IT IS NOT WHAT THEY NEED, PUTTING THE PRODUCT ON THE USED MARKET. WE PREFER THE PRODUCT TO ESTABLISH LEGS ON ITS OWN MERIT BEFORE GETTING IT REVIEWED ALLOWING BETTER CONTROL OF PRODUCTION DEMANDS. I AM SURE THERE WILL BE REVIEWS IN THE FUTURE.

Havish (1/19/06): My question is about setting up the 2Ce signatures for proper bass  response.  I have Vandersteen 2Ce signatures, VSM-1s, VCC-1 and a V2W. When  listening to music on my 2Ce signatures, I have noticed that the bass  is lower than expected. The room itself is shaped unevenly and is  probably causing a lot of problems. I used a test CD to measure the bass response and found that I get a steep drop of up to 10 dB below 50 Hz. The bass response in front of the right speaker seems to be much better than in front of the left one. The right speaker has a plain wall about 3 feet behind it whereas the left one has an unevenly shaped wall part of which is much closer to the speaker while the other part has a bookshelf behind it (shown in the top-view figure below). Since, the 2Ce has a rear-firing active acoustic coupler, does this make the composition of the wall behind the speakers more important?  Particularly, I was wondering if the uneven wall shape behind the left speaker could be muting the bass response out of this speaker? Also, since I don't have much flexibility with positioning my speakers in this room as they are part of a home theater set up, will any kind of  room treatment behind the left speaker help? Regardless of these room  issues, the speakers perform wonderfully and have transformed the way  I listen to music. Many thanks for designing such great speakers.

Answer: HELLO HAVISH, SOME ROOMS JUST DO NOT SUPPORT BASS NO MATER WHERE YOU PUT THE SPEAKERS. THE 10" DRIVER IN THE REAR OPERATES BELOW 50HZ, A FREQUENCY WITH A LONG WAVELENGTH SO IT COULD BE ON TOP, UNDER, ON THE SIDE, FORWARD, OR ON THE BACK WITHOUT MAKING ANY DIFFERENCE. THE REASON WE PUT ALL OUR LOW FREQUENCY DRIVERS (OR PORTS) ANYWHERE BUT THE FRONT IS FOR LOWER DISTORTION. ALL DRIVERS FOR LOW FREQUENCY WORK MAKE A LOT OF NON LINEAR NOISES (SURROUND, SPIDER, AND VOICE COIL) SINCE IT DOESN'T MATER WHERE IT IS I PREFER NOT POINTING IT AT THE LISTENER. REMEMBER IF YOU ARE USING THE RADIO SHACK METER IT ROLLS OFF BELOW 50HZ, RESPONSE CURVES AVAILABLE ON THE WEB. YOUR ARE IN LUCK THERE IS A SOLUTION TO YOUR PROBLEM, SUB WOOFERS. MOVIES CONTAIN NOISES MUSIC SPEAKERS WERE NEVER DESIGNED TO HANDLE SO A SUB WOOFER SHOULD BE USED FOR PROTECTION. AS A SIDE BENEFIT YOUR 2 CHANNEL MUSIC WILL IMPROVE BY ADDING A 2WQ. ROOM TREATMENTS WILL NOT HELP A ROOM SUPPORT MORE BASE, SOME WILL ABSORB EXCESS ENERGY. I WOULD VISIT A VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND CHECK OUT WHICH SUB WOULD WORK BEST FOR YOU.

Jacques (1/20/06): I am presently purchasing a pair of Quatros. Will it be possible, later, to upgrade the two high frequency drivers to those of the Model 5A and, if so, will it be possible for technicians in  South Africa to install the new drivers or will I have to send the speakers back to the factory?

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, THE QUATRO IS AN UPGRADEABLE  DESIGN. AT THIS POINT NOT KNOWING WHAT THE UPGRADE WOULD BE I WOULDN'T WANT TO SPECULATE. THE MODEL 5 TO 5A UPGRADE FOR INSTANCE WAS SO INVOLVED THAT IT REQUIRED AN ANECHOIC CHAMBER AND THEREFORE HAD TO BE SENT TO THE FACTORY. THE MID RANGE AND TWEETER OF THE 5A WILL NOT WORK IN THE QUATRO WITHOUT EXTENSIVE WORK ON THE X-OVER IN THE CHAMBER BUT IT WOULD ALSO RAISE THE PRICE 40%!

Dave (1/22/06): I have a small hole in the top wood section of black cloth of 1C, not the sides. How can I replace this small black cloth without sending speaker in to you? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, YOU CAN GO TO THE CUSTOMER SERVICE SECTION OF THIS WEB SITE AND DOWN LOAD INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO REMOVE THE TOP OF YOUR 1C'. THIS IS VERY DIFFICULT SO BE SURE AFTER READING THE INSTRUCTIONS YOU CAN DO THE WORK.  SHOULD YOU DECIDE TO SEND THE SPEAKER IN YOUR LOOKING AT $55.00 PLUS FREIGHT FOR US TO DO IT.

Bill (1/23/06): I bought a pair of used Model 3A's that I loved listening to back in 2001. I had planned to upgrade them eventually. But two bits of misfortune "plagued" these speakers, and none of them had to do with the speaker quality. One, my wife nearly put them on the front door step of our house when I got home. She was pretty furious that I bought them. I told her they were a steal. She didn't care. So there was some bad "kharma" there.  (My wife and I get along very well, despite the speaker mishap!) Two, eventually I had to sell them because of some financial issues. This was a very difficult decision, as you can probably imagine.  I'm looking at saving some money to buy Vandersteen again. I want to stay within a budget and make sure my wife doesn't put these on the porch! My dilemma is  choosing between the 1Cs and the 2Ce Signatures.  The 3As are little much for my budget. Will I get similar, if not better sound, from the 2Ce Signatures, to the 3As? Or are 1Cs a good compromise in a high-end speaker in the Vandersteen line? My reluctance in getting the 1Cs is due to them not having a midrange driver. I want to also add two subwoofers in the future.  I'd be running the speakers from a Yamaha A/V receiver and a Sony ED SACD player through the analog bypass.  Thanks for your time.

Answer: HELLO BILL, YOUR QUESTION IS A TOUGH ONE. ANY A/V RECEIVER IS LOW IN SOUND QUALITY ESPECIALLY DRIVING LARGE SPEAKERS. I CAN RELATE TO YOUR DESIRE FOR A MID RANGE DRIVER, IF YOU WANT GREAT MID RANGE YOU NEED A MID RANGE! MANY ULTRA HIGH END SPEAKERS BREAK THIS RULE. HAVING SAID THAT I RECOMMEND YOU GET SEPARATES IF THAT IS NOT POSSIBLE AND A RECEIVER IS A MUST, USE 1C'S. I SUGGEST YOU GO TO YOUR NEAREST DEALER AND AUDITION THE MODEL 2CE AND THE 1C WITH APPROPRIATE EQUIPMENT AND PICK YOUR POISON.

Unknown (1/25/06): what period was the Model 2CE in production? Is the grill removable?

Answer: HELLO, THE MODEL 2CE WENT INTO PRODUCTION 1N FEB 1991. THE 2CE INITIALLY HAD THE 3/4" ALLOY TWEETER OF THE 2CI (IN PRODUCTION 1989-1991) BECAUSE WE HAD NOT COMPLETED THE 1" UNTIL NOV 1991. SN#56032 WAS THE FIRST 2CE TO INCLUDE THE 1" TWEETER AT THIS POINT THE TOP, BOTTOM, AND INPUT PLATE WERE THE ONLY PARTS COMMON BETWEEN THE TWO. IN 1998 THE 2CE WAS DISCONTINUED AND THE 2CE SIGNATURE WENT INTO PRODUCTION. THE LAST 3 MONTHS OF THE 2CE PRODUCTION HAD ABOUT HALF OF THE SIGNATURE PARTS INCLUDED (SN#77000 AND ABOVE) AND CAN BE UPGRADED TO SIGNATURES AT THE FACTORY FOR $380.00 PLUS FREIGHT. THE 2CE SIGNATURES ARE CURRENTLY STILL IN PRODUCTION BUT HAVE HAD YEARLY UPGRADES, THE MOST SIGNIFICANT IN FEB 2005 (SN#57374 AND ABOVE). THE GRILL CLOTH IS NOT REMOVABLE HOWEVER THE CUSTOMER SERVICE SECTION OF THIS WEB SITE HAS INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO GET INTO THE BOTTOM FOR SERVICE.

Ken (1/25/06): After years of jealousy of a freind with model 2's, I am going to put together my home theater using Vandersteen all the way around. What are your thoughts on 7.1 channels for the upcoming hi-res formats (Dolby TrueHD, etc.)? Would using 4 VSM's work well, with 2 mounted on back wall and 2 mounted on sides? I may start my Vandersteen addiction on the used market. Can you determine the vintage based on serial numbers? I have come across a pair of 2ce's that are serial # in the 58000 range and a VCC-1 that is in the 28000 range. Owner is not the original owner so they don't know the age of the speakers and it would help if I could find that out. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO KEN, TIME AND PHASE CORRECT SPEAKERS ARE THE ONLY WAY TO DO MULTI-CHANNEL CORRECTLY AND ALL OF OUR SPEAKER MODELS ARE COMPATIBLE WITH EACH OTHER. THE IMPORTANT DECISION BETWEEN 5.1 VERSES 7.1 IS QUALITY. BETTER HIGHER PERFORMANCE EQUIPMENT IN 5.1 WILL ALWAYS BE BETTER THAN 7.1 DONE WITH LOWER QUALITY EQUIPMENT. VSM-1 ARE WHAT I RECOMMEND FOR REAR, SIDE OR EVEN FRONT CHANNEL USE. FOR CENTER I RECOMMEND THE VCC-5 BECAUSE MOVIES AND MUSIC VIDEOS ARE SO DEMANDING OF IT. REMEMBER IF IT IS ON THE SCREEN IT WILL BE SENT TO THE CENTER. THE VCC-1 IS FINE FOR A BUDGET SYSTEM USING THE 1C, BUT NOT DYNAMIC ENOUGH FOR HIGH END USE. BUYING USED SPEAKERS I DO NOT RECOMMEND UNLESS THEY ARE NEAR BY SO A DEMO CAN VERIFY THEIR INTERIOR CONDITION. I HAVE SEEN MANY SPEAKERS IN FOR REPAIR BECAUSE ALL THE DRIVERS APPEAR TO WORK BUT THE SOUND IS NOT RIGHT ONLY TO FIND A RADIO SHACK TWEETER KLUGED IN PLACE. BUYING USED IS A GREAT WAY TO GET MORE FOR YOUR MONEY IF YOU REALLY DID. 58000 SERIES 2CE SPEAKERS ARE OVER 15 YEARS OLD, I WOULD RECOMMEND A 2CE SIGNATURE WHICH HAS MUCH LOWER DISTORTION, BETTER POWER HANDLING AND CURRENT TECHNOLOGY. THIS IS A GOOD EXAMPLE OF SOMEONE TRYING FOR 7.1 ON A BUDGET OR 5.1 AT A MUCH HIGHER LEVEL OF PERFORMANCE FOR THE SAME MONEY.

Bob (1/25/06): I saw your Quatro with wood finish at the 2006 CES and they looked great! Are they available yet? Also, I am considering moving up to the Quatro and want to add a new 2 channel amp when I do. Will 150 watt per channel be enough or should I be looking at 200-300 watt range?  Thanks.

Answer: HELLO BOB, THANK YOU FOR THE COMPLEMENT ON THE WOOD QUATRO. THEY ARE IN PRODUCTION NOW IN THE STANDARD FINISHES AVAILABLE ON THE MODEL 5A. WHAT AMPLIFIER WOULD BE BEST FOR YOU CAN ONLY BE DETERMINED BY A DEMO. I WOULD NOT BE WORRIED ABOUT POWER BECAUSE THE SOUND IS MORE IMPORTANT. AN AMPLIFIERS POWER RATING HAS VERY LITTLE TO DO WITH ITS ABILITY TO DRIVE A SPEAKER. USE SOME OF YOUR FAVORITE RECORDINGS (VINYL IF YOU WANT HIGH RESOLUTION) SET THE VOLUME ON THE PRE-AMP TO 12 O'CLOCK (CLIPPING POINT OF MOST AMPLIFIERS) IF YOU OBSERVATION IS I WOULD NEVER LISTEN THAT LOUD, ITS ENOUGH. IF YOU WOULD LIKE IT LOUDER DIG DEEPER INTO YOUR POCKET AND BUY MORE POWER. REMEMBER TO GET YOUR ADVICE FROM A DEALER WHO HAS VANDERSTEEN, NOT ONE WHO SAYS HE KNOWS VANDERSTEEN.

Mike (1/26/06): I have owned the 2CE Signature model for a couple of years and absolutely love the speakers. The addition of the 2CE's have led me to upgrade my source and modify my amplifier. I am now testing speaker cables and have noticed considerable differences between stranded and solid core, difference wire layout, etc. My problem is that on particular music I may prefer one wire and on another piece of music another wire. I am looking at a number of DIY receipts. Any suggestions? Are their any definite technologies like solid core and or litz construction that are superior?  Thank you for using barrier strips, I agree they are superior - plus dealing with spades when making DIY cables is much easier.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, THANKS FOR YOUR POSITIVE COMMENTS ESPECIALLY ON THE BARRIER STRIP. I HAVE TRIED DOZENS OF "HIGH END" CONNECTORS NONE OF THEM COMPARE, ARE AS GAS TIGHT, LOW METAL MASS (HIGH FREQUENCY CONDUCTION), AND IF YOU USE "O" LUGS SOUND JUST AS GOOD 2 YEARS FROM NOW. WE GET COMPLAINTS EVERY NOW AND THEN WHEN CUSTOMERS BUY A WIRE FROM A COMPANY THAT ESPOUSES THE MERIT OF SKIN EFFECT ONLY TO HANG A CONNECTOR ON THE END THAT HAS A POUND OF BRIGHT SHINY METAL IN IT. REMEMBER MOST PEOPLE BUY A WIRE LOOKING FOR IT TO HAVE A CHARACTER OF ITS OWN THAT THEY LIKE. IF YOU WANT A TRANSPARENT WIRE DO A STRAIGHT WIRE BY-PASS. COMPARE ONE INCH OF HIGH QUALITY 18GA SOLID WIRE TO 20 FEET OF WHATEVER. THE LONG LENGTH OF WIRE THAT SOUNDS THE MOST LIKE THE SHORT ONE INCH IS THE MOST TRANSPARENT. AFTER DETERMINING THE WINNER USE MONO AMPLIFIERS NEXT TO THE SPEAKERS WITH ABOUT 2 FEET OF IT TERMINATED WITH #10 O-LUGS, SNUG DOWN THE SCREWS AND BE GOOD FOR YEARS.

Curtis (1/27/06): Hi: I recently purchased a pair of Quatros. Is there any literature available, or, if not, could you explain how to "dial in" the proper bass response by using the dials on the back of the speaker? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO CURTIS, CONGRATULATIONS, I HOPE YOU HAVE MANY YEARS OF MUSICAL ENJOYMENT WITH THEM. THE OWNERS MANUAL IS BEING PRINTED NOW AND WILL BE MAILING THEM SOON. THEY WILL BE AVAILABLE ON THIS WEB SITE AT THAT TIME ALSO. YOUR DEALER WILL ADJUST THE 11 BANDS ONCE YOU HAVE SOME TIME ON THEM. YOU SHOULD CONTACT YOUR DEALER AND LET HIM KNOW THAT YOU ARE READY. THE OWNERS MANUAL WILL HAVE INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO DO THIS BUT YOU WILL NEED THE CALIBRATED DISK AND S.P.L. METER. THIS YOU SHOULD BE ABLE TO BORROW FROM YOUR DEALER ONCE WE PROVIDE IT TO THEM. WE HOPE TO FINISH THIS IN ABOUT 2 OR 3 MONTHS. IN THE MEAN TIME THE DEALERS HAVE BEEN TRAINED ON AN ALTERNATE METHOD. USE THE LARGE KNOBS WITH THE COIN SLOTS ANY TIME YOU WANT. THE LEVEL CONTROL WORKS JUST LIKE A VOLUME CONTROL FOR THE BASS. ADJUST THE BASS LEVEL WITH A JAZZ RECORDING FEATURING STAND UP BASS UNTIL THE BASS SOUNDS EQUALLY LOUD AS THE PLAYER GOES UP AND DOWN THROUGH THE X-OVER REGION. ONCE THE LEVEL IS SET ADJUST THE CONTOUR TO TASTE (#1 TIGHT AND DRY AUDIOPHILE LIKE, #10 BOO MY LIKE HOME THEATER).

Anthony (1/27/06): Richard, I just recently purchased your Main Center Channel the VCC-Ref  (VCC-5) and was wondering if the best position of the speaker is above the listening position, or below? Also Is the tweeter itself covered in a metal mesh? I looked in side with a flash light. I just want to  make sure the one I purchased, is and original and not repaired with another driver.  Thanks in advance - Anthony

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, THE BEST LOCATION FOR THE VCC-5 IS COVERED IN THE OWNERS MANUAL. THE PRODUCTION VCC-5 DOES HAVE A METAL MESH OVER THE TWEETER TO HOLD THE DIFFUSER.

Anthony (1/27/06): Richard, I have a pair of Vandersteen 2Ce Sigs. How can I tell if they are originals or upgraded?

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, THERE IS NO WAY TO KNOW EXCEPT TO ASK THE ORIGINAL OWNER. I HAVE BEEN STRIVING FOR ALMOST 30 YEARS TO KEEP VANDERSTEEN PRODUCTS THE BEST VALUE IN THE INDUSTRY. SOME THINK I HAVE SUCCEEDED. THE COST OF DOCUMENTING THIS KIND OF INFORMATION REQUIRED TO ANSWER YOUR QUESTION WOULD HAVE HAD A LARGE IMPACT ON THAT OVER THE YEARS. SO WE DON'T. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT SERVICE WILL BE NEEDED ONCE OUR TECHNICIAN OPENS THEM UP EVERYTHING WE NEED TO KNOW IS THERE TO SEE. NO COST TO THE CONSUMER.

Anthony (1/29/06): Thanks for the replys, to my last 2 questions. One last one for now...  Does an upgraded speaker from you differ in anyway way then an ORIGINAL made? AKA upgraded 2Ce Sig, to an ORIGINAL 2ce Sig... Sound?  Appearance?  Also, I want you to know that I have been an audiophile for couple years, and Vandersteen are a steal in the audio industry. I have my speakers very well setup, and they blow away all speakers I have heard so far regardless of price. I recently did a shootout with The Martin Logan  Summits vs. my 2Ce Sigs, and was blown away that the 2Ce Sigs matched (I would say surpassed) the Summits Highs, but when we got to midrange and lower it was the 2Ces that took home the trophy. I have converted at least 4 friends into buying at least the 1C's - and some VCC-1's. I also know you are mostly a separates man, but I wonder what the last time you used your Vandys (maybe not the 5A's) with a good reviewer? I am currently using a Denon 3805 HT Receiver with an External DAC (Benchmark Media DAC 1)from really good transport.  (Denon 3910.) The receiver is used only for amp, pre amp only. I have it in "pure" Direct mode so there is no adverse or added processing to the sound. And I will say it was just as good as some of the tube AMP/Pre amp combos I have used in the past (Audio research, Cary Audio, Mcintosh) With some Combos I was able to get tad bit crisper highs, but they were significantly more expensive then the receiver.  I would love for you to stop by and audition your own speakers, and tell  me what you think. (I'm close to Ultra Fidelis - the only authorized Vandersteen dealer in WI.)Here is a couple of links to my setup, let let me know what you think? http://img515.imageshack.us/my.php?image=hometheaterfull0rk.jpg  Home Theater FULL SETUP! http://img371.imageshack.us/my.php?image=hometheatervandersteenvcc5top9.jpg  Vandersteen VCC-5 Top http://img488.imageshack.us/my.php?image=hometheatersource7fl.jpg   Home Theater Source Devices http://img488.imageshack.us/my.php?image=hometheatersourceclose8bi.jpg  Home Theater Source Devices Close Up.  I hope you like the custom decal made of fabric that I have on the  VCC-REF.  Took 4 hours to make.  (Also... the right speaker in the full picture is measured to be identical to the left in terms of placement, but doesn't look that way in the pic. I took 3 pics and Photoshoped them together.)

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, YOUR RIGHT SET UP IS EVERYTHING. MY EXPERIENCE HAS BEEN THAT MANY AUDIOPHILES WOULD RATHER SPEND MORE MONEY ON NEW WIRE, POWER CONDITIONERS, AND NEW ELECTRONICS AND FORGET BASIC HOUSE KEEPING. I CAN ONLY PASS ON MY EXPERIENCE BUT UNDERSTAND THAT OUR DEALERS EXPOSE VANDERSTEEN SPEAKERS TO MANY MORE ROOMS AND DIFFERENT ELECTRONICS THAN I. WE ARE CONSTANTLY IMPROVING OUR PRODUCTS SO WHAT WE MAKE NOW IS ALWAYS GOING TO BE DIFFERENT THAN LAST YEAR. ITS A REAL PLEASURE TO HEAR FROM SOMEONE HAVING SO MUCH ENJOYMENT WITH OUR PRODUCT.

Craig (1/29/06): Why are your speakers only rated at 86 to 90 db when there are some speakers at over 94 db spl?

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, I LIKE MOST SPEAKERS DESIGNERS TRY TO GET THE SENSITIVITY AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. WHEN BEING TIME AND PHASE CORRECT IS THE MAIN DESIGN TARGET (I BELIEVE THIS IS THE MOST IMPORTANT PARAMETER IN LOUDSPEAKER DESIGN) THERE ARE SOME RULES. 1) FROM 150 HZ AND ABOVE ONLY ONE DRIVER CAN BE USED PER FREQUENCY RANGE. USING MORE THAN ONE MID-RANGE FOR INSTANCE NO MATER HOW PERFECT WOULD SMEAR EACH OTHER. TIME SMEAR LOWERS REAL TRANSPARENCY. 2) EACH DRIVER MUST BE SMALL ENOUGH TO MINIMIZE BEAMING. BEAMING WILL CAUSE PROBLEMS WITH ROOM REFLECTIONS NOT BEING A FACSIMILE OF THE DIRECT SOUND. BEAMING DEGRADES IMAGE STABILITY. 3) DRIVER DIAPHRAGMS MUST BE RIDGED ENOUGH TO ACT PISTONIC AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE. NON PISTONIC CONES CAUSE TIME SMEAR. 4) FIRST ORDER TRANSFER FUNCTION BETWEEN THE DRIVERS INCLUDING THEIR X-OVERS. THIS ALLOWS FOR WAVEFORM PRESERVATION, THE KEY TO REPRODUCING MUSIC IN A UNBELIEVABLY REALISTIC WAY. ALL THIS ADDS UP TO ABOUT 86DB SENSITIVITY EVEN WITH TODAY'S SOPHISTICATED MAGNET SYSTEMS AND CONE/DOME TECHNOLOGIES. TO GET HIGHER SENSITIVITY YOU WOULD NEED HORN (VERY COLORED), MULTIPLE DRIVERS (TIME SMEAR), OR CONES/DOMES SO LIGHTWEIGHT THEY ARE IN CONTROLLED CHAOS (DISTORTED WAVEFORM). ALL OF THESE ARE UNACCEPTABLE TO ME. TODAY WE HAVE REASONABLY AFFORDABLE HIGH QUALITY POWER AVAILABLE LOWERING THE NEED FOR HIGH SENSITIVITY. IF I COULD DO ALL OF THE ABOVE INCLUDING HIGH SENSITIVITY I WOULD NOT BE ANSWERING THIS QUESTION. I WOULD BE A RETIRED MULTI- MILLIONAIRE IN THE CARIBBEAN.

Ashok (1/30/06): I am trying a BAT VK-75 SE amplifier which has balanced inputs with a pair of your fabulous Vandersteen 5A's. According to Victor Khomenko from BAT, "each channel has two phases on balanced interface, each one of them being 215k. How is that fact treated by the crossover - you need to ask the Vandersteen people, they should know."  So do I set each of the high pass filters connected between the outputs of the preamp and amplifier, at a setting of 200k (or 300K which is the next higher level for 215k) or 400K (or 500K)? Thanks for your time.

Answer: HELLO ASHOK, THE HP-5B DECAL SAYS TO ADD THE SUM OF THE LEGS AND THAT THEY BE IDENTICAL. IN YOUR CASE THEY ARE BOTH 215K SO THAT WOULD ADD UP TO 430K. THE VALUE WOULD BE 400K ON THE HP-5B WHICH IS THE NEAREST SETTING AVAILABLE.

Roberto (1/30/06): I write from Mexico City. my question is where can buy the service manual of subwoofer Model 2Wq ?

Answer: HELLO ROBERTO, WE HOPE TO HAVE THE 2WQ OWNERS MANUAL ON THIS WEB SITE WITHIN THE NEXT 6 MONTHS. THE ONLY OTHER WAY IS TO BUY ONE FROM DELRAMA OUR EXPORTER.  HIS FAX#480-367-1355.

Jacques (1/30/06): CAN I USE BANANA PLUGS ON MY NEW QUATROS WHEN THEY ARRIVE - OR IS THERE SOME SPECIAL TYPE OF PLUG I SHOULD USE?

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, ALL VANDERSTEEN SPEAKERS (1C EXCEPTED) ARE HOOKED UP WITH SPADES. THEY CAN NOT BE WIDER THAN 7/16" (12MM) WITH #10 SLOT TO FIT THE BARRIER STRIP. BANANA PLUGS WILL NOT WORK AND ARE TO POOR A CONNECTION FOR A SPEAKER AT THIS LEVEL. READ FAQ: MIKE 1/26/06 ON THIS PAGE FOR MORE INFO.

Dave (2/2/06): I'm finally upgrading from stereo to 5.1 Home Theater. I currently own a pair of Model 2C's (S/N: 50xxxC). After listening to the VSM-1surrounds and the VCC-1 center, the decision to purchase was easy, for they sounded great. Selection of a subwoofer was not so easy. First, the dealer didn't have the 2Wq on display. I own an Adcom component system, so I believe this would be the preferred subwoofer. Second, from reading the Vandersteen literature, it appears a stereo subwoofer configuration is preferred. If this is true, why is it not an option to purchase a stereo subwoofer configuration where each subwoofer would only have inputs for one channel and the crossover for the pre-amp output would also be designed for a single channel. My thought was that a savings could be passed on to the consumer and perhaps subwoofer sales might increase.

Answer: HELLO DAVE C, WE DO RECOMMEND STEREO SUB-WOOFERS HOWEVER WITH H.T. A VARIATION WOULD BE ONE 2WQ AND ONE V2W. FULL RANGE SPEAKERS LIKE YOUR 2C CAN BE DAMAGED BY THE CRAZY STUFF ON SOME MOVIES. THE GOOD NEWS BAD NEWS IS BY SELECTING SMALL ON YOUR PROCESSOR DOLBY REQUIRES (STUPIDLY IN MY OPINION) 12 DB OR MORE ROLL OFF CAUSING MANY TIME AND PHASE PROBLEMS. THE SOLUTION IS A 2WQ WHICH HAS A 6DB X-OVER, PROTECTS THE 2C SPEAKERS, LOWERS THE DISTORTION IN THOSE AND THE AMPLIFIER DRIVING THEM. WIN WIN. USING A V2W CONNECTED TO THE L.F.E. OUTPUT OF YOUR PROCESSOR WILL GIVE THE BIG BOTTOM PEOPLE LOOK FOR IN H.T. WHILE WATCHING MOVIES. IN SOME CIRCLES THE 2WQ HAS BEEN CRITICIZED FOR NOT HAVING ENOUGH OUTPUT. I ASSURE YOU THAT IF IT IS ON THE MOVIE IT WILL BE REPRODUCED ALBEIT WITH PROPER Q. MOST PEOPLE INCLUDING ME WANT MORE THAN WHAT HAS BEEN RECORDED, HENCE THE V2W. THE PROPER WAY WOULD BE ACCURATE REPRODUCTION (2WQ'S) WITH A BASE CONTROL ON THE PROCESSOR SO ONE COULD DIAL ALL THE BOOM DESIRED. THIS IS CONSIDERED SAC-RELIGIOUS IN HIGH END SO WE HAVE IT BUILT INTO OUR SUB-WOOFERS, UNFORTUNATELY WITHOUT A DEFEAT SWITCH. GOING TO ONE INPUT AND HALF A X-OVER WOULD SAVE ABOUT $5 AND NOT ALLOW THE SCENARIO ABOVE.

Steve (2/2/06): Hi Richard.. More a comment than a question. I've heard the Quatros and I think they sound wonderful. Why have they been given short shrift here on your website?? The other products have long, elaborate descriptions detailing the design principals guiding their development, yet the Quatro has what looks like a hastily created one-page spec. sheet. that aside, your products are awesome. I hope you have a succession plan in place for your business for the day when you hang up the tuning fork and oscilloscope. ..I'd like to think Vandersteen speakers will continue to be made for decades to come.

Answer: HELLO STEVE, OVER THE YEARS ALL OF OUR PRODUCTS HAVE PRECEDED THE LITERATURE AND COLOR PICTURES BUY A YEAR OR TWO. NICE LITERATURE COSTS A LOT OF MONEY AND I WOULD RATHER SPEND IT ON THE PRODUCT IN THE HOPE THAT WE WON'T SHIP ANY HOMING PIGEONS.  IN THE END DEALER AND CUSTOMER COMPLAINTS WIN AND WE PRODUCE DECENT LITERATURE.  ENEKE AND I HAVE FOUR CHILDREN ALL OF WHICH ARE INVOLVED AT VANDERSTEEN AUDIO.  I'M AFRAID THE AUDIO WORLD WILL HAVE TO PUT UP WITH VANDERSTEEN'S FOR MANY MORE YEARS.

Craig (2/2/06): Hello Mr. Vandersteen my wife and I have 2Ce Signatures and two 2Wq's driven by Quicksilver V4's that we are very impressed with.  I'm curious about active Bi-Amping, which in our setup I think would be in effect Tri-Amping. My question is why don't I see a second set of terminals on your, or any other speaker that bypasses the crossover for the purpose of  Bi-Amping? I suspect going to 3A Signatures would be our best bet, but  haven't heard them yet.  Thanks for all you do, Craig

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, SOUNDS LIKE A NICE SYSTEM TO ME. THE ONLY BI-AMPING WE RECOMMEND IS WHEN YOU ADD A PROPERLY DESIGNED SUB-WOOFER THAT HIGH PASS'S THE MAIN SPEAKERS AND AMPLIFIER. THIS YOU HAVE ALREADY DONE, IF YOU WANT HIGHER PERFORMANCE TRY THE QUATRO'S. THE REASON I DO NOT PUT DIRECT CONNECTORS ON ANY OF OUR SPEAKERS IS BECAUSE IT DOESN'T WORK. USING OUTBOARD X-OVERS ASSUMES PERFECT DRIVERS AND I HAVE NOT FOUND ANY OF THOSE. AIR CORE INDUCTORS AND MODERN CAPACITORS MANIPULATED TO WORK WITH THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE DRIVER WILL ACCOMPLISH MUCH BETTER RESULTS AT THE LISTENING POSITION THAN ELECTRONIC X-OVER/AMP COULD EVER ACCOMPLISH.

James (2/2/06): I own a pair of 2CE signatures and am concerned about the dimensions of my new listening room. The dimensions of my new  listening room are 8.5' x 14' with 10' ceiling. Can the 2CE signatures perform well in a room of such dimensions. If not, would any of your other speakers be a more suitable match for my room size? I hate the thought of giving up my 2CE Sig's but if I must I would want to replace them with another Vandersteen speaker.

Answer: HELLO JAMES, HOW SPEAKERS WORK IN A ROOM IS A COMPLICATED COMBINATION OF DIFFERENT PARAMETERS NOT DESCRIBED BY THE DIMENSIONS. WITH ENOUGH EXPERIMENTATION VERY GOOD SOUND CAN BE FOUND IN ALMOST ANY ROOM. SOMETIMES AUDIOPHILES THINK THERE IS NO CHANCE AND SETTLE FOR SOME CHEAP SPEAKERS AT THE SWAP MEET, THIS GUARANTIES BAD SOUND. ANOTHER OPTION IS TO GET A SMALL LITTLE TWO WAY ALSO GUARANTEEING NO MUSIC BECAUSE THE FOUNDATION OF MUSIC IS BASS. ONLY AN AUDIOPHILE CAN LISTEN TO A LITTLE TWO WAY LOUDSPEAKER WITH THE SCREAMING MEANIES AND CALL IT MUSIC NO MATTER HOW EXPENSIVE. THIS IS SOMETIMES CALLED TRANSPARENCY.  I CALL IT NO BASS WITH AN EMPHASIS ON MIDS AND HIGHS. YOUR 2CE SIGNATURES MAY LOAD UP THE ROOM IN THE BASS IF THAT OCCURS TRY HIGH PASSING THE AMPLIFIER. CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER AND BORROW THE WX-2 ADJUSTABLE HIGH PASS IF YOU CAN. START AT HALF THE IMPEDANCE OF YOUR AMPLIFIER AND WORK YOUR WAY DOWN. AT SOME POINT YOU WILL ROLL OFF YOUR 2CE SIGS AT THE SAME FREQUENCY THE ROOM IS LIFTING RESULTING IN FLAT RESPONSE. IT TURNS OUT THAT BASS IS LIFTED AT 6DB PER OCTAVE WHICH IS THE INVERSE OF THE HIGH PASS. IT WILL TAKE A LITTLE EXPERIMENTING BUT THE END RESULT IS MUSICAL. GOOD LUCK.

Patrick (2/3/06): Why are the prices for your speakers in Canada so much higher than in the USA even though the CAD is at a sixteen year high?  Love your 5As, but the prices up here is daunting.

Answer: HELLO PATRICK, CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER AND GET A NEW QUOTE. WE HAVE NOT SOLD MANY 5A'S UP THERE AND THE EXCHANGE RATE HAS BEEN MOVING AS YOU SAY.

Bill (2/3/06): I have had a pair of Vandersteen 5s for approximately six years and recently acquired a pair of Pass Labs Aleph 2 mono-blocks.  I'm running them in balanced form and the owners manual tells me the Input Impedance for balanced operation is 25 kohm. What are the appropriate settings for the crossovers?

Answer: HELLO BILL, YOU MUST CHECK WITH PASS LABS AND MAKE SURE BOTH LEGS ARE THE SAME. SOME OF THE PASS LABS ARE NOT TRUE BALANCED LIKE 5K ON ONE LEG AND 20K ON THE OTHER LEG. THIS IS VERY DANGEROUS FOR THE 7 INCH MID BASS DRIVER AND YOUR DEALER SHOULD HAVE VERIFIED THAT FOR YOU. PASS LABS WILL MAKE YOU A CUSTOM HIGH PASS BECAUSE OURS WONT WORK.

Mike (2/4/06): If I understand the 2CE serial numbers correctly from your reply to Unknown (1/17/06) - SN#56032 and SN#77000 were used for the 2CE, but "THE 2CE SIGNATURES ARE CURRENTLY STILL IN PRODUCTION BUT HAVE HAD YEARLY UPGRADES, THE MOST SIGNIFICANT IN FEB 2005 (SN#57374 AND ABOVE)". The serial numbers don't seem to be sequential - my 2CE Signatures are 55020 and were purchased in Jan 2003. What upgrades have been done since then? Drivers, crossover, etc? I am upgrading my amplifier and would like to use the same barrier strips as the 2CE Sig - where can I source them?  Thank you.

Answer:
HELLO MIKE, THE FIRST 2CE SIGNATURE WAS SN#50000 THEY ARE NOT SEQUENTIAL WITH THE 2CE. YOUR LOOKING A THREE YEARS MANY UPGRADES HAVE HAPPENED. IT WOULD BE VERY EXPENSIVE TO CHANGE OUT ALL THE CHANGES, EACH ONE ONLY A SMALL IMPROVEMENT. TOGETHER THEY ADD UP OVER THE YEARS. IF UP-GRADES ARE AN ISSUE I SUGGEST THE THREE SERIES OR HIGHER THEY A GUARANTEED UPGRADEABLE. YOUR DEALER CAN ORDER THE BARRIER STRIP FOR YOU. $15.00 EACH FOR THE SINGLES $25.00 FOR DOUBLES PLUS FREIGHT.

Bill (2/5/06): I would like to start by thanking you for designing great sounding speakers. I currently own a set of 1Cs which I love. I am contemplating  upgrading to a set of 2CEs or 2CE Sigs. Here's my question.. I have this odd room which is essentially 14'x14'. With the back wall (behind me) that has 1/3 of it open to a kitchen. Using your EXCELLENT manual and much experimentation, I was able to dial in my 1Cs. But given the room size and furniture I cannot place speakers far out into the room. Every time I have heard the 2CEs, they were in a much bigger room and were placed farther apart and much farther out into the room from the wall(behind speaker). I am concerned that the 2CEs or Sigs might be too much speaker for my room.  My seating arrangement puts me  ~8 feet from my 1Cs.  I wanted to upgrade to the 2CEs for the midrange and lower bass improvements. What do you think??

Answer: HELLO BILL, I THINK YOU SHOULD GET AT LEAST AS GOOD PERFORMANCE FROM THE 2CE SIGNATURES AS THE 1C'S. I KNOW SQUARE ROOMS CAN BE A PROBLEM BUT IF THAT'S ALL YOU HAVE IT COULD WORK WITH SOME EXPERIMENTING.  I WOULD CONTACT YOUR DEALER WHO WILL HAVE EXPERIENCED MANY MORE ROOMS THAN I. CHECK OUT THE QUESTIONS A FEW BACK YOU MAY NEED TO TRY A HIGH PASS.

Lonny (2/6/06): Hey there.  At what time in the future do you suppose your going to turn off the CAPPS????????  I am going blind reading this stuff......... Its a good thing you know how to make speakers.

Answer: HELLO LONNY, AFTER A LONG DAY,  CAPS IS ALL I CAN READ!!!!!!!!!!! I AM HOPING ENOUGH OF YOU COMPLAIN SO I CAN END THIS EXPERIMENT AND GO BACK TO WHAT I USED TO DO IN THE EVENING.

John (2/7/06): I have a receiver that has adjustable crossover (in frequency and in slope) and I was wondering, with my 3a Sigs, vcc-5, and vsm-1's, do I maintain a x-over at 80hz with the 6db slope or should I individually apply the crossover at different frequencies for each speaker, and if so, what would that x-over point be (3a's-40hz?, cc-5-60 hz?). Thanks

Answer: HELLO JOHN, MOST RECEIVERS DO NOT HAVE FIRST ORDER (6DB PER OCTAVE) SLOPES AVAILABLE. CHECK AND MAKE SURE YOURS DOES AND POST THE FACT HERE WHEN YOU CAN, I WOULD LIKE TO KNOW. I WOULD USE 50HZ FOR ALL CHANNELS

Jonas (2/7/06): A couple more questions as I am working on designing the room that will house my 2 ch and HT system. My first question is whether with 5A's used as the Left and Right channels in a HT environment will do the job for HT or whether I will also need a pair of V2Ws (I live in a Manhattan apartment so I'll never go to too crazy with e dbls.)  Second, I am looking at installing a balanced power system (such as equi=tech). Do you think this would have a meaningful performance impact?  Thanks so much for making the best speakers I've ever owned (or heard!)

Answer: HELLO JONAS, H.T. WITH MODEL 5A'S WILL BE GREAT, NO ADDITIONAL SUBS REQUIRED UNLESS YOU LIKE THE BASS EXAGGERATED. ALL POWER CONDITIONERS SHOULD BE TRIED AFTER THE SYSTEM IS FINISHED. ADDING A COMPONENT IN THE AUDIO CHAIN CAN ONLY HURT THE SOUND UNLESS IT IS SOLVING A PROBLEM GREATER THAN ITS NEGATIVE CONTRIBUTION. TODAY EVERY HOME HAS A POTENTIAL POWER PROBLEM, BUT IT TAKES TIME TO FIND THE SOLUTION. HIGH END EQUIPMENT TODAY ARE DESIGNED WITH VERY GOOD POWER SUPPLIES SO IF THEY ARE DOING THE JOB, AFTERMARKET BOXES MAY NOT BE NECESSARY.

Jacques (2/7/06):  The calibrated disk necessary for the adjustment of the 11 bass bands on the Quatro - is it the same as needed for the Model 5. My distributor has the latter and is very helpful and will gladly lend this to my dealer in another city to set up my Quatros.

Answer:
HELLO JACQUES, YOUR DEALER SHOULD HAVE ANSWERED THIS QUESTION FOR YOU. THE SET UP FOR THE QUATRO'S IS THE SAME AS THE 5A. PLEASE CONTACT YOUR DEALER.

Anthony (2/8/06): I know you don't like giving out recommendations for speaker cords, but what are your top picks?  I so far like Kimber Cable, what is your opinion of them?  I am Double Bi-Wiring 4PR, and going to Double Bi-Wire 4TC. I hope I hear a great increase in Audio Perfection.  P.S. You never actually answered my question form the last question I asked on 1-29-06, also what did you think of the pictures?

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, CHECK OUT THE FAQ ON SPEAKER WIRES. IF YOU FEEL I HAVE NOT ANSWERED YOUR QUESTION'S) CALL ME AT 559-582-0324 ASK FOR TECH.

Jeff (2/8/06): I have a pair of 2Ce's with a 2WQ subwoofer that I have been using with a power amplifier that has a 100k input impedance. I have been using your X2 inline crossovers with good results but have just bought a new amplifier with a 50k input impedance. Until I can get a new set of crossovers from my dealer, if I use the 100K ones, will this raise or lower the crossover point going to the 2Ce's? I noticed that you mention an 80hz crossover. Thanks!

Answer: HELLO JEFF, YOU ARE NOT ABLE TO MOVE THE X-OVER, IT IS FIXED AT 80HZ. INSTALL THE ADJUSTABLE WX-2 THAT CAME WITH THE WOOFER AND FOLLOW THE DIRECTIONS IN THE MANUAL REEVALUATE WHAT VALUE X-2 WORKS BEST FOR YOUR SYSTEM AND ORDER THE NEW VALUE FROM YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER.

Mike (2/8/06): I am considering a new power amplifier for my 2CES, class D seems to be the hot new thing. With so many products on the market, I will be only able to listen to a few. I have read there are issues with phase shift with class D compared to traditional amplifier-I believe one manufacturer allows the user to adjust the phase to emulate the bass response of traditional amplifiers. Do you feel they are a technical breakthrough? Have you been impressed with class D amplifiers in  general? Thanks for taking your time answering questions on this forum, it is very interesting and informative.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, THE BEST ADVICE YOU CAN GET IS FROM A VANDERSTEEN DEALER WHERE YOU CAN HAVE A LISTENING SESSION SO HE CAN LEARN YOUR TASTE. THE MARKET IS FLOODED WITH AMPLIFIER CHOICES 99% OF THEM I HAVE NEVER HEARD ABOUT LET ALONE LISTENED TO. I KNOW YOU WILL SAY, BUT THE DEALER IS GOING TO SELL ME WHAT HE SELLS. GOOD SOUND IS HOW HE SELLS EVERYTHING SO OVER TIME HIS AMPLIFIER CHOICES WILL BE THE ONES THAT HE RECOMMENDS. I THINK AT THAT POINT HIS GOAL AND YOURS ARE THE SAME. IF THE DEALER IS NOT MAKING GOOD SOUND WITH HIS VANDERSTEENS, GIVE YOUR BUSINESS TO ONE WHO IS. MY EXPERIENCE WITH CLASS D IS LIMITED BUT FOR THE MOST PART THEY SOUND GOOD ESPECIALLY WITH DIGITAL SOURCES. WITH THE HIGHEST RESOLUTION SOURCES (LP PLAYER) THEY HAVEN'T PROVEN THEIR ABILITY TO BE MAGIC. TECHNICAL BREAKTHROUGH? WE SHALL SEE.

Hovhannes (2/8/06): I recently bought a pair of your wonderful Vandersteen model speakers that were manufactured approximately 5-6 years ago. While enjoying the perfect sound of the speakers, I noticed that left speaker produces slightly less highs then the right one. My attempts to compensate that effect by position adjustment and manipulation on controls on the back of speakers were not successful which draws me to suspicion that speakers may need get out of calibration / adjustment during years of use. Could you, please, tell if speakers can be serviced at Vandersteen? Is there adjustment / calibration program offered?

Answer: HELLO HOVHANNES, TRY MOVING THE RIGHT SPEAKER TO THE LEFT AND THE LEFT TO THE RIGHT. IF THE ROOM IS NOT SYMMETRICAL THERE CAN BE QUITE A DIFFERENCE BETWEEN CHANNELS.  IF REVERSING THEM DOES NOT GIVE A CLUE SET THEM SIDE BY SIDE IN THE MIDDLE OF THE ROOM. PLAY A MONO SOURCE, THEY SHOULD SOUND THE SAME. THERE IS NOTHING TO ADJUST IN THE SPEAKER SO A TRIP TO THE FACTORY MAY BE CALLED FOR.  READ CUSTOMER SERVICE ON THIS SITE AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS. THIS IS QUITE COMMON WITH SPEAKERS PURCHASED USED BECAUSE YOU DO NOT KNOW WHAT THEY BEEN THROUGH.

Bill (2/09/06): I'm confused by the manual for my 2ce signatures in terms of placement. Is the acoustic center in the front or the back of the speaker? I have a 38' long room and speaker placement (distance from the wall) is crucial. Please advise me on how to measure (to the front or back of the speaker) according to the dimensional directions  in the manual.

Answer: HELLO BILL, I WOULD USE THE MIDDLE OF THE SPEAKERS. REMEMBER THERE ARE NO FORMULAS THAT WILL BE ABSOLUTE THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE ONLY TO HELP FIND A STARTING PLACE, THEN EXPERIMENT MOVING THEM A INCH AT A TIME IN ALL DIRECTIONS. DON'T GET ANAL ABOUT THIS IT CAN BE WORKED ON OVER A PERIOD OF TIME. ROME WAS NOT BUILT IN A DAY.

Alfred (2/10/06):  I recently bought a used pair of C1s. Unfortunately, it did not come with the manual. I have hard how extensive it is with regards to speaker placement. Thanks! Alfred

Answer: HELLO ALFRED, OWNERS MANUALS WILL SOME DAY BE AVAILABLE ON THIS SITE AS A DOWN LOAD. THEY ARE NOT IN DIGITAL FORM AT THIS TIME SO YOUR ONLY OPTION IS TO SEND $5.00 TO VANDERSTEEN AUDIO AND WE WILL SEND YOU ONE.

Ron (2/10/06): I purchased a pair of 2ci's may of 1990. #'s 45158 & 45159. As I type this, both speakers on are the way to you for repair. You should have the speakers in your shop on Tues Feb 14. I noticed when using a pressure meter the sound from the speakers was very different from each other. Being the speakers are so old I figured it would make since to send both in for a check & whatever repair is necessary. My other equipment is - Classe ssp25 processor, Rotel 1095 power amp, NHT VT-1C center channel & NHT HDP-1 surrounds. My two questions are - Can these speakers be upgraded? If yes, at about what cost? I am considering purchasing your center speaker VCC1 to replace the NHT. Any suggestion you have would be appreciated. Incidentally, John at Audio Connection in Verona NJ is the best. Last but not least your product is outstanding.

Answer: HELLO RON, SIXTEEN YEARS IS NOT OLD BY OUR STANDARDS, I SUSPECT SOME BURNED VOICE COILS OR X-OVER COMPONENTS. WE WILL GIVE THE SPEAKERS A COMPLETE CHECKOUT INCLUDING THE CHAMBER, THEY WILL BE LIKE NEW WHEN WE FINISH. THERE ARE NO UPGRADES FOR ANY MODEL ONE OR TWO, IF UPDATABILITY IS A ISSUE LOOK INTO A PAIR OF THREE'S, THEY ARE. I NOTICED YOU ARE NOT RUNNING A SUB WOOFER THIS COULD BE WHY YOU BURNED SOME PARTS. THE 2CI ARE FULL RANGE SPEAKERS HOWEVER THERE IS STUFF ON MOVIES NEVER ENVISIONED IN THE DAYS OF MUSIC. A GOOD SUB WOOFER IS NECESSARY EVEN IF YOU FEEL YOU HAVE ADEQUATE BASS TO PROTECT THE 2CI'S. ONE MIGHT ASK WHY HAVE A FULL RANGE SPEAKER IF A SUB IS NECESSARY ANYWAY. IN ORDER TO HAVE A PROPER TRANSITION BETWEEN THE TWO, ONE OCTAVE OF OVERLAP IS REQUIRED HENCE THE FULL RANGE SPEAKER. YOU DON'T HAVE TO TAKE MY WORD FOR IT IF THIS WASN'T SO THE WORLD WOULD BE DOMINATED BY THREE PIECE SYSTEMS. IT ISN'T BECAUSE IT DOESN'T REALLY WORK. THE VCC-1 WILL BE A BIG IMPROVEMENT BECAUSE IT IS TIME AND PHASE CORRECT LIKE YOUR MAIN SPEAKERS. YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER IS A GOOD RESOURCE FOR INFORMATION, THEY HAVE REAL WORLD EXPERIENCE FAR BEYOND MINE.

Mike (2/10/06): In follow up to my questions about speaker wire: Mike (1/26/06) - One style of wire that interests me and is easy to build for the DIY crowd is the DNM/REASON style (small 24gauge solid core spaced wires) which creates low capacitance but high inductance and high resistance. Some claim this high resistance improves the amplifier loudspeaker interface but can be an issue with some speakers due to the low damping factor. Do you have any recommendations about  maximum wire resistance and minimum inductance, ie. some speaker manufactures recommend .1 ohms as the max wire resistance. I assume this is to set a minimum damping factor?

Answer: HELLO MIKE, AS A SPEAKER DESIGNER YOU HAVE RECEIVED SOME BOGUS INFORMATION IN MY OPINION. I CAN'T ENVISION ANY CIRCUMSTANCE THAT EXCESSIVE RESISTANCE IN THE WIRE WOULD IMPROVE IF THE SPEAKER WAS PROPERLY DESIGNED. IF YOU TAKE A MATHEMATICAL MODEL OF A TYPICAL LOUDSPEAKER, CONNECT IT TO AN AMPLIFIER MODEL RUN SOME SIMULATIONS, HIGH INDUCTANCE DOES NOT LOOK GOOD TO ME. THERE ARE SITUATIONS WHERE JUST ABOUT ANYTHING WILL SOUND GOOD FOR SOME REASON. PLAY AROUND AND FIND WHAT WORKS FOR YOU IN YOUR ROOM, HOMEMADE OR STORE BOUGHT.

Ted (2/11/06): Hi. I see in the FAQ that the 2ce's should be positioned "at least a foot away from the wall." Is a foot really sufficient? I ask because that is probably as far away from the wall as I will be able to place them. If that placement will give me the results the 2ce was intended to achieve, they are an option for me. But if this placement is a serious compromise, they aren't. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO TED,  THE PLACEMENT OF PROPERLY DESIGNED MONO POLES (ABOVE 100HZ) WHICH ALL VANDERSTEEN SPEAKERS ARE IS DETERMINED BY THE ROOM NOT THE SPEAKER. BOOK SHELF SPEAKERS WHEN PURCHASED BY SOMEONE WITH EARS SOON END UP ON STANDS AWAY FROM THE WALLS. THIS IS BECAUSE THEY DON'T MAKE RECORDINGS WITH THE MIKES IN THE WALL. WHAT YOUR QUESTION REALLY IS; WILL THE VANDERSTEEN'S BE COMPROMISED ANY MORE THAN ANY OTHER INCLUDING BOOKSHELF SPEAKERS? ANSWER IS NO! WILL THE VANDERSTEEN'S BE AS GOOD AS THEY COULD BE? DEPENDS ON THE ROOM BUT MAYBE NOT. DOES THIS MEAN YOU MUST BUY INFERIOR SPEAKERS BECAUSE THEIR POSITION MAY BE COMPROMISED? EVEN COMPROMISED THEY WILL OUT PERFORM THEIR INFERIOR COUNTERPARTS. THE FACT THAT ONLY APX 18% OF YOUR MONEY WENT INTO THE CABINET AND THE REST WENT INTO THE COMPONENTS DIRECTLY RELATED TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE SPEAKER CAN'T BE HID. AFTER ALL THAT THE ANSWER IS: IF YOU LIKE'EM BUY'EM. IF YOU END UP WITH TO MUCH BASS CHECK OUT FAQ ABOUT HI PASS.

John (2/12/06): I am the happy owner of a pair of Vandersteen 2Cs that I purchased in 1986. Recently, however, I've noticed serious distortion in bass heavy content that appears to be coming from the acoustic couplers.  At first I chalked this up to the age of the speakers but after reading some of your answers in this FAQ list I now suspect that playing movies without a subwoofer may be the culprit. Do you repair speakers this old? If so, any estimate of likely cost would be helpful. I was planning to simply replace them with the new 2Ce Signature or 3A Signature. Now however, I may add the 2Wq subwoofer and hold on to them for a while if repair is a feasible option. Rest assured I will eventually upgrade but I'd like to have these on hand for a graduation present for my son. Keeping these old friends in the family really appeals to me.  Thanks in advance for your reply.

Answer: HELLO JOHN, YOU PROBABLY HAVE A BLOWN REAR DRIVER. PRINT OUT THE RMA UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE, READ INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO REMOVE IT AND SEND IT IN FOR REBUILD WITH THE FORM. CHARGE IS $84.00 PLUS UPS.  SUB-WOOFER IS MANDATORY FOR LONGEVITY AND THAT H.T. SOUND. WE SEE OLDER FRIENDS THAN THIS, ONCE REPAIRED PEOPLE LOVE THEM.

Jagdeep (2/12/06): Hello Richard, I'm using a Naim pre/power system with Living Voice OBX R2 speakers.  Naim specify that the sub must be fed from the speaker end of the speaker cable. Have you any opinions on this? Also, my speakers are very clean and fast. I want the sub to compliment & integrate with the speakers and not draw attention to themselves. Can i tune the @Wq's to do that?  My room size is approx 3000 cu ft. Should I use 1 or 2 subs..considering that I will cut in at about 35 to 40Hz (speakers have a claimed in room response of 35Hz)  I will not be able to place the sub(s) in corners and the sub(s) will be solely for 2 channel audio.

Answer:
HELLO JAGDEEP (SINGAPORE), STEREO SUBS ARE RECOMMENDED AND OUR 2WQ DOES GET ITS SIGNAL FROM THE SPEAKER LEADS. A HIGH-PASS FILTER MUST BE PLACED BETWEEN YOUR PRE AMP AND AMPLIFIER OR A LINEAR TRANSITION WILL BE IMPOSSIBLE. I SUGGEST YOU READ THE REVIEWS AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON THIS WEB SITE. CONTACT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER FOR A DEMO I THINK YOU WILL LIKE IT.

Craig (2/12/06): I have a pair of 5A's (fantastic speaker!), and was thinking of trying an interconnect cable between my amp and preamp that has an adjustable impedance setting for the input of the amp (like the 5A crossover has). My question is, should I set the cable for the input impedance of the amp, or the input impedance of the crossover (to which it would directly connect)? If the latter, what  is that impedance value? Thanks.

Answer:
HELLO GRAIG, YOU WOULD SET THE CABLE TO THE SETTING OF THE AMPLIFIER INPUT IMPEDANCE. THE MODEL 5HP'S INPUT IMPEDANCE IS WHAT IS REFLECTED THROUGH IT FROM THE AMPLIFIER.

Ken (2/12/06): What is your opinion on acoustically treating a room? I am building a dedicated home theater room with Vandersteen all the way around.  There are many, many online discussions going on indicating the benefits of putting up some sort of wall treatments. These are typically some some sort of sound absorptive material built into frames and hung on the walls. Usually the advice is to fully treat the front wall, from floor to ceiling to eliminate reflections coming off the back of the main speakers. It also includes treatment of the side walls up from floor to ear level.  Is this kind of treatment a worthwhile endeavor with your speakers, or does your speaker design need and use those types of typical wall reflections to create the magic?  P.S. - Please don't end this internet question and answer experiment  too soon - it is a real treat for Vandersteen owners.

Answer:
HELLO KEN, MOST H.T. PEOPLE OVER TREAT THE ROOM IN MY OPINION. THE BEST WAY TO GET BETTER RESULTS IS TO INSTALL THE SYSTEM, FIRE IT UP AND SOLVE THE PROBLEMS THAT ACTUALLY EXIST. THE PROBLEM WITH OVER TREATING THE ROOM IS THAT IT COMPRESS'S DYNAMICS, INCREASES DISTORTION, AND EATS UP AMPLIFIER POWER. THE ONE TREATMENT I WOULD DO AUTOMATICALLY IS THE CEILING IF THE FLOOR IS NOT COVERED WITH A NATURAL FIBER CARPET. REAR REFLECTIONS ARE NOT USUALLY A PROBLEM. SIDE WALL MAY NEED TREATMENT FOR THE FIRST REFLECTION (USE A MIRROR ON THE SIDE WALL AND MARK THE LOCATION WHERE YOU SEE THE SPEAKER REFLECTED FROM THE LISTENING POSITION). THE REAR WALL WILL NEED SOME TREATMENT BEHIND THE LISTENING POSITION. ABSORPTION OR DIFFUSION CAN BE EXPERIMENTED WITH UNTIL YOU GET THE RESULTS YOU ARE LOOKING FOR. THIS ALL TAKES TIME BUT WILL REWARD WITH VIVID AND DYNAMIC SOUND.

William (2/13/06): I would like to  keep two Vandersteen subs and use an  integrated amp...without suggesting a manufacturer, or you can, is there integrated out there that have a preamp out to amp in and can I use one of them into my rca crossovers to drive the subs? thanks...

Answer:
HELLO WILLIAM, MANY INTEGRATED DO NOT HAVE "PRE- OUT" AND "AMP- IN" WHICH ARE REQUIRED TO USE THE 2WQ SUB-WOOFER SYSTEM. ROWLAND,  AYRE, BAT, AND AUDIO RESEARCH WILL INSTALL THE HIGH-PASS SET FOR 80HZ (6DB PER OCTAVE) FOR A NOMINAL FEE. IF YOU WANT TO USE THE MODEL 5HP YOU WILL NEED A INTEGRATED WITH PRE-OUT AND MAIN-IN.

Bob(2/14/06):  Hi Richard, Is it true that even though you use a first order crossover 6db per octave that lets say the model 1Cs the tweeter and woofer are still 90 degrees out of phase...

Answer:  HELLO BOB, ACTUALLY IT IS 45 DEGREES AT THE X-OVER POINT. THE WAY TO VISUALIZE THIS IS TO LOOK AT THE HAND OFF IN A RELAY RACE. THERE IS THE TIME OR DISTANCE WHERE BOTH RUNNERS ARE RUNNING, AT SOME POINT THE BATON IS PASSED FROM ONE TO THE OTHER. IF THERE WERE NO PHASE SHIFT THERE WOULD BE A BUMP IN THE FREQUENCY RESPONSE AT THE X-OVER FREQUENCY. THIS IS ALSO WHY THERE MUST BE A STEPPED OR SLOPED BAFFLE. 6 DB SLOPES AND STEPPED OR SLOPED BAFFLES DON'T NECESSARILY MEAN THE ARE TIME AND PHASE CORRECT. THE ONLY WAY TO TELL IS THE STEP RESPONSE, IT SHOULD LOOK THE SAME AS A SINGLE HYPOTHETICAL SPEAKER WITH VERY WIDE BANDWIDTH. THE STEP WOULD LOOK LIKE A MOUNTAIN WITH A VERY STEEP LEFT SIDE AND A GENTLE FALLING SLOPE ON THE RIGHT SIDE BACK TO THE GROUND. ANY MISBEHAVIOR WOULD CAUSE MANY BUMPS AND DIPS ON THE RIGHT HAND SLOPE.

Stan (2/14/06): Hi - I have just been notified by my dealer that my new 5A's are going to be delivered in a few days.  Regarding power, is a 15 amp socket acceptable?  Also, the right speaker will need an extension cord the included power cord I was told is 6 feet, and too short to reach the wall plug. I will make the extension myself using Hospital Grade components. Should I make 2 cords so that each speaker will see the exact same power? Thanks Stan

Answer: HELLO STAN, CONGRATULATIONS I KNOW YOU WILL ENJOY THEM. THE BREAKER IS FINE BECAUSE YOU WON'T BE PLUGGING BOTH OF THEM IN AT THE EXACT MOMENT.  I WOULD US A CORD ON THE ONE THAT NEEDS IT ONLY.

Bob (2/14/06): I just purchased a pr of 10 year old 2c's from ebay....Are all drivers available and can you post a price list for these parts. Also can I put the series 3 tweeter in this speaker again how much. Thanks

Answer: HELLO BOB, NONE OF THE DRIVERS ARE AVAILABLE, THEY ARE ALL VERY DIFFERENT TODAY. WE CAN HOWEVER REBUILD ALL OF THEM IF NECESSARY, CALL THE FACTORY FOR CURRENT PRICING. THE MODEL 3A TWEETER WILL NOT FIT THE SPEAKER BECAUSE THE STEP IN THE BAFFLE IS NOT CORRECT NOR IS THE X-OVER COMPATIBLE. THIS WOULD BE A VERY EXPENSIVE MOD, IT WOULD BE CHEAPER AND MUCH BETTER SOUNDING TO BUY A NEWER MODEL 2CE SIGNATURE.

Gary (2/14/06):  My listening/HT room floor is carpet over plywood (a raised floor). Vibrations can be felt thru out the room which is great for movie entertainment. Currently, I use the spikes provided for the speaker to anchor them to the floor. Certain audio forums recommend the use of such products as Auralex Subdudes to control the vibrations and tighten up the bass. What is your recommendation?

Answer: HELLO GARY, I RECOMMEND YOU USE THE SPIKES PROVIDED.  I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE PRODUCTS MENTIONED. A SPEAKER UNLIKE ALL THE OTHER COMPONENTS IN YOUR SYSTEM NEEDS TO BE IN INTIMATE CONTACT WITH THE FLOOR SO BASS TRANSIENTS CAN'T MOVE THE STRUCTURE FOR AND AFT.  PRODUCTS THAT ARE COMPLIANT ALLOW THIS MOVEMENT CANCELING SOME OF THE FOR AND AFT MOVEMENT OF THE TWEETER AND MID-RANGE SOFTENING THE SOUND. MANY AUDIOPHILE SPEAKER HAVE VERY BRIGHT TWEETERS SO THEIR OWNERS MAY ENJOY SOME OF THE "TRANSPARENCY" DIMINISHED.

Ken (2/15/06): I have a 2W with a Serial Number above 4060. I have an opportunity purchase a second one but its S.N. is below 4060. Would they integrate well with each other? I know there is a difference in the upgrade prices with the cutoff at S.N. 4060 so I assume there are some differences.

Answer: HELLO KEN, THERE ARE DIFFERENCES SO I RECOMMEND BUYING ANOTHER ABOVE 4060. THE DIFFERENCES ARE NOT THAT BIG AND WITH PLACEMENT IN EACH CORNER MAY NOT BE THAT NOTICEABLE, HOWEVER IF YOU DECIDE TO UPGRADE THEM ONE CAN BE DONE IN THE FIELD THE OTHER WOULD TAKE A TRIP TO THE FACTORY TO BECOME A 2WQ. THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE SONICALLY BETWEEN THE 2W AND THE 2WQ AND THEY ARE NOT COMPATIBLE.

Steve (2/16/06): Hi Richard, Just recently bought a pair of 2Ce Signatures and a Rogue Cronus integrated amplifier and was wondering if you can make a general recommendation as to whether the 8 Ohm taps or 4 Ohm taps are preferred for my 2Ces. I took the liberty of changing over the taps to 4 Ohms based on your specs but am thinking maybe I should have at least tired them with the 8 Ohm taps first. Do what sounds best?  Your thoughts? My feeling is that I am not sure yet and I tend to want to rationalize why I would choose one vs. the other. Your thoughts? Wonderful speakers by the way.

Answer: HELLO STEVE, I KNOW IT'S A LOT OF WORK TO TRY BOTH TAPS BUT THAT'S THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW. IF BOTH OF YOUR ARMS ARE BROKEN YOU COULD ASK THE DEALER WHO SELLS BOTH THE SPEAKERS AND THE AMPLIFIER FOR HIS EDUCATED OPINION. JUST KIDDING BUT UNLESS HE HAS DONE THE EXPERIMENT WE STILL DON'T KNOW.

Bob (2/16/06):  I just picked up a 1990 pr of 2ci's and they sound great. all drivers appear to be working...My question is about the wiring. Temporarily I hooked my speaker wires to the bottom end with jumpers from the dual banana plug to the high end. Is this ok? am I really loosing anything?  If I run a second set of wires to the same output terminals on my amp (I only have one set BK 442 200 watt (8ohms) 350 at 4) 70amp amp) will that drop the impedance?

Answer:  HELLO BOB, READ ABOUT BI-WIRING IN THE FAQ SECTION TO UNDERSTAND WHAT AND WHY. THE PERFORMANCE IS SIGNIFICANTLY COMPROMISED WITH JUMPERS IF YOUR SYSTEM IS HIGH RESOLUTION ENOUGH. BOTH SETS OF WIRES SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO THE SAME TERMINALS ON THE AMPLIFIER. THE IMPEDANCE OF THE SPEAKER IS THE SAME, 6 OHMS.

Steve (2/16/06): I own the Vandersteen 2CE signatures and find that they are fantastic. I have changed every piece of my system over the years, but the one constant is always the speakers! Do you think separates are better for the Vandies or is an integrated amp sufficient? Also are tubes better or solid state? And lastly, what do you think of the combo of a tube preamp with a solid state amp?

Answer: HELLO STEVE, PEOPLE DEFINITELY HAVE A PREFERENCE FOR TUBE OR SOLID STATE, KIND OF LIKE BLONDS OR BRUNETTES, YOU LISTEN, COMPARE, AND PICK YOUR FAVORITE. AS FOR COMBO'S ANYTHING MAKES SENSE IF YOU LIKE IT AFTER DOING THE EVALUATION USING YOUR MUSIC AT YOUR LISTENING LEVELS. NO TIME, DON'T TRUST YOUR EARS, LAZY, OK FIND A DEALER USING YOUR SPEAKERS MAKING AWESOME SOUND, COPY IT DOWN TO THE WIRE NO DEVIATIONS. THAT WAY YOU KNOW YOU WILL LIKE THE SOUND, THEN WHEN SOMEONE SAYS ANY PART OF YOUR SYSTEM IS A P.O.S. YOU WILL HAVE CONFIDENCE THAT YOU KNOW BETTER!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Stephen (2/19/06): What can be wrong with one of my Series 2 speakers ? The tweeter is not working, also the bass unit is very muffled with no real response to music. I understand that there are no Vandersteen dealers in the UK and hope that you may be able to assist me in finding the fault and helping me to repair the speaker. Also I need a cover, do you sell them ? Many thanks,

Answer:
 HELLO STEPHEN, THIS QUESTION IS BEYOND THE SCOPE OF THIS FORUM. PLEASE READ THE REPAIR SECTION UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE OF THIS WEB SITE. IF THE INFORMATION THERE IS NOT FAMILIAR SOUNDING AND OF NO ASSISTANCE TO YOU, IT WOULD NOT BE POSSIBLE TO TRAIN YOU BY E-MAIL TO EFFECT A PROPER REPAIR. YOU HAVE TWO OPTIONS AS I SEE IT 1) FIND A GOOD LOCAL REPAIR SHOP THAT KNOWS WHAT THEY ARE DOING BY FRIENDS REFERRAL. 2) DOWN LOAD THE RMA FORM AND SEND THEM TO VANDERSTEEN AUDIO. THIS MAY SEEM LIKE A EXTREME OPTION BUT WE HAVE THE PARTS, REPAIRS ARE USUALLY LESS THAN $150.00 U.S. FOR ANY NORMAL PROBLEM. ON SPEAKERS THIS OLD WE DO NOT HAVE PARTS BUT WE ARE ABLE TO REBUILD ALL SPEAKERS WE HAVE EVER MADE (30 YEARS). A GOOD REPAIR SHOP CAN DIAGNOSE THE PROBLEM REMOVE THE DAMAGED DRIVERS AND SEND THEM FOR REBUILD AND ALL IS WELL. IF HOWEVER THE X-OVER IS DAMAGED BUY EXCESSIVE POWER OR LIGHTNING STRIKE IT IS NOT REMOVABLE PLUS MANY OF THE PART VALUES ARE COMMON TO THAT SPEAKER AND ITS MATE ONLY. IT WOULD BE AND IS TO EXPENSIVE TO RECORD ALL THAT INFORMATION. THE SPEAKER WITH ITS REBUILT DRIVERS AND X-OVER ARE THEN PUT IN THE ANECHOIC CHAMBER AND THE VALUES ARE DIALED IN. THIS IS THE ONLY WAY TO GET LIKE NEW PERFORMANCE IF THE X-OVER IS BURNED BY PLAYING TOO LOUD FOR TOO LONG, POWER AMP FAILURE, OR LIGHTING STRIKE.

Mark (2/19/06):  I just returned from your very excellent dealer in South Minneapolis. The 2ce Sigs were far and away the most involving speakers of the many pairs I auditioned. (The planars had a similar depth, but didn't integrate all the instruments nearly as well.) I  love the 2ce Sigs but, until my infant and toddler mature a bit, these speakers will end up in very small (7' x 12') room. My question: How will the 2's do in such a small room, with a near field (about 5 feet away) listening position?  Thanks very much. This is fun. 

Answer: 
HELLO MARK, THANKS FOR YOUR COMMENTS ON OUR DEALERS POSITIVE DEMO AND HIS CARE FOR YOU. THE SPEAKERS WILL WORK FINE WITH SOME QUALIFICATIONS. PLEASE READ SOME OF THE QUESTIONS IN THE LAST SEVERAL WEEKS THAT ARE SIMILAR I THINK YOU WILL FIND THE ANSWERS ABOUT NON OPTIMUM SITUATIONS INTERESTING. FIVE FEET IS A MINIMUM DISTANCE BUT STILL WITHIN DESIGN LIMITS.

Stan (2/19/06):  Question regarding the fixed passive filters for 2WQ subs. I have 2 x > 2WQ subs but am using Vandersteen 5k fixed high pass filters into my > 10k ohm input impedance Spectral (DMA-80) amp; the reason is that is all the dealer had and I never bothered to order the 10k ones as he said it would take a while to get from you. My question is, how critical is it to precisely match these with the input impedance of my amp? What effect is the 5k filter having? I also have a 20k filter -  would I be better off using it?

Answer:
 HELLO STAN H, THIS IS ONE OF THOSE QUESTIONS I SHOULD DUMP BUT AGAIN I WILL TRY TO REITERATE THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE OWNERS MANUAL. THE SUB-WOOFERS ARE SHIPPED WITH AN ADJUSTABLE WX-2 X-OVER SO ANY VALUE IS AVAILABLE BY SWITCHING A SWITCH!!!!! DOING THE EXPERIMENT SINGLE ENDED IS VALID FOR BALANCED ALSO, THE RESULT WILL BE THE SAME . HOW THE PERFORMANCE WILL BE EFFECTED IS A VARIABLE THING BUT PEOPLE DO NOT INVEST IN THIS KIND OF STUFF IF MEDIOCRE PERFORMANCE WAS THE GOAL. IF YOUR HAVING DIFFICULTY GETTING THIS RIGHT PAY YOUR KNOWLEDGEABLE DEALER OR A FRIEND TO HELP YOU. SET UP CAN IMPROVE THE SOUND OF A SYSTEM MORE THAN A SIGNIFICANT INVESTMENT IN "IMPROVED" GEAR. ITS WORTH DOING OR HAVING IT DONE.

John (2/20/06): Richard, Thank you for 16 years of outstanding audio enjoyment from my current set of speakers. The downside is that I have no idea what they are. The back label says Model 2. Serial #s are 53150Ci and 53151. I'd guess they are Model 2Ci's, but the serial # is a little hard to read and I can't tell if the "i" is a blemish or real. Is there anyway you can tell me what I own? Thanks! John

Answer:
HELLO JOHN, YOU ARE CORRECT THEY ARE 2Ci'S.

Joe (2/20/06): I recently acquired a used pair of 5's through my son, Sam, who works at Optimal Enchantment in Santa Monica. He suggested I ask you the following question. The serial numbers on my speakers are 2006 and 2007. I noticed that your web site indicates that these speakers require $1500 more to upgrade to 5A's then some other serial numbers. I suspect that means that changes were made to the 5 that makes the upgrade less expensive. Did these changes result in any sonic improvements? If so, can I make those changes to my 5s, and would it be worth it?  Also, I'd like to ask a somewhat more specialized question. My left ear is more highly sensitive to high frequencies than normal, and most speakers tend to sound a bit bright to me. Also, my listening room is a bit on the bright side, though I have treated it a fair amount. On my previous speakers, Spendor SP 100s and before that Kef 105.2s, I installed an L-pad on the tweeter by putting resistors in parallel and in series with it to provide the same resistance to the crossover network, but drop the output a bit. I found 3 dB was just about right.  In the case of the Kefs, I did it the same time as I re-built the crossovers, replacing all the old electrolytic caps with polypropylene ones. I know that some of your speakers do have tweeter level adjusters. Has anyone ever asked to have one installed on the 5? It looks like just the opposite was requested; the rear-firing tweeter for adding treble. I have toed in the speakers a bit, and that helped a lot. Of course a lot of the problem is with CDs that are simply too bright in themselves and the (to me) silly notion that  tone controls, very useful for correcting poorly balanced recordings, are forbidden. Actually, for most vinyl and many CDs and SACDs, the problem is minimal, but I was curious.  I'm sorry to take up so much of your time, but I'm quite excited to have these speakers and want to get the best out of them.  Santa Cruz, California.

Answer: HELLO JOE, I VISITED OPTIMAL ENCHANTMENT JUST YESTERDAY, HAD A GOOD TIME WITH RANDY AND SAM. YOUR OBSERVATION IS CORRECT ABOUT CHANGES OCCURRING DURING THE SEVEN YEARS THE FIVES WERE IN PRODUCTION AND THEY WERE DEFINITELY AUDIBLE OR I WOULD NOT HAVE SPENT THE CUSTOMERS MONEY. UNFORTUNATELY IT WOULD BE FAR TOO EXPENSIVE TO DO A PARTIAL UP-GRADE FOR THE GAIN RECEIVED. WHEN THE TIME COMES TO UP-GRADE THE SPEAKERS TO 5A'S ALL WILL BE BROUGHT CURRENT. IN THE MEAN TIME ENJOY THE MODEL 5'S ALTHOUGH NOT A 5A, IT IS ONE INCREDIBLE SPEAKER. IN MY OPINION YOU SHOULD DO NOTHING ABOUT THE DIFFERENCES IN YOUR EARS. ALL OF US, IF WE MEASURED HAVE ABOUT 3 TO 6 DB LESS HIGH FREQUENCY ABILITY IN OUR LEFT EAR AND IN THE UK IT IS THE RIGHT EAR. DRIVING THE CAR WITH THE WINDOWS DOWN A LIFE TIME CONTRIBUTES TO THIS. FOR SOME REASON YOURS ARE THE OPPOSITE BUT OUR REFERENCE IS STILL EVERY DAY SONIC EXPERIENCES HEARD WITH THOSE SAME EARS. WHEN IT COMES TO BRINGING THE TONE CONTROLS BACK I AGREE 100% AND BELIEVE THE MORE MUSIC ORIENTATED HIGH END MANUFACTURES (NOT NECESSARILY THE SAME) WILL DO SO SOONER THAN LATER (PSE HL-1 ALREADY DOES BUT IS NO LONGER AVAILABLE) FOR THE REASONS YOU MENTION IN YOUR QUESTION. I WOULD NOT INSTALL THIS INTO A SPEAKER BECAUSE IT WOULD BE TOO DIFFICULT TO DEFEAT ON THOSE RECORDINGS NOT NEEDING IT. YOU MIGHT CONSIDER BUILDING A TONE CONTROL CIRCUIT THAT WOULD GO INTO THE TAPE MONITOR LOOP. AS TO THE COMMENT ABOUT MOST SPEAKERS SOUNDING TOO BRIGHT, MOST ARE. CHECK OUT THE MEASUREMENTS IN STEREOPHILE MAGAZINE.

Jacques (2/21/06): Jacques (2/22/06) I was told in South Africa that my Quatros will be delivered within 5 weeks, so I expected them to arrive by about 22  February 2006. Now, suddenly, yesterday (21 February) I was told that I will have to wait another 4 weeks (!!??). I don't know all the facts behind the scenes, except that the Distributor in South Africa suddenly decided that he also wants a pair of Quatros for his showroom. He indicated  that it was VANDERSTEEN AUDIO who decided to hold back my Quatros and combine the two orders. My full deposit was paid at the beginning of the whole period involved. Please keep in mind that some people have waited for 40 years to own speakers of this stature - so it is traumatic to overcome the time-lag, prolonged by such rather cynical action. I suppose there can be a cost saving in combining the orders - would that saving be passed on to the buyer? I put these points to you in the interests of making VANDERSTEEN the finest brand in the world, if it is not precisely that already.

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, THE REASON FOR THE DELAY HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH YOUR DEALER DECIDING TO HAVE A PAIR FOR HIMSELF. THE DELAY IS BECAUSE THE 220 VOLT VERSION OF THE AMPLIFIER WAS NOT FINISHED. YOUR DEALER WAS NOT INTERESTED IN THE 120 VOLT VERSION WITH STEP-DOWN TRANSFORMER SHIPPED TOO OTHER FOREIGN MARKETS WHERE THE CUSTOMER WAS IN A BIGGER HURRY. SHIPMENTS OF THIS SIZE ARE PRICED BY THE POUND OR KILO SO WOULD HAVE BEEN THE SAME. SORRY FOR THE DELAY.

Kenn (2/21/06): I have Model 1s, am getting 2Cs, and 3As soon so that I can create a home theater system in my basement. I'm not sure if I need more than a  VCC-1 center speaker. I thought the VCC sig might be overkill. What do you think? Also, I thought I'd get the V2W for the sub. Thanks, for your help, Kenn

Answer: HELLO KENN, THE VCC-1 SIGNATURE HAS BEEN DISCONTINUED AND IS NOT RECOMMENDED WITH MODEL 3'S. THE NEW VCC-2 OR THE VCC-5 ARE THE ONLY CENTERS DYNAMIC ENOUGH FOR YOUR PROPOSED SYSTEM. THE VCC-2 WILL BE AVAILABLE JUNE 06.

Kenn (2/22/06): Richard, I submitted a question yesterday (re:VCC sig. v. VCC-1 and my models 1, 2c, & 3A s) and since have had time to explore your FAQ  site. I'm beginning to think that piece mealing together a HT system, > from even good used sources, isn't the best idea given the advances you've made over the years.  After seeing your site I also am questioning my Onkyo TX-SR 803  receiver for your speakers. I'm overwhelmed by the amount of AV info "out there" and the various forums reveal a variety of informed opinion. I'm not an audiophile nor will I ever be one (I think!) but I do appreciate good sound - music and movie. I know I'm going with Vandersteen speakers to make a HT system. This will probably be my one and only system for evermore. I know you have a HT system but I have the sense that putting together something along the lines of new 3As,  VCC sig., 2VW would be better for my 17 x 35 room. What are your thoughts? P.S. I know this is a loaded question and that there are many considerations. I don't have big bucks but I value "value" that's why I'm going with Vandersteen. Thanks, Kenn (if you wanted to comment on receivers and such for your speakers, it wouldn't hurt my feelings any!)

Answer: HELLO KENN, GOOD TO HEAR YOU ARE DOING YOUR RESEARCH. I UNDERSTAND WANTING TO SAVE MONEY BUT HALF PRICE ON THE WRONG PIECE IS MORE EXPENSIVE THAN FULL PRICE ON THE RIGHT COMPONENT WITH EXPERT SET-UP. YOU COULD GET THE BASIC SYSTEM WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND FILL-IN WITH GOOD PERSONALLY AUDITIONED AND SEEN USED COMPONENTS. GOOD LUCK.

Dave (2/22/06): Hi,  I have a pair of Model 1's(?)...Serial #'s:3166, 3167. The "Operating Instruction" that came with the pair, refer to them as "Model 1B".  My questions: 1) - What model are they?  2) - Can I use the Model 1C bases with these speakers?  Thank you...

Answer: HELLO DAVE R, YOU HAVE EARLY 1B, THERE NEVER WAS A MODEL ONE SOLD THROUGH DEALERS. THE 1C BASE WILL WORK IF YOU ARE HANDY ENOUGH TO INSTALL YOUR OWN T-NUTS INTO THE BOTTOM OF THE 1B SPEAKER.

(2/22/06): I have an HT setup using a pair of VSMs as fronts with stereo subs  (2Ws), a VCC-1 center, and a pair of VSMs for the surround (the surround VSMs are mated to a third 2W). Since I'm running stereo subs upfront, I have a pair of inputs available on the subs. Can I use those available inputs to connect the VCC-1 as well?... thereby giving me deep base for all 5 channels? If so, should I connect the VCC-1 to both subs (which I believe will exaggerate the bass) or just one sub? Will I loose some bass clarity because the center channel bass is superimposed with the left and/or right front channel bass? I  would love a VCC-5, but I need save a bit more before I can afford one.

Answer: HELLO FERNANDO, WHAT YOU WANT I BELIEVE IS A MORE DYNAMIC, LOWER DISTORTION CENTER CHANNEL. ADDING MORE BASS USUALLY DECREASES INTELLIGIBILITY BUT YOU CAN TRY IT SEE WHAT "YOU" THINK. THE NEW VCC-2 OR THE VCC-5 ARE WHAT YOU WANT.

Garry (2/23/06): What are your thoughts on class D amps and their use with Vandersteen speakers?

Answer: HELLO GARRY, MY THOUGHTS ARE IF YOU LIKE'M BUY'M. MY SYSTEM USES HIGH RESOLUTION SOURCES (VINYL LP'S) SO I AM NOT PREPARED TO HAVE ANY DIGITAL PROCESSING YET IN MY ANALOG CHAIN.

Russ (2/23/06): Richard- I'm having two sets of speaker cables made up (to biwire) a pair of 3A Signatures. The 3As will be coming in a week or two.  Would you please tell me the optimum size spades for the speaker connections. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO RUSS, WE HAVE BEEN USING THE BARRIER STRIP ON YOUR SPEAKERS FOR 15 YEARS. ASK THE WIRE COMPANY WHAT THEY RECOMMEND AND IF THEY DON'T KNOW TRY A NEW WIRE COMPANY. USE THE FAQ SECTION FOR OTHER WIRE QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS.

Max (2/23/06): Hi Richard,  I'm a very happy owner of 1C's, and would love to audition the 2Ce Signature. But since I'm in New Orleans, the closest dealer is nearly 400 miles away in Houston! Are there plans to have anyone in Louisiana, Mississippi or Alabama become a Vandersteen dealer? Many Thanks,

Answer: HELLO MAX, NO PLANS. ALL VANDERSTEEN SPEAKERS ARE HAND MADE WITH THEIR WORKING COMPONENTS DIALED IN AN ANECHOIC CHAMBER, EACH AND EVERY ONE. WE CAN ONLY MAKE SO MANY. MAY BE ON VACATION OR TRAVEL FOR WORK YOU CAN VISIT A DEALER FOR A DEMO. PLEASE ALWAYS CALL IN ADVANCE TO MAKE SURE THE PRODUCT YOU ARE INTERESTED IN IS ON DEMO.

Paul (2/24/06): I recently purchased a pair of Vandersteen 2Ce Signature loudspeakers which under ideal conditions are very flat in their response. Imagine  my surprise when I found very lumpy frequency response in the bass! Actually I was not shocked as my Snells also sounded thin in the room since we moved in August of 2004. The main problem is a big hole in the bass from about 45 to 70Hz it’s down about 10dB at 50Hz. Response throughout this range is 70dB or less whereas the reference level for my tests was more like 78dB.  I am trained in physics and electrical engineering and I understand the nature of standing waves. I have moved the speakers around a bit but to little avail. I wonder whether sound absorbers could actually boost bass response significantly. Of course if these are standing waves then anything which disturbs the resonant cavity geometry could be effective. What do you suggest? FYI the room is approximately 13x17 feet.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, ASSUMING YOU ARE MEASURING WITH WARBLE TONES ANY PROPERLY DESIGNED LOUDSPEAKER WILL MEASURE APPROXIMATELY THE SAME IN THAT LOCATION IN THE ROOM.  PLACEMENT CHANGES MAY HELP BUT CAN ONLY BE FOUND BY EXPERIMENTING. CHECK OUT THE MEASUREMENTS IN STEREOPHILE AND YOU WILL SEE VERY FEW THAT ARE +-5BD AT ANY FREQUENCY ANECHOIC. WHAT I AM TRYING TO SAY IS THAT IS NOT THAT BAD AND USUALLY IS CAUSED BY A HEMHOLZ RESONANCE DOWN A DUCT OR HALL, MAY BE EVEN OUTSIDE THE ROOM BUT CONNECTED. I HAVE HAD NO SUCCESS WITH ABSORBERS BECAUSE YOU WOULD NEED TO ABSORB EVERY THING AROUND THE HOLE, KILLING THE DYNAMICS WHICH IS A BIG PROBLEM. ABSORBERS CAN WORK WHEN THE ROOM DIMENSIONS CAUSE A LARGE PEAK. TRY PLACEMENT CHANGES AND IF THAT DOESN'T WORK YOU COULD GET A 2WQ AND PLACE IT IN THE CORNER GIVING YOU MORE FLEXIBILITY. LAST OPTION LOOK INTO THE QUATRO IT HAS ADJUSTABLE BASS, TALK TO YOUR DEALER AND ASK FOR A DEMO.

Andrew (2/25/06): I own a pair of 2Cs and both of the 8' drivers have dry rot and the 4's are starting to wear out also.  Do you recommend sending in just the drivers or is it time to send the speakers themselves and have them checked out?

Answer: HELLO ANDREW, IF THE SPEAKERS HAVE NEVER BEEN OVER POWERED AND THE X-OVER'S DAMAGED I WOULD SEND IN THE DRIVERS ONLY. THIS SAVES A LOT OF FREIGHT COSTS. REBUILD COST WOULD BE APX $250.00 FOR ALL FOUR DRIVERS.

Ron (2/26/06):  I have 2ci's that will be returned to me this week after refurbish at you  shop. My question is - My processor, Class ssp25 has a DB25 output & my power amp, Rotel 1095 has a DB25 input. What are the +'s & -'s of using this interconnect? What will I gain & or loose? Both units are THX certified. Again, thank you for returning my speakers to like new condition.

Answer: HELLO RON, I WOULD CALL YOUR DEALER AND ASK HIM WHAT WOULD SOUND THE BEST, OR CALL THE ELECTRONICS MANUFACTURE FOR THEIR OPINION OR LISTEN FOR YOUR SELF. THE RESULT OF YOUR OWN EVALUATION OF COURSE WOULD MEAN THE MOST.

Stan (2/27/06): I took delivery of my new Kawazinga finish 5A's last week. First, let me say that the finish is absolutely jaw dropping beautiful...much  more so than the sample on your web site. I am a musician and have  been interested in good sound for many years. The 5A's have replaced "very good" top of the range British speakers driven by all Ayre top of the line electronics - but what I hear in the 5A's is reality.  Sure the lows go lower, the highs, higher, but I'm hearing Paul Simon  sing right there between the speakers - a holographic image with his words so clearly sung that I can hear the poetry with ease. What makes  that spookily "real" quality.  It's not the frequency response, the power handling, etc... the stuff that specs are made of?

Answer: HELLO STAN, I AM PLEASED YOU ARE HAPPY WITH YOUR NEW 5A'S, THEY WILL GIVE YOU MANY YEARS OF ENJOYMENT AND ARE A TRUE LIFELONG INVESTMENT. WHO KNOWS WHAT TECHNOLOGY WILL COME DOWN THE PIKE. IMAGINE THE MANY PEOPLE WHO INVESTED IN MODEL 5'S NOW 10 YEARS AGO, SENDING THEM IN FOR AN UP-GRADE TOO 5A'S AND EXPERIENCING WHAT YOU ARE. AS A BONUS HAVING THEIR INVESTMENT PROTECTED BY NOT HAVING TO SELL THEM AT HALF COST AND STARTING ALL OVER. I BELIEVE THAT WAVEFORM PRESERVATION IS THE MOST IMPORTANT PARAMETER IN LOUDSPEAKER DESIGN. MANY PARAMETERS ARE IMPORTANT AND A GOOD DESIGN WILL DO WELL AT ALL OF THEM. THAT "SPOOKILY REAL" EFFECT IS THE OUTCOME OF REPLICATING WHAT THE AMPLIFIER PASSED ON TO THE SPEAKER AS PERFECTLY AS POSSIBLE.

Tom (2/27/06): What center channel speaker will work best with Vandersteen 2Cs?

Answer: HELLO TOM, THE VCC-2 OR THE VCC-5. READ THROUGH SOME OF THE POSTS ON THIS SITE FOR MORE INFORMATION.

Ray (2/27/06): Hi Richard, I have the vaunted model 5 and would like to set the room compensation. I purchased the Stereophile cd and the Radio Shack  Spl meter. What is the proper procedure for setting the room compensation using the warble tones and the Radio Shack meter?, or could  I purchase this information because my manual only refers to RTA  procedure. Thank you.....

Answer: HELLO RAY, THE SHORT SECTION AFTER THE RTA SECTION IN THE MANUAL IS WHAT YOU ARE LOOKING FOR. GETTING THIS RIGHT IS SO IMPORTANT I WOULD HIRE A VANDERSTEEN DEALER WITH FACTORY TRAINING TO DO IT THE FIRST TIME. IF THAT IS NOT POSSIBLE YOU WILL GET BETTER PERFORMANCE LEAVING THE 11 BANDS SET FLAT JUST LIKE ANY REGULAR SPEAKER WOULD BE. THE PROCEDURE OUTLINED IN THE MANUAL WITH AN RTA IS NOT RECOMMENDED BECAUSE THE RESULT IS NOT GOOD. CALL ME AND I CAN GIVE YOU THE NAMES OF DEALERS WHO HAVE FACTORY TRAINING IN YOUR AREA.

Daniel (2/27/06): Hi Mr. Vandersteen,  If I have wood floors but can't afford to spend $80 or so on these  "soft shoe" things for the floor spikes on your speaker stands, are  there any alternatives?? Perhaps hex bolts?? Any suggestions would be  really appreciated.

Answer: HELLO DANIEL, I GUESS IT DEPENDS ON HOW IMPORTANT THE FLOOR FINISH IS. CARRIAGE BOLTS ARE NOT POINTED BUT WILL SCUFF THE FLOOR. PICK YOUR POISON.

Chi (2/27/06): I have a pair of 1Cs (3 years old) and have tried using the treble control behind to adjust for some room differences. However, moving the dial does not result in much audible change to the sound and I can  hear a scratchy sound emanating from the speakers when I adjust the dial. Are the controls damaged?

Answer: HELLO CHI, THE CONTROL ON THE REAR OF YOUR IC'S ADJUST ONLY +-2DB, THIS IS VERY SUBTLE. IT IS NORMAL FOR THE CONTROL TO MAKE A STATIC NOISE BUT ONLY WHILE TURNING IT. ONCE A SETTING IS SETTLED ON AND THE CONTROL IS SET THE STATIC SHOULD CEASE.

(2/28/06): I bought a used pair of Vandersteen model 1 speakers, sound is superb, but I cant seem to find much info on this model, is it the same as the model 1C...your feedback is much appreciated

Answer: HELLO ????, THE ONLY THING COMMON BETWEEN THE 1B AND 1C ARE THEIR EXTERNAL APPEARANCE AND BASIC DESIGN. THE WOOFER, TWEETER, X-OVER, AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE ARE TOTALLY DIFFERENT. THE MODEL 1B WENT OUT OF PRODUCTION MANY YEARS AGO BEFORE WE WERE ON COMPUTER THAT'S WHY THERE IS NO INFORMATION. SET-UP AND HOOKUP ARE BASICALLY THE SAME AS THE 1C'S SO YOU COULD GET A COPY OF THE 1C MANUAL. ALL THE PARTS NECESSARY TO REPAIR ANY ASPECT OF YOUR 1B'S OR ANY SPEAKER WE HAVE EVER MADE IS STILL AVAILABLE.

Peter (2/28/06): I recently bought an old pair of model 2Ci speakers.  Bi-wired them and they sound fabulous. I also obtained in the same deal a VCC1 center speaker. I have been going back and forth in hooking that speaker up to my system ( I have gotten too many conflicting opinions by the "experts", too many and diverse to list.  Can you suggest what outlet I hook this speaker up to and what wire is best to use (am now using 16 gauge Monster with gold plated spade on the speaker end and banana plugs on the other) I have a Sony FM/AM  home theater receiver with two front speaker outlets- the IICi are  bi-wired into one of these, a center outlet and 1 rear speaker outlet)

Answer: HELLO PETER, I AM NOT CLEAR WHAT YOU ARE ASKING BUT I THINK YOUR ANSWER SHOULD BE IN THE OPERATION MANUAL OF YOUR RECEIVER. CONSULTING THE EXPERTS INCLUDING THIS ONE IS A WASTE OF TIME COMPARED TO ONE DIAGRAM IN THE MANUAL. IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU PAY SOMEONE TO HOOK THIS SYSTEM UP FOR YOU BEFORE YOU DO NON WARRANTY DAMAGE TO YOUR RECEIVER.

Ron (3/01/06): Good morning Richard. I have the opportunity to purchase a VCC-1 to  match up with my 2CI's. The serial numbers for the VCC-1's I am considering are 1452 & 9296. Can you tell me the production date of each? Are there any changes between the two? I see info that says you now have a  VCC-2. Where can I locate info on this version? Once again, thank you.

Answer: HELLO RON, WHEN BUYING USED SPEAKERS I CAN'T EMPHASIZE ENOUGH HOW IMPORTANT IS TO BUY ONE YOU CAN AUDITION. IF YOU WERE OUR TECH FOR REPAIRS YOU WOULD KNOW WHAT I MEAN. WE SEE IMPROPER SUBSTITUTION OF PARTS INCLUDING DRIVERS, SPEAKERS THAT HAVE SEVER HEAT DAMAGE TO X-OVER PARTS THAT WERE NOT REPAIRED DURING A FIELD DRIVER SWAP, ETC. IF YOU WERE TO AUDITION SUCH A SPEAKER AND LIKED WHAT YOU HEARD, THAT'S OK. YOU PAY THE GUY WHAT HE'S ASKING AND YOU NEVER KNOW THE DIFFERENCE. IF HOWEVER YOU ARE FAMILIAR BECAUSE OF A VISIT TO A VANDERSTEEN DEALER THAT SCENARIO IS UNLIKELY TO HAPPEN, YOU WILL KNOW WHAT IT SHOULD DO.  WE DO NOT LOG MANUFACTURE DATES, ALL WE CAN DO IS ESTIMATE. I ESTIMATE A 10 YEAR DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE TWO WHICH WOULD INVOLVE MANY CHANGES THAT ARE NOT UP-GRADABLE. I RECOMMEND BUYING OUR PRODUCTS USED BECAUSE IT ALLOWS MORE PERFORMANCE FOR THE DOLLAR, BUT DO WISELY BY AUDITIONING THEM. THE VCC-2 IS NOT AVAILABLE UNTIL JUNE OR SO KEEP IN TOUCH WITH YOUR DEALER.

Daryl (3/02/06): Hi. I am interested in replacing the top and bottom plate of my 2C's.  Currently, I have oak veneer and will replace them with a cherry or  mahogany. Can you tell me if the center grill cloth in the top plate  is removable so I can use it in the new plate that I build? Failing  that, can I buy the cloth? I am a good woodworker. Also, are the plates for the 2C available for purchase from Vandersteen in other veneers? Thanks. -- Daryl

Answer: HELLO DARYL, THE ONLY WAY TO CHANGE THE TOP AND BOTTOM IS AT THE FACTORY. WE CAN INSTALL ANY OF OUR STANDARD AND OPTIONAL FINISHES FOR APPROXIMATELY $240.00. THIS WOULD MAKE THEM LOOK LIKE A BRAND NEW PAIR, NOT TO MANY SPEAKERS CAN BE REFURBISHED PERFECTLY FOR THAT KIND OF MONEY. I WOULD NOT RECOMMEND YOU INVEST THAT AMOUNT INTO A PAIR OF SPEAKERS THAT ARE 20 YEARS OLD. PUT THAT MONEY TOWARDS A NEWER PAIR OF 2CE'S. EVEN THE 2CI'S ARE NOW 15 YEARS OLD AND BEHIND TODAY'S TECHNOLOGY.

Bob (3/03/06): I have two pair of speakers, which I am very happy with. I have 41422Ci and 41423Ci in the front, and 40650 and 40651 in the rear.  There is also a Snell Center Channel and Paradigm Subs. I purchased  the entire system used, from a friend. I don't really know how old  they are, but am under the impression they were all purchased about the same time. Can you tell me which Center Channel of yours, I could  match to these speakers? I am trying to build a matched set. Power is provided by B&K Amps and Tuner. The sound now is awsome, but I believe  the "matching" center would make it better. You can be proud of your fine product. Thanks, for the help, Bob K.

Answer: HELLO BOB K, YOU ARE CORRECT, HAVING ALL 5 CHANNELS MATCHED WILL BE MUCH BETTER. IN A SYSTEM BASED ON MODEL TWO'S THE VCC-5 OR THE NOT YET AVAILABLE VCC-2 WILL BE THE BEST MATCH. IT IS RECOMMENDED TO SKEW YOUR INVESTMENT TOWARDS THE CENTER AND SUBS BECAUSE MUCH IS EXPECTED OF THEM IN H.T. PERUSE THE FAQ SECTION AND OTHER INFORMATION AVAILABLE THROUGHOUT THIS WEB SITE FOR FURTHER HELP. YOUR B&K EQUIPMENT WILL WORK WELL.

David (3/03/06): David (3/3/06) One of my 2WQs is dead. The repair instructions tell me to remove the amplifier and return it to you for examination and  repair. Before shipping it, is there any troubleshooting I should try?  I have verified by checking outlets, amplifiers and wires that the amp of the sub is the source of the problem. Is the quality of speaker  wire as important for the subs as it is for the main speakers? I assume it is not. What wire works best for the 2WQ? I have 3A Sigs and a pair of 2WQs and I am very pleased with the sound. You make a fabulous product, that unlike most things on the market, is actually worth its cost. Thank you.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE TESTS YOU HAVE ALREADY ACCOMPLISHED ARE ALL THERE IS. IF THE SUB-WOOFER HAS BEEN UNPLUGGED FOR 5 MIN OR SO IT SHOULD MAKE A POP WHEN YOU PLUG IT BACK IN. IF IT DOES NOT POP IT NEEDS SERVICE. INSIDE THERE IS A RESET-ABLE CIRCUIT BREAKER, DO NOT RESET IT. MAKE A DRAWING OF THE WIRING HARNESS AND PUT IT AND THE SCREWS INTO THE OPENING THE AMPLIFIER WAS IN. FILL OUT THE RMA AND SEND IT TO VANDERSTEEN AUDIO. REBUILD COST IS $160.00 IF NO CURRENT WARRANTY IS ON FILE. THE WIRE PROVIDED SHOULD BE ADEQUATE. THERE HAVE BEEN REPORTS THAT USING THE SAME WIRE AS THE SPEAKERS ARE HOOKED UP WITH GIVES BETTER PERFORMANCE. I HAVE BEEN UNABLE TO VERIFY THAT IN A DOUBLE BLIND TEST, THE MIND CAN PLAY TRICKS. IF YOU FIND DIFFERENT RESULTS IN A BLIND COMPARISON I WOULD LIKE TO HEAR ABOUT IT.

David (3/04/06): I just bought a pair of 3's and the cloth shows its age. Do you sell  replacement cloth or what is the cost for the factory to do it?

Answer: HELLO DAVID M, YOU CAN GO TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND BUY BULK CLOTH BUT IT IS VERY DIFFICULT TO DO. CLOTH REPLACEMENT IS PART OF EVERY UP-GRADE OR YOU CAN SEND IT IN TO US. THE COST IS $60.00 PER SPEAKER PLUS FREIGHT TO AND FROM THE FACTORY.

Jacques (3/05/06): Can the Quatro Signature be positioned against the wall as you seem to indicate in the photo in your Product Information  section? If not, I suppose the usual minimum of 1 foot from the wall  will be correct? Also, what does the subtitle "Signature" indicate;  what does it represent?

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, YOU CAN PUT THEM ANYWHERE YOU THINK THEY SOUND GOOD IN YOU ROOM. SIGNATURE MEANS THAT EACH PAIR IS TWEAKED IN THE ANECHOIC CHAMBER.

Ron (3/06/06): Richard, I have a question & a request.  Question - I am using CI's for the main & VCC-1 for center, no sub at this time, NHT for surround. My processor is set for large, small, small & none. Is this acceptable or should I change it?  Request - The VCC-1 I am using is a loaner, Audio Connection ordered a  new one for me today. I made a mistake and asked for the covering to  be black. My wife say's the CI's are brown. Can you please make sure  the VCC-1 is sent with the brown covering?  Many thanks.

Answer: HELLO RON, SOUNDS LIKE YOU HAVE THINGS SET UP PROPERLY BUT I WOULD RECOMMEND A SUB-WOOFER SOON. YOUR 2CI'S ARE NOT GOING TO LAST LONG PLAYING THE BASS EFFECTS THAT ARE ON SOME MOVIES. PERUSE THE OTHER FAQ'S ON THIS SITE FOR RELATED SUBJECTS OR ASK YOUR DEALER. THIS FAQ SECTION IS NOT INTENDED TO REPLACE DEALER COMMUNICATION ABOUT AN ORDER, CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER. I DO THIS AT HOME IN THE EVENING FOR QUESTIONS THAT ARE OF BROAD INTEREST TO MANY READERS. OTHER QUESTIONS SHOULD BE ASKED OF THE DEALER OR CALL TECH AT VANDERSTEEN (559-582-0324).

Jim (3/06/06): I have the 2Ce Signatures and the Vandy subwoofer. My tube preamp inverts polarity. When I switch the speaker cables at  the amplifier posts (red to black and black to red), do I switch the cables to the subwoofer also? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JIM, YES YOU WOULD OR THE SUB-WOOFER WOULD BE OUT OF PHASE.

Havish (3/07/06): I have 2Ce signatures for the fronts, VCC-1 for the center channel, VSM-1s for the rears, and a V2W subwoofer connected to the pre-amp subwoofer output of a Rotel RSX-1067 receiver. I have read on this page and elsewhere that you are concerned about the sounds generated by movies damaging the main speakers which are the 2Ce signatures in  my case.  Are you worried about the LFE channel being re-directed to the main speakers? If so, with a V2W to deal with the LFE (subwoofer set to “yes”), shouldn’t it be ok to set the front speakers to “large”? On the other hand, if you are concerned about the effects encoded on the  channels intended for the front speakers themselves, it would be better to set the front speakers to “small”. So, which setting would you recommend when a V2W subwoofer is present in the system? Many thanks for taking the time to answer the questions on this page. The answers definitely help understand many subtleties.

Answer: HELLO HAVISH, YOU ARE CORRECT THE LFE IS HANDLED BY THE V2W SO THAT INFORMATION IS NOT A PROBLEM. WHAT COULD BE A PROBLEM IS THE BASE INFORMATION IN THE LEFT AND RIGHT CHANNEL. SELECTING SMALL WILL SOLVE THE PROBLEM BUT AT THE EXPENSE OF FIDELITY. IF YOUR RECEIVER HAS PRE OUT AND AMP IN JACKS ON THE REAR, INSTALLING A X-2 AT 20HZ IN THE LOOP WILL ROLL OFF THE 2CE SIGS AT A 6DB PER OCTAVE RATE. THIS IS GOOD AND WILL PROTECT THE SPEAKERS. SELECTING SMALL WILL INSTALL A 12DB PER OCTAVE SLOPE AT WHAT EVER FREQUENCY IS SELECTED, THIS WILL CAUSE A PINCHED SOUND WITH HARSHNESS IN THE MIDS (LIKE ALL HIGH ORDER FILTERS) NOT GOOD. CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER ON HOW TO DO THIS OR IF THE RECEIVER WILL NOT ACCOMMODATE THIS, JUST RUN THEM LARGE AND WATCH THE LEVELS.

Adrian (3/08/06): I am the proud owner of your Model 2Ce Signatures however in the ever pursuit of improvement I am looking into acquiring the Quatros.  However I have a question with the Quatros being that they have an internal amplifier do you recommend a dedicated power outlet for a pair of Quatros? What is the average power consumption of the internal amplifiers?.........Keep on the great work!

Answer: HELLO ADRIAN, THEY DO NOT REQUIRE A SEPARATE CIRCUIT IN FACT AN ARGUMENT CAN BE MADE FOR ONE CIRCUIT MAKING BETTER SOUND. AVERAGE POWER CONSUMPTION DEPENDS ON THE SIGNAL BUT WILL NOT EXCEED 250 WATTS PER CHANNEL.

Alan (3/08/06): My cat has been using my 2CE speakers as a climbing/scratching post!  How can I replace the cloth covers? Alan

Answer: HELLO ALAN, REMOVING THE CLOTH ON THE BOTTOM FOR SERVICE IS EASY FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE. REMOVING THE TOP FOR CLOTH REPLACEMENT IS A DIFFERENT STORY AND QUITE DIFFICULT BUT YOU CAN TRY. YOU CAN ORDER CLOTH FROM YOUR DEALER OR SEND THEM IN AND WE WILL. COST IS $60.00 PER SPEAKER PLUS FREIGHT, NOT A LOT CONSIDERING THEY WILL LOOK LIKE NEW AFTER SUCH ABUSE.

Jeff (3/08/06): I have been a believer and faithful listener of Vandersteens for about 12 years now. My wife has continued to beat me up with the ugliness of wires and equipment. I have been in pain trying to find a proper  home theater 'closet' for the speakers (with the 61" DLP TV in the center, my other gear is in a closet behind the wall). I have 3’s for the fronts, Vcc5 center, VSM for surrounds and 4 2Ws attached to 3’s and VSM’s.  Having a lot of wood or other 'structure' around would go against how I understand the philosophy of "openness" and be degrading to the sound. After many thoughts and plans, I have finally come up with one I think is worthy. I built 'frames' out of 2X2's. I stretched acoustic fabric cloth over these frames. The frames are on 3 sides with the back side against a wall. The 3's are positioned so no wood framing is in front of the speaker driver. It now looks pretty good and doesn’t seem to add any unwanted ‘color’ to the sound. Here's my two questions. Do you think this is a good set up and should I remove the speaker socks (since they are now behind an 'enclosure') for better sound. Thanks in advance.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, IF IT SOUNDS GOOD IT IS A GOOD SET UP. MANY HAVE SET UPS LIKE THAT AND I HAVE HEARD SEVERAL THAT SOUNDED VERY GOOD. THE SPEAKER CLOTH IS SO TRANSPARENT I WOULD NOT REMOVE IT. HOPEFULLY YOU SELECTED CLOTH FOR YOUR ENCLOSURE THAT IS EQUALLY TRANSPARENT. HAPPY LISTENING.

Michael (3/08/06): Hi Richard, I know this ha been answered in one form or another but I need to ask. I have a room that is 10 x 12 x 9. In the next year or so, I will probably move to the other room which will be 12 x 15 x 9. I was thinking of the 3a sigs but I'm worried that it is too big for the room. I could consider the 2ce sigs but I'm worried that I won't have the refinement that comes with the 3a's.  My room is treated with Abfussors/traps. My preamp is an Aesthetix Calypso and my power amp is BAT VK-75. Which would you recommend?

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, 3A SIG'S. READ SOME OF THE OTHER Q&A ABOUT WHAT TO DO IF YOU HAVE TOO MUCH BASS.

Dave R. (3/09/06): Hi Richard,  Thank you for answering my Q on 2/22/2006, re early 1b's. I am planning to purchase 2ce signatures, a v2w, and use the "early" 1B's as side surround speakers. Now all I need is rear speakers. I would like to use vsm-1 for this purpose, but wall mounting poses a problem. Can they be mounted on stands, and if so what kind? Any other suggestions would be appreciated.  Thank you..

Answer: HELLO DAVE R, THE VSM-1 ON WALL'S ARE VOICED WHILE MOUNTED ON A WALL FOR PROPER RESPONSE. IF YOU STAND MOUNT THE VSM-1 MUST HAVE A FOUR FOOT BY FOUR FOOT BACK BAFFLE OR THE SOUND WILL BE VERY LEAN AND FORWARD. YOU MIGHT USE THE OLD 1B'S ON THE REAR AND THE VSM-1 ON THE SIDE WALL.

Tom (3/09/06): All of the info I've been able to find regarding your subs and how to hook them up refer to the crossover between the pre-amp and receiver etc.  I'm trying to find out if they can be hooked up to just a home theater  receiver. I currently own a Yamaha htr-5150 and have been thinking about getting the new Denon avr-2807. I currently have 1B's (which I have loved for many years) upfront, but have an opportunity to get 3A's and two 2w's at an unbelievable price. However, I'm worried that  I'll need to spend more being able to use them than I will getting them. Any advise would be greatly appreciated. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO TOM, YOU CAN USE THE 2W WITH ANY RECEIVER THAT HAS A PRE OUT AND AMP IN LOOP FOR THE LEFT AND RIGHT FRONT CHANEL'S. BE CAREFUL, MOST A/V RECEIVERS DO NOT HAVE THIS FEATURE THESE DAYS. I AM NOT AWARE OF ANY RECEIVER AT ANY PRICE THAT WILL DRIVE THE MODEL 3A ADEQUATELY. IF MODEL 3 SOMETHING'S ARE IN YOUR FUTURE BUY SEPARATES. CONSULT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND PERUSE OTHER Q&A'S ON THIS SITE. HT

Mark (3/09/06): Hi, What types of veneers are available for the Model 3a Sigs?  Up charges?  Thanks

Answer: HELLO MARK, OAK, WALNUT, MAPLE, AND CHERRY ARE STANDARD WOOD VENEERS. CONSULT YOUR DEALER FOR A QUOTE ON SPECIAL WOOD VENEERS. WE WILL PUT ALMOST ANYTHING ON A CUSTOM BASES BUT HANG ON TO YOUR POCKETBOOK.

David (3/10/06):  Exactly what are "O Lugs"? I can't find anything by that name in hardware stores or online. I have an idea of what they are, but I want to be sure I'm using what you are recommending. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, ALSO CALLED "RING LUGS" BE SURE TO CRIMP FIRST AND THEN SOLDER FROM THE RING SIDE. REMOVE SOLDER AND HEAT THE SECOND SOLDER FLOWS TO PREVENT SOLDER FROM WICKING PAST THE CRIMP AND INTO THE WIRE. APPLY HEAT ON THE RING END

Philipp (3/10/06): Hello Mr. Vandersteen!  I am writing from Vienna/Austria. I want to say thanks for a great speaker. Listening to a pair of 2ce signature is really stunning.  Europe's loudspeakers are all the same. I had a pair of B&W 803D for three months and I was not happy with them.  The 2ce signature produces an impressive soundstage.  The music just flows I am really satisfied know. It's a pity that  Vandersteen is in fact not really present in Europe (especially in  Germany and Austria). Another question: do I have a warranty for my knew babies?  My other equipment: Arcam FMJ Amplifier and CD-Player.  Thanks for the opportunity to get a pair of great loudspeakers to Austria!

Answer: HELLO PHILIPP, HAPPY TO HEAR YOU ARE PLEASED WITH THE 2CE SIGNATURES. YOUR WARRANTY IS VALID BUT THE WORK MUST BE DONE AT THE FACTORY. IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT YOU NEED A DRIVER REBUILT, DOWN LOAD THE RMA UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE RETURN IT TO VANDERSTEEN AUDIO.

David (3/12/06): Hi Richard. I am very confused about the serial number sequences in various Model IIs. You make reference to #77,000 and above being upgradeable and also mention (In response to "Unknown" on 1/25/06 that 56032 was the first to use the 1" tweeter. My 2Ce Signatures, purchased new in August of 2001 bear the serial numbers 53904 and 53905. They are clearly marked as Signatures and use barrier strips. Is there a way to clear up the confusion by, perhaps, listing your "blocks" of serial numbers? Thanks much,

Answer:  HELLO DAVID, I BELIEVE THE CONFUSION IS BECAUSE PEOPLE THINK THE 2CE'S AND THE 2CE SIGNATURE HAVE THE SAME NUMBER SEQUENCE. THIS IS NOT THE CASE, THEY HAVE THEIR OWN NUMBER SEQUENCE, FOR INSTANCE YOU COULD HAVE A 2CE WITH 53000, OR A 2CE SIGNATURE WITH 53000, OR A 1C WITH 53000, OR A MODEL 3 WITH 53000 EXCEPT WE HAVE NOT MADE THAT MANY YET. HOPE THIS CLEARS THINGS UP.

John doe (3/12/06): Do you have any plans to offer the Model 1 or 2 in wood cabinet albeit at a higher price?

Answer: HELLO JOHN DOE, THERE WILL NEVER BE AN ALL WOOD VERSION OF THE 1C OR THE 2CE BECAUSE THEY WOULD RETAIL FOR FOUR TIMES THE PRICE. LOOK AT THE MARKET AND FIND A SPEAKER IN WOOD THAT HAS AS MANY CUSTOM DRIVERS AS THE 2CE SIGNATURE. THAT WOULD BE FOUR CUSTOM DRIVERS WITH VERY HIGH QUALITY X-OVER, EACH SPEAKER CUSTOM TWEAKED IN AN ANECHOIC CHAMBER BY HAND. I KNOW IT DOESN'T EXIST BUT YOUR LOOKING AT SIX TO EIGHT THOUSAND DOLLARS. FOR THAT KIND OF MONEY YOU COULD BUY A QUATRO IN FABRIC OR FOR $10,700 A QUATRO IN BEAUTIFUL WOOD. IT ALL DEPENDS, WHEN ON A BUDGET, WHAT YOU WANT TO SPEND YOUR MONEY ON.

Allen (3/12/06): Hi Richard from a fellow Pa. boy. I'm looking to buy a pair of used 1C's because that's all I can afford. The owner gave me the serial numbers and I was hoping you could tell me how old they are? He is not the original owner so all he and I have to go by are the serial numbers. They are 64902c and 64903c. Thanks Richard and continued success.

Answer: HELLO ALLEN, WE DO NOT RECORD THIS INFORMATION BECAUSE IT COST MONEY AND WOULD NOT MAKE THE SPEAKER SOUND BETTER. PERUSE THE OLDER FAQ'S AND READ THE CAUTION ABOUT BUYING USED. LISTEN TO THEM AND IF YOU LIKE THEM FOR THE MONEY BUY THEM. BECAUSE THERE IS A "C" AFTER THE SN NUMBER THEY ARE 1C'S.

Russ (3/12/06): Hi Richard - I am the proud owner of a pair of Model 5As, along with many other models of Vandersteen loudspeakers. I am interested in knowing whether you think there is any benefit to using any of the aftermarket "audiophile" power cords on the 5A subwoofer amps. I have found certain models of aftermarket power cords to make audible differences with source components and some power amplifiers, but before I spend any money on "audiophile" power cords for the 5As I'd like to know if you've had any experience in this area.

Answer: HELLO RUSS, GOOD TO HEAR YOU ARE ENJOYING YOUR 5A'S. THE RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT WAS DONE USING THE SUPPLIED POWER CORDS. THERE IS NO QUESTION YOU CAN CHANGE THE SOUND WITH DIFFERENT POWER CORDS BUT IT WON'T BE WHAT I WANTED. IF IT ENDS UP BEING WHAT YOU WANT, YOUR THE BOSS. I WOULD SPEND THE MONEY ON MORE HIGH RESOLUTION MUSIC (VINYL).

Bill (3/13/06): Hi Richard, I have been looking for new speakers for some time.  Research and experience over the past years has kept me interested in  Time Coherent designs but I have a few questions. The B&W 800 series have stepped baffles, low diffraction, first order crossovers, aerodynamic magnet behind the midrange to deal with internal diffraction, and other similarities with Vandersteen but why do they sound so different? Your speakers seem to have more in common with my present Meadowlarks, do you agree? Please clarify these issues for me.

Answer: HELLO BILL, I WILL ANSWER YOUR LAST QUESTION FIRST. YOUR PRESENT MEADOWLARKS ARE TIME AND PHASE CORRECT SO THEY WOULD BE MORE SIMILAR IN SOUND. THE B&W'S WELL I DON'T KNOW WHERE TO START EXCEPT TO TAKE EACH CLAIM ONE AT A TIME. FIRST, THEY ARE NOT TIME AND PHASE CORRECT THE STEP IN STEREOPHILE WILL SHOW YOU THAT. READ SOME OF THE OTHER ANSWERS ON THIS SITE AS TO HOW TO RECOGNIZE THIS. MANY PARAMETERS MUST BE OPTIMIZED IN A LOUDSPEAKER DESIGN TO PRESERVE WAVEFORM BEING TIME AND PHASE CORRECT IS ONLY ONE OF THEM. IN 1989 WE INTRODUCED THE MODEL 3 WITH A NOVEL MID-RANGE FOR WHICH WE RECEIVED A PATENT. IT INTRODUCED A AERODYNAMIC MAGNET AND CHASSIS (TO DEAL WITH THE BACK WAVE), LINEAR (FLAT) SURROUND IN ORDER TO REDUCE DISTORTION. OUR DESIGNS WERE ALREADY TIME AND PHASE CORRECT AT THE TIME WITH FIRST ORDER X-OVERS. THE B&W'S USE A FIRST ORDER FILTER ONLY ON THE TWEETER AS I UNDERSTAND. SO TO ANSWER YOUR QUESTION, THERE ARE SOME SIMILARITIES ESPECIALLY IN THE MID-RANGE EXCEPT IT IS THE SIZE OF A MID-WOOFER BUT MY CRYSTAL BALL SAYS IT WILL MORPH INTO A MORE APPROPRIATE SIZE SOON. THE SPEAKERS SOUND VERY DIFFERENT BECAUSE THEY DO NOT PRESERVE THE WAVEFORM EVEN THOUGH THEY LIKE OURS ARE LOW IN DIFFRACTION.

Glenn (3/13/06): Richard: I have the model 5As with the Quicksilver V4 amp, and the PSE preamp. I am currently using the audioquest viper  interconnects. I am thinking about 'upgrading.' As I follow the signal to the speakers, I notice the wire between your crossover and  my amp. What is the (approximate) current audioquest equivalent of  that wire? Perhaps this is an unanswerable question, please excuse me  if it is.  If my upgrade wire is superior, how would I replace the current wire from the crossover to the amp?  Thanks,

Answer: HELLO GLENN, IT IS IMPOSSIBLE FOR ME TO TELL EXCEPT THAT WE HAVE ALWAYS USED THE TOP OF THE LINE. IT WOULD BE VERY EXPENSIVE TO CHANGE THE PIGTAILS. UNLESS YOU WENT TO THE VERY TOP OF THEIR LINE ON ALL YOUR CABLES YOU WOULD GET VERY LITTLE CHANGE IF ANY FOR YOUR MONEY. YOU MIGHT BORROW YOUR DEALERS WITH THE LATER TAILS AND LISTEN FOR THE DIFFERENCE.

Keith (3/13/06): Richard,  I have an old set of Vandersteen 3s. They have had none of the upgrades, I love them now and can only imagine how good they would sound with two upgrades. What would the major differences be between what they sound like now and what they would sound like after the two upgrades. My other question is, i am running a McIntosh system Model 2155 amp, it puts out 150 watts per channel, I know have my speakers on the 4 ohm outputs, but have had people tell me they would sound better with 8 ohms put in them. What is your take on this? My speakers clearly say 4 ohms, but friends have told me that because I am running a McIntosh system that the 8 ohms would work better, Please help me with this dilemma.

Answer: HELLO KEITH, I WOULD GO TO YOUR DEALER AND AUDITION THE 3A SIGNATURE FOR YOURSELF AND SEE WHAT YOU THINK. TRY BOTH THE 4 AND 8 OHM TAPS AND LEAVE IT HOOKED UP TO THE ONE THAT SOUNDS BEST. EITHER TAP WILL WORK WITHOUT DAMAGE TO YOUR AMPLIFIER OR SPEAKER. I GUESS IF YOU HAVE THIS AS A DILEMMA YOUR IN GOOD SHAPE WITH A SIMPLE SOLUTION.

Ian (3/13/06): Richard - I am enjoying my 5As (purchased new before the end of 2005).  I enjoy vinyl and well recorded CDs. However my current amplification  is now showing its limitations. I am investigating replacement amplification (pre- and power). Although I appreciate that you have been reluctant to publicly discuss preferred amplification, what recent product experience has revealed the true potential of these great speakers? (Yes, I will work with my dealer, but your input is particularly of interest.

Answer: HELLO IAN, THE FIRST CHOICE YOU HAVE TO MAKE IS TUBE OR SOLID STATE. MAKE SURE YOUR SPEAKERS ARE WELL BROKEN IN (400 HRS), AND PLACED IN THE ROOM OPTIMALLY, AND THE BASE EQ ADJUSTED. FIND A DEALER THAT IS MAKING GOOD SOUND AND TRY SOME IN HOME DEMO'S. PEOPLE WHO BUY MODEL 5 OR 5A'S TASTES ARE ALL OVER THE MAP, THAT IS THE BEAUTY OF A NEUTRAL SPEAKER. IN MY TRAVELS I HAVE HEARD MANY DIFFERENT COMBO'S, SOME GOOD, SOME SO SO. IT IS INTERESTING HOW HAPPY THE OWNERS WERE WITH SOME SYSTEMS I THOUGHT WERE SO SO.  BLONDS AND BRUNETTES. GIVE ME A CALL AND LET ME KNOW WHAT YOU HAVE TRIED AND WHAT YOU THOUGHT OF THEM MAYBE I'LL HAVE AN IDEA.

Ron (3/14/06): I bought a pair of your 1B speakers back in 1990 and still love them to this day! I use them in conjunction with a NAD 7240 receiver and CD player...but here's my question:  I'd love to play along on guitar with my son (on his separate combo amp); right now his amp only has one line-in and we're not planning to upgrade his until next Christmas. If I play mine on low volume do you think it would be possible/all right to run it thru my system? I don't know that much about transparency, impedance, etc. and am looking for some technical guidance. Thanks

Answer: HELLO RON, IF EVERYTHING WENT PERFECT AT NORMAL LEVELS THERE WOULD BE NO PROBLEMS. WITH LIVE MUSIC FEEDBACK IS VERY LIKELY AND WOULD COST A PAIR OF TWEETERS IN A HEART BEAT. I RECOMMEND YOU BUY A RADIO SHACK MIKE MIXER (APX $39.00) TO EXPAND YOUR SONS AMPLIFIER INPUTS. IT'S NOT IF SOMETHING WILL GO WRONG ONLY WHEN.

Dave (3/15/06): Just saw the Quattro-wood pics, quite good looking...but, won't the enclosure inherently "box" the sound? I truly love the open, airy sound of our 3A Sig's and it seems that even the 5s have the upper register drivers essentially hanging in space.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, THE ANSWER IS......NO. BECAUSE THE SPEAKER IS SO NARROW AND THE DESIGN OF THE GRILLE STRUCTURE (THIS SPEAKER LIKE THE 5 SERIES MUST BE USED WITH THE GRILLE) THERE IS VERY LITTLE BAFFLE AROUND THE THREE DRIVERS. WHAT LITTLE BAFFLE THERE IS IS COVERED WITH ACOUSTIC FELT. WE WERE ABLE TO DO THIS BECAUSE THE EIGHT INCH WOOFERS ALLOW THE SPEAKER TO BE ONLY TEN INCHES WIDE AT THE BOTTOM. ALL OF OUR SPEAKERS HAVE THEIR DRIVERS IN BOXES BECAUSE THE REAR WAVE MUST BE CONTAINED OR THE REAR ENERGY WILL CAUSE TIME SMEAR. THEY ARE DESIGNED WITH VERY SMALL FORWARD FACING SURFACES, SO THE SOUND WILL NOT BE RE-RADIATED, ALSO CAUSING TIME SMEAR.

Peter (3/15/06): Hello Richard, this is Peter and I have two questions for you. The first is related to your comments on the pre-amp volume control. You say that with it at the 12:00 position it will be the onset of clipping on most amps. I'm a little surprised that it would occur so soon, especially since some audiophiles think the "sweet spot" for volume controls is 10:00 to 2:00, but more specifically I was wondering if you would say this for my components; 3A Signatures being driven by Audio Research LS25 Mk II and a Classic 60? The second question is my system is in a relatively small room (the speakers see 13'x14'x7' due to a partial wall, though it is actually 17'x14'x7') and some folks on Audiogon and Audio Asylum have said the 3's are too much speaker for the room and 2's would sound better. I'm not sure I  agree since I upgraded from 2Ci's, but I was wondering if the Quatro's would be a better choice? I will say I had bass problems, but I solved the worst of them with a single 2Wq. Thanks for your time and keep up the great work!

Answer: HELLO PETER, I SAID THIS WAS THE CASE MOST OF THE TIME. I DO NOT KNOW IF IT IS IN YOUR CASE. THE REASON THIS HAS HAPPENED IS BECAUSE WHEN CD PLAYERS CAME OUT 20 YEARS AGO SOMEONE DECIDED 2 VOLTS AVE OUT WAS GOOD, WHEREAS BEFORE 1 VOLT AVE WAS MOST COMMON. IT'S NOT A BIG CONCERN BECAUSE CD IS NOT HIGH RESOLUTION ANYWAY COMPARED TO THE SWEET SPOT OF A VOLUME CONTROL. NOW I WOULD MAKE SURE MY VINYL WAS IN THE SWEET SPOT! I GUESS SOME OF THE GUYS ON AUDIO GONE OR AUDIO ASYLUM ARE GUESSING INSTEAD OF COMMENTING WITH ACTUAL EXPERIENCE, OR THEIR EXPERIENCE WAS MANY YEARS AGO THINKING NOTHINGS CHANGED. I RECEIVED A CALL DAYS AGO FROM AN ENTHUSIASTIC GUY WHO JUST RETIRED HIS 2C'S FOR 2CE SIGNATURES AND WAS SURPRISED THEY WERE SO DIFFERENT, I REMINDED HIM THAT WAS 20 YEARS AGO. NOW YOU WILL BE ABLE TO CORRECT THEM BASED ON YOUR ACTUAL EXPERIENCE. MY EXPERIENCE IS THAT THE COUPLE OF HZ DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE 2'S AND 3'S EITHER WORKS FOR BOTH OR NEITHER. THE QUATRO IS A MUCH HIGHER PERFORMANCE LOUDSPEAKER, BUT THEN AGAIN IT BETTER BE FOR SEVEN GRAND. THEY DO HAVE A SUB-WOOFER WITH ADJUSTABLE BASS WHICH WOULD BE AN ADVANTAGE IN A DIFFICULT ROOM.

??????(3/16/06):  This is not a complaint, and I really don't want to give any more information at this point, but I need one question answered. I have a pair of 5A's, love them. What piece of equipment does a dealer need to use to properly set up a pair of 5A's, to properly set the bass, etc.? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO ?????, THE PROPER EQUIPMENT IS A RADIO SHACK ANALOG SPL METER AND A TEST DISC WITH WARBLE TONES. USING A REAL TIME ANALYZER AS THE INSTRUCTIONS SAY IS UNSATISFACTORY. ALL 5 & 5A ARE TO BE SET UP BY THE DEALER AND TO MY KNOWLEDGE I HAVE TRAINED ALL WHO HAVE SOLD THEM. IF YOU KNOW DIFFERENT I WOULD LIKE TO KNOW!

Larry (3/16/06):  Hi I have a pair of Model 2's (I bought them in about 1979) You've done some work on them over the years to keep them in good repair  Now, I think I've blown a woofer on one. Do I have to ship one or both speakers back? Can I just remove the raw speaker and send it in to save shipping, or can it be reckoned locally (in Houston) and maintain anything like balance?  Thanks for a wonderful sound

Answer: HELLO LARRY, READ THE INSTRUCTIONS UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE ON HOW TO REMOVE THE PART THAT NEEDS REBUILDING, IF YOU LIKE.

Jacques (3/16/06):  Jacques (3/17/06): Is it correct that there is no input for RCA cables on the Quatro? If it was the case that there was such an input at the  speaker end, I could have utilized the high-pass facility on my NAD Masters Series M3 integrated amp. I was informed by the distributor that I will have to buy a filter, so that the low frequencies may be filtered at the speaker end. Does the speaker not have such an internal facility? Is there no way I can still employ the high pass facility on my amp, feeding the internal amp in the speaker directly by means of RCA cable?

Answer: HELLO JACQUES, FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE OWNERS MANUAL. THEY ARE THE ONLY WAY TO USE THE QUATRO'S. I WOULD NOT SECOND GUESS YOUR DEALER HE IS GIVING YOU GOOD INFO, IF YOU WOULD ONLY BELIEVE HIM.

Randall (3/16/06): Hello Richard! I have a pair of 2C's that I have enjoyed a lot. What would be the best upgrade path to improve these to 5.1 for movies? should I continue to use the older 2C's for front speakers and fill in the other spots? Or should I buy a new front pair of 2CE's and move the older ones to the rear?   

Answer: HELLO RANDALL, YOUR 2C'S CAN BE USED FOR FRONT SPEAKERS. THE MAIN BURDEN IN HT IS ONE THE CENTER, SO USE THE MONEY SAVED ON A VCC-5. NOT MUCH INFORMATION IS IN THE FRONTS EXCEPT BASS AND THE MANDATORY SUB'S WILL HANDLE THAT. YOU COULD THEN USE VSM-1'S MOUNTED 18" ABOVE EAR HEIGHT FOR REAR CHANNEL. PERUSE THE QUESTIONS ON THIS WEB SITE FOR A WEALTH OF INFORMATION AND DON'T FORGET TO AVAIL YOURSELF OF THE DEALERS KNOWLEDGE

Mark (3/17/06): Hi,  Can the 3A Sigs be driven to concert hall levels in a small room (12' x 13' x 8') with Cary 805C AE amps? These are nominal 50 watt SET triode amps.

Answer: HELLO MARK, THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW IS TO GO TO YOUR DEALER WITH THE AMPLIFIERS, HOOK THEM UP AND PLAY SOME OF YOUR OWN MUSIC. IF WITH THE VOLUME HALF WAY UP THE LEVELS ARE ADEQUATE YOUR IN GOOD SHAPE. DON'T WORRY ABOUT THE ROOM SIZE DIFFERENCE UNLESS IT IS MUCH LARGER. THIS QUESTION CAN NOT BE HONESTLY ANSWERED WITHOUT THE EXPERIMENT OR BY LOOKING AT SPECS.

John (3/19/06):I am disappointed in the physical connection provided by the standard IEC power plug and by amplifier speaker cable connections. Neutrik powercon power connections and speakon speaker connections look impressive. Any opinion on these compared to IEC and spade connections?

Answer: HELLO JOHN, I'M SORRY YOU ARE DISAPPOINTED ABOUT MY CHOICE OF CONNECTORS ON OUR SPEAKERS. WE HAVE TESTED MANY CONNECTORS INCLUDING THE SPEAKON BUT I HAVE TO ADMIT THAT LOOKS HAD NOTHING TO DO WITH THE TEST. AS STATED IN AN EARLIER RESPONSE, RING TERMINALS WITH A BINDER HEAD SCREW WAS EQUAL TO THE BEST IN THE SHORT TERM AND MUCH BETTER THAN ANY CONNECTOR AFTER ONE YEAR SONICALLY. THE IEC WAS USED JUST BECAUSE IT WORKS AND IT IS READILY AVAILABLE.

Ron (3/20/06): Hi Richard. Two questions, 1 - Have you stopped production of the vcc-1 in favor of the vcc-2? What will be the cost of the vcc-2?  2 - You previously said it is important I use a sub. Until I have the funds available what can I do to protect the 2ci's you recently repaired? My speakers are now set at large,  small, small, none. Would it help to use large, large, small, none until I purchase a sub?

Answer: HELLO RON, THE VCC-1 REMAINS IN PRODUCTION. THE VCC-2 IS FOR HANGING ON A WALL UNDER A PLASMA TV. IT COULD WORK WITH OUR OTHER SPEAKERS AS LONG AS IT'S ON WALL MOUNTING WORKS FOR THE INSTALLATION. THE VCC-2 IS 36" WIDE, 9.5" HIGH, AND 5" DEEP (THE SAME AS OUR VSM-1) THE PRICE WILL BE $1295.00. YOU SHOULD INVEST IN A SUB BEFORE THE CENTER CHANNEL BECAUSE IF YOU SET THE SPEAKERS TO SMALL THERE WILL BE NO BASS AT ALL. THIS WILL HOWEVER PROTECT THE 2CI'S BUT WON'T BE MUCH FUN ON MOVIES.

Stan (3/21/06): Hi - I read this column with avid interest - I thank you even if some of this material doesn't pertain to my setup. I have a new pair of  5A's, powered by Ayre equipment. My question has to do with what speaker cables to use. I know that termination is critical with special spades. Perhaps you can tell me 2 or 3 manufacturers that you have come across whose products work well with your speakers - just to give a base line of consideration? Thanks

Answer: HELLO STAN, MAKE AN APPOINTMENT WITH YOU MODEL 5A DEALER, BRING SOME OF YOUR OWN MUSIC AND HAVE A LISTENING SESSION. GIVE THE DEALER TIME TO KNOW YOUR TASTE IN SOUND. AFTER HE KNOWS YOUR TASTE INVITE HIM TO YOUR LISTENING ROOM SO HE CAN GET A FEEL FOR THE SOUND OF YOUR ROOM. AFTER THIS HE AND YOU WILL BE THE ONLY PEOPLE THAT HAVE THE INFORMATION TO MAKE A SUGGESTION. FIND THE WIRE THAT ADJUSTS THE SOUND OF THE 5A'S TO FIT YOUR ROOM AND TASTE. ANYBODY MAKING A RECOMMENDATION WITHOUT THIS PROCESS WILL ALMOST ALWAYS RESULT IN A WRONG PURCHASE. MAKE THE STUFF DO WHAT YOU WANT IT TO DO IN YOUR HOME!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Greg (3/21/06): Can you make a 2wq xover in a set of Kimber Silver Streak interconnects? I would supply the cables. I want to decrease the number of connections, the Kimbers have locking RCA plugs. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO GREG, THAT WOULD BE A GOOD IDEA BUT NOT PRACTICAL FOR US. ASK THE TECH AT YOUR DEALER IF HE COULD FABRICATE THIS FOR YOU OR RECOMMEND SOMEONE WHO WILL. IT MAY BE VERY INCONVENIENT FOR THE SMALL IF ANY IMPROVEMENT.

Miguel (3/21/06): Hi Richard ! Thank you for your patience on keeping this 'forum' open. I plan to build a multi-channel audio system on a dedicated room (which will double as HT), and was planning to have the 3 front speakers the same (Vans Quatro) do you see any inconvenient in this ? Would I be better of using the VCC-5 ? And for the rears, keeping the music perspective rather than the HT one, should I go for the 1C or the VSM ?  There is an huge difference in prices between the USA and Portugal, $7000 vs almost $12000 in Portugal. This difference is much higher than the costs with VAT, transport costs and duties. Is there any  particular reason for this ? Thank you and best rgs.

Answer: HELLO MIGUEL, I WOULD RECOMMEND THE VCC-5. THE QUATRO IS PRODUCED IN PAIRS ONLY BECAUSE OF THE VERY FINE MATCHING TO EACH OTHER. VSM-1'S FOR THE REAR WITH A PAIR OF 2WQ'S FOR FULL RANGE OPERATION. THE MONEY YOU SAVE ON THE CENTER WILL BE BETTER SPENT ON MAKING THE REAR CHANNEL FULL RANGE. AS FAR AS THE COST DIFFERENCE IS CONCERNED YOU FORGOT THE IMPORTER. MANY USA COMPANIES RAISE THE US PRICE IN ORDER TO PAY THE IMPORTER AND KEEP THE DIFFERENCE SMALLER. WE HAVE TOO SMALL A MARGIN IN THE USA TO ABSORB THE DISTRIBUTOR'S COST. ALL THE EQUIPMENT IN YOUR PROPOSED SYSTEM ADDS UP TO A NICE SIZED ORDER. YOU MIGHT TRY NEGOTIATING A FULL SYSTEM ONE TIME PRICE WITH YOUR DISTRIBUTOR.

Phil (3/22/06): I just purchased two used 2Wq subwoofers (serial numbers 14022 and 14227) and M5-HPB balanced high-pass crossovers (I can’t find a serial  number or manufacturing date on the crossovers). I’ve ordered four  Cardas XLR/RCA adapters so I can use the balanced high-pass crossovers with my single-ended preamplifier, interconnects, and amplifiers. My questions are:  (1) Although I’ve already ordered the XLR/RCA adapters, I’d prefer not to use them. Can the Vandersteen factory replace the XLR connectors on the high-pass crossovers with RCAs? If so, what would the cost be?  (2) My mono-block tube amplifiers have an input impedance of 130k. The instruction sheet for using the M5-HP crossover with 2W series subwoofers says to start with switches 1,3, 7, and 10 ON for a balanced crossover or switch 4 ON for a single-ended crossover. Since I’m using a balanced crossover with singled-ended components and  interconnects, which instructions should I follow?  (3) Are there any available updates to the subwoofers or high-pass crossovers? If so, what would the cost be? Thanks, Richard!

Answer: HELLO PHIL, USING ADAPTERS ON A BALANCED HP5B WILL NOT WORK CORRECTLY. I'M SORRY TO SAY THE MP5B CAN NOT BE MODIFIED TO SINGLE ENDED. THE TWO USE COMPLETELY DIFFERENT CIRCUIT BOARDS. THE CHART ASSUMES YOU HAVE THE BALANCED OR THE SINGLE ENDED HP5'S. WE USE THE SAME 2WQ CHEAT SHEET FOR BOTH UNITS. THERE ARE NO UPDATES AVAILABLE FOR EITHER UNIT. THERE HAVE BEEN RUNNING CHANGES IN BOTH OVER THE YEARS BUT UPDATES WOULD BE PROHIBITIVE.

Stuart (3/22/06): This is just a suggestion from Stuart:  In setting up 2w or 2wq subwoofers, the user has to select the proper crossover capacitor to use between the pre-amp and power amp. If one knows the input impedance of the power amp, this can be calculated using c= 1/(2*PI*R*80) where R is the input resistance of the power amp and PI=3.14.  Unfortunately, the input resistance of the power amp is often not published, or even if published, the published value is often not accurate. The input resistance of the amp cannot be easily measured  (a multi-meter will not work). An an alternative to determining the right capacitor I suggest the following:  1. Wire the subwoofer and main speakers to separate speaker outputs on  the amplifier.  2. Download and burn a test tone cd containing an 80Hz test tone ( available from http://www.realtraps.com/test-cd.htm ) 3. Play the cd alternating between the main speakers and subwoofer.  4. If the proper capacitor is chosen (with the sensitivity/db pot in  the back of the subwoofer properly set), the main speakers and subwoofer will each have the same loudness. You could use a dB meter to determine loudness, but the ear is really sufficiently accurate.

Answer: HELLO STUART, THANKS FOR THE SUGGESTION. THE MOST IMPORTANT PART IN THE SET UP IS GETTING THE 3DB DOWN POINT OF THE CUSTOMERS (MAIN) AMPLIFIER. THIS SUGGESTION IS MORE ACCURATE. TAKE ANY DIGITAL VOLTMETER SET TO AC VOLTS. WITH THE MAIN AMPLIFIER PROPERLY HOOKED UP TO THE MAIN SPEAKERS, VOLT METER ACROSS THE BLACK AND RED OUTPUT TERMINALS. PLAY A TEST DISK WITH TEST TONE AT 1000HZ ADJUST THE PREAMP VOLUME FOR EXACTLY 1 VOLT. PLAY THE 80HZ TRACK AND THE VOLTAGE SHOULD BE .707 VOLTS. IF IT IS HIGHER THAN .707 ADJUST THE WX-2 TOO A HIGHER IMPEDANCE SETTING. IF THE VOLTAGE IS LESS THAN .707 ADJUST THE WX-2 TOO A LOWER IMPEDANCE SETTING. ACCURACY OF THE EXACT X-OVER FREQUENCY IS NOT AS CRITICAL WITH THE 2WQ AS WITH THE 5'S AND QUATRO'S WHICH NEED TO BE RIGHT ON.

Phil (3/23/06): Richard, Thanks for your previous response to my questions on the used 2Wq subwoofers and M5-HPB crossovers that I purchased last weekend. You said the Cardas XLR/RCA adapters that I have on order will not work correctly with the balanced M5-HP crossovers. For best sound quality, should I purchase single-ended fixed value crossovers or single-ended M5-HP crossovers? In either case, I'll use the method you describe in your 3/22/06 response to Stuart to determine the impedance. Thanks again!

Answer: HELLO PHIL, THE SINGLE ENDED M5-HP WILL BE MUCH MORE TRANSPARENT THAN THE X-2. THE OTHER ADVANTAGE WILL BE IF YOU CHANGE AMPLIFIERS IN THE FUTURE IT IS ADJUSTABLE TO ANY AMP IMPEDANCE.

Marc (3/23/06): What are the best banana plugs to use when bi-wiring Vandersteen speakers?

Answer: HELLO MARC, I'M NOT SURE WHAT IS AVAILABLE TODAY, YOU SHOULD CHECK WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER. IN THE PAST WBT MADE GOOD SOUNDING BANANA PLUGS.

Fernando (3/23/06): Richard, when are you going to put up technical information about the VCC-2 on the website? The only info I can find is the $1295 price on the retail price list. I'm interested in one for my home theater. Thanks for keeping this question-and-answer list going.

Answer: HELLO FERNANDO, CHECK OUT RON'S QUESTION ON 3-20-06. WE WILL PUT THE INFORMATION ON THE WEB WHEN THE PRODUCT IS AVAILABLE. THE VCC-2 WILL BE A 3-WAY DESIGN LIKE THE VCC-5 BUT NOT ALL OUT FOR LESS MONEY.

Ertel (3/24/06): I have enjoyed my 1Cs for several years and a pair of 1Bs before that. My question concerns interpreting the graph in the manual for setting the proper tilt based on listening height and distance: specifically, how should the listening distance be measured from the base of the speaker, the front edge of the top of the speaker, or the acoustical center in the middle? Since the speakers tilt back, the point chosen can change the position of my listening chair, and the position of my ears, by up to to six inches, with varying effects on the sound. My current numbers are 37in. ear height, a 1.5 inch tilt, which fits with a 9 foot listening distance, according to the graph. I have total flexibility in moving my listening seat back and forth and realize my ears are ultimately the best guide for deciding exactly how far back to put the seat. My perception is that measuring the recommended nine feet from the acoustical center puts me too close with this particular tilt -- the  highs seems more prominent but at the cost of a midrange suck out and a poorer sense of depth and solidity. So I measure from the base of the speaker to the base of my couch, and then add the depth of the couch cushion, which moves my ears back five or six inches, which seems better. Still, I sometimes think the closer position is more accurate and that any anomalies could be from room effects (although the room is extremely large). So before I experiment any more, I thought I'd ask: in using the manual's tilt graph as a guide, from where on the speaker is listening distance measured? Thanks, and may I say how much  I appreciate your taking the time to answer these questions. This forum is a treasure trove of helpful information.

Answer: HELLO ERTEL, THE INSTRUCTIONS ASSUME YOU ARE STARTING WITH THE SPEAKER STRAIGHT UP (NO TILT) MEASURED AT THE FRONT EDGE IN THE MIDDLE UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE REMEMBER THERE IS A PLUS MINUS THREE INCH WINDOW ESPECIALLY WHEN NINE FEET AWAY OR MORE. THE WINDOW IS PROGRESSIVELY SMALLER THE CLOSER YOU GET TO THE SPEAKER.

Gunner (3/24/06): I own a pair of Vandersteen 2Ce's and would like to know if you sell a  Signature upgrade kit for us diy'ers?

Answer: HELLO GUNNER, THERE IS NO KIT AVAILABLE BECAUSE IT INVOLVES WOODWORK AND P.C. BOARD WORK. THIS UP-GRADE ONLY WORKS ON APX 200 PAIRS OF 2CE'S(SN#77000 AND ABOVE) SO THE COST OF DOCUMENTING IT AND DEVELOPING A KIT IS NOT COST EFFECTIVE. NOT BEING COST EFFECTIVE IS NOT WHAT WE ARE KNOWN FOR AND I WOULD LIKE TO KEEP IT THAT WAY.

Brett (3/25/06): I'm trying to determine if a used sub on e-bay is the V2W or the 2WQ.  The isn # (serial #?)is-100750001621. Any info. is greatly appreciated.> Best Regards,  (Vandersteen owner/fan since 1980).

Answer: HELLO BRETT, IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO ID A 2WQ OR V2W BY THE SN#. THE AMPLIFIER ON THE 2WQ HAS BANANA INPUTS( SPEAKER LEVEL) AND THE V2W HAS RCA INPUTS. THE SERIAL NUMBERS ARE NOT NEEDED AND IT DOES NOT TAKE A GENIUS TO NOTICE THE DIFFERENT TYPES OF INPUT CONNECTORS.

Ron (3/25/06): Richard, I just purchased your VCC-1 to go with my 2CI's. The VCC-1 calls for spades. I can not find any where in the literature the size spade to use, 1/4 or 3/8? Thanks for a great product.

Answer: HELLO RON, TURN THE VCC-1 AROUND AND MEASURE THEM IN A WAY YOUR WIRE COMPANY UNDERSTANDS. I DO NOT KNOW HOW ALL THE DIFFERENT WIRE COMPANY'S WOULD DESCRIBE OR SIZE A SUITABLE SPADE.

Tim (3/25/06): Hi ,Is the 1c tube friendly ? Thanks

Answer: HELLO TIM, ALL OF OUR SPEAKERS ARE DESIGNED TO BE USED SUCCESSFULLY WITH EITHER TUBE OR SOLID STATE AMPLIFIERS. THEY ARE DIFFERENT AND YOU NEED TO DETERMINE WITH AN AUDITION WHICH ONE FLOATS YOUR BOAT.

Joe (3/25/06): Joe- I am interested in upgrading from a VCC-1 Sig. to a VCC-5 center channel. I was wondering how much weight would the speaker safely support. I have a Sony Wega rear projection LCD that weighs 94 lbs. and wanted to place it on top of the speaker, if possible. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JOE, SETTING THE WEGA ON TOP OF THE VCC-5 IS NO PROBLEM.

Jonas (3/25/06): Thanks so much for continuing to operate this forum.  It's terrifically informative and helpful. I have a pair of 5As and read somewhere that the minimum distance from listener to speaker to preserve phase integrity for the 5As is 9 feet. Is that right? What is the minimum distance you would recommend?

Answer: HELLO JONAS, IF YOU READ 9 FEET IN THE OWNERS 5A MANUAL THAT WOULD BE CORRECT. I DO THIS AT HOME AND DO NOT HAVE THE MANUAL COMMITTED TO MEMORY. CHECK OUT THE CHART IN THE MANUAL FOR THE SHORTEST DISTANCE. I WOULD NOT HAVE A DISTANCE ON THE CHART THAT WOULD NOT "PRESERVE PHASE INTEGRITY".

David (3/27/06): I have read your FAQ on bi-wiring. My A/V Receiver, Arcam AVR300, a 7.1 unit, allows you to configure the LSB/RSB amplifier outputs to  bi-amp the LF/RF speakers, in a 5.1 system, as follows:  RSB amp ----> RF - HF drivers FR amp -----> RF - LF drivers LSB amp ----> LF - HF drivers FL amp -----> LF - LF drivers My LF/RF will be 2Ce Signatures, Subwoofer V2W. Is this possible with the 2Ce Signatures? Is bi-amping preferable to bi-wiring? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, WE DO NOT RECOMMEND BI-AMPING BECAUSE MANY SOLID STATE AMPLIFIERS BECOME UNSTABLE WITH THE CAPACITIVE LOAD REFLECTED BY THE MID-TWEETER SECTION.  WE DO HOWEVER RECOMMEND BI-WIRING IN THE 2CE SIGNATURE OWNERS MANUAL.

Richard (3/27/06): Richard. Just bought my first pair of Vandersteen's from Pearl Audio and Video in Portland, OR and I want you to know that they do a great job of demoing and selling your product. And what a product it is.  This is my first foray into what I consider expensive speakers, and I  can see using these for 20 years. My room is about 24 feet long and 16 feet wide, but with one long side open to a completely other room. I have the speakers on the short wall aimed along the long axis (with the open second room on the listener right). Simple question that I didn't see addressed in the manual- what distance do you recommend for  separating the speakers? Is there an optimum distance between them?  Come on up to Portland some time!

Answer: HELLO RICHARD, THE ONLY WAY IS TO EXPERIMENT OVER TIME AND FOLLOW YOUR EAR. THERE IS NOT A RECOMMENDED DISTANCE PER SAY ONLY WHAT WORKS IN THE ROOM. THE DAY YOU FIND THE BEST POSITION YOUR EARS WILL LET YOU KNOW.

Dave (3/27/06): I inherited a pair of 2s (serial #8324? and 8325?) and am longing to hear the legendary quality I know to be Vandersteen sound. BUT - I need help setting them up. Was told that I will need a passive crossover to run the sound. Does this depend on the kind of amp I use? Can you give me an example-amp/receiver to setup? If I use the Pioneer av receiver I currently have the low end rattles sumthin' fierce. thanks!

Answer: HELLO DAVE, YOUR 2C ARE PROBABLY IN NEED OF REPAIR. THE RATTLES SUMTHIN' FIERCE IS PROBABLY ONE OR TWO DRIVERS DAMAGED SUMTHIN FIERCE IN THE LAST TWENTY FIVE OF THEIR LIFE. NO PASSIVE X-OVER IS NEEDED JUST HOOK UP THE WIRES AND HIT PLAY AFTER THEY ARE REPAIRED. GO TO CUSTOMER SERVICE AND DOWN LOAD THE RA FORM AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS. YOU SHOULD ASK FOR AN INSTRUCTION MANUAL WHILE YOU ARE AT IT.

Ryan (3/29/06): I've got a pair of 1C's; they're black cloth w/ oak trim. I've seen pictures of other cloth colors (beige and grey) and other trim colors (black). Is it possible to change trim options on my speakers?  If so, how much would it cost to replace both the cloth and oak trim to a different color combination?  Would I need to mail the speakers to the factory, or can I replace these parts myself? Thanks

Answer: HELLO RYAN, WE HAVE BLACK AND BEIGE CLOTH. BLACK, WALNUT, CHERRY, MAPLE AND OAK WOOD TRIM ARE AVAILABLE. THEY MUST BE CHANGED AT THE FACTORY AND THE COST $280.00 PLUS FREIGHT. THIS IS APPROXIMATE COST YOU WILL NEED TO CALL THE FACTORY FOR EXACT NUMBERS.

Jonas (3/30/06): Thanks for answering my question from 3/25 about minimum listening distance for the 5a's. I had actually seen the 9 foot number in the Audio Perfectionist Journal review on your website. I don't have the manual for the 5a's accessible right now (we are moving), but I think  it showed 8 feet as the minimum distance. I am writing this note, to let you know as I would hate to be the cause of incorrect information being on your site. Thanks again for the incredible products and equally incredible dedication you have to your customer's experience. Cheers,

Answer: HELLO JONAS, WE HAVE REPRINTS FROM MANY SOURCES ON OUR WEB SITE FOR OUR CUSTOMERS CONVENIENCE. THEIR EXISTENCE DOES NOT MEAN I HAVE ENDORSED THEM OR EVEN READ THEM. INFORMATION IN THEM SHOULD NEVER OVERRIDE INFORMATION IN THE OWNERS MANUAL.

Satish (3/30/06): I am Satish, a prospective customer of 2Ce Signature or 3A Signature speaker system. Being an electronic engineer and an audiophile I feel  that the loudspeaker is the weakest link in a system. I have been searching for a good sounding loudspeaker with a sensible price, coupled with good customer service. Most Hi-End loudspeaker manufacturers beef up the price of their loudspeakers by claiming their excellent cabinet work, and the exotic materials used, which I feel have no direct impact on the quality of sound produced. I find that the Vandersteen's are one of the most sensible Hi-End loudspeakers. But before buying I have a few questions, to which I hope to get prompt answers.  Do the drivers used in 2Ce Signature and 3A  Signature speaker systems use under hung voice coils (ie. short coil in long magnetic gap)? I have heard the ATC SCM 20SL speakers which have under hung voice coils; they have very low distortion and are more  linear. Are Copper Pole Sleeves used in the drivers of  2Ce Signature and 3A Signature speaker systems to reduce distortion by producing a more stable magnetic field by canceling the changes in the magnetic field strength caused by the amplifiers current?  Do 2Ce Signature and 3A Signature speaker systems sound better with Class-A amplifiers?  Looking forward for an early response. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO SATISH, FIRST OF ALL THE 2CE SIGNATURES AND THE 3A SIGNATURES USE COMPLETELY DIFFERENT DRIVERS. THERE ARE OTHER WAYS TO GET LINEAR RESPONSE OTHER THAN UNDER-HUNG VOICE COILS. WE USE A DIFFERENT MAGNET SYSTEM TO ACCOMPLISH THE SAME INDUCTANCE LINEARITY ON X-MAX AND MIN. THE RESULT IS THE SAME BUT WITH BETTER VOICE COIL COOLING AND POWER HANDLING. COPPER POLE SLEEVES ARE USED ON SOME OF THE DRIVERS WHEN THE RESULT IS POSITIVE. ONE NEEDS TO BE CAREFUL BECAUSE THE COPPER CAUSES THE GAP TO BE WIDER THEREFORE LOWERING B.L. (MAGNETIC ENERGY IN THE GAP). SOUND LIKE YOU HAVE BEEN READING THE PROMO MATERIAL CAREFULLY. I HAVE HEARD CLASS A AMPLIFIERS SOUND GOOD AND SO SO, IT IS NO GUARANTEE OF GOOD SOUND. FORGET THE SPECS AND BUY THE CLASS Z IF IT MAKES THE BEST SOUND, LET YOUR EARS BE YOUR GUIDE.

David (3/30/06): What advantage is there with a subwoofer (2Wq) with 3x8" drivers compared to a subwoofer say with 1x12" or 15" driver?

Answer: HELLO DAVID, WE USE MULTIPLE SMALL DRIVERS ADDING UP TO THE SAME CONE AREA AS ONE 14" WOOFER BUT WITH MUCH IMPROVED CONTROL OF THE CONE. SUB WOOFERS HAVE A BAD REPUTATION FOR AFFECTING THE MID-RANGE NEGATIVELY. WE KNOW THAT IS BECAUSE THE CONE EXPERIENCES BREAK-UP MODES AT MID-RANGE FREQUENCY'S THIS INTERFERES WITH THE SOUND FIELD AND SCREWS UP THE SOUND STAGE. THE LACK OF SPURIOUS ENERGY IN 8" WOOFERS MAKES THEM SOUND FASTER. THIS WILL BE AUDIBLE IN A DEMO IN SHORT ORDER AND YOU WILL NOTICE THE LACK OF OVERHANG. BASS WILL BE PONDEROUS MAKING THE LOCATION OF THE 15" SUB-WOOFER OBVIOUS. WITH THE 2WQ OR V2W THE BASS IS JUST THERE.

Dan (4/01/06) Dan from California. Richard what is a slot loaded second order driver? Who builds your drivers for your subwoofers? I can not find any that go much below 25 hertz in either 6.5 inch or 8 inch sizes.  Is it possible to buy your circuitry for your subwoofers sans enclosure and amp ? Thanking You in Advance.

Answer: HELLO DAN, ALL SEALED ENCLOSURES THAT ARE PROPERLY DESIGNED ARE SECOND ORDER (ROLL OFF AT 12 DB PER OCTAVE). SUB-WOOFERS MOVE A LOT OF AIR WITH LONG EXCURSION. A SIDE EFFECT OF THIS OPERATION IS NON LINEAR DISTORTION FROM THE MOVING COMPONENTS (SURROUND AND SPIDER) IN THE MID FREQUENCIES EVEN IF USING HIGH ORDER FILTERS (WHICH WE DO NOT). IN ORDER TO ATTENUATE THESE AND ALLOW A BETTER IMPEDANCE TRANSFER TO THE ROOM WE SLOT LOAD THE FRONT OF THE DRIVERS. OUR DRIVERS ARE MADE BY SEVERAL MANUFACTURES USING OUR OUR OWN PROPRIETARY BASKETS, CONES, AND DOMES ON MANY. O MANUFACTURE OUR OWN DRIVERS WOULD MAKE THEM NEEDLESSLY EXPENSIVE UNLESS WE WERE MAKING A LOT OF THEM FOR SALE TO OTHER SPEAKER COMPANY'S. I AM NOT INTERESTED IN THAT, I HAVE MY HANDS FULL DOING WHAT NEEDS TO BE DONE ALREADY. THE ADVANTAGE OF MAKING A LOT OF SUB-WOOFERS IS YOU CAN DESIGN CUSTOM DRIVERS TO MEET WHATEVER SPECIFICATIONS IS NEEDED. WE DO NOT SELL COMPONENTS BUT REMEMBER A STATE OF THE ART SUB-WOOFER REQUIRES THE WHOLE SYSTEM TO BE INTEGRATED. THE ENCLOSURE, AMPLIFIER, X-OVER, AND DRIVERS ALL NEED TO BE DESIGNED AS ONE, CHANGE ANY ONE OF THEM AND THE SYSTEM WONT WORK SATISFACTORY.

Rodney (4/02/06) on 1/15/06 Ned wrote you, "I own a pair of Vandersteen 2Ce's that are ten years old. Can I drive these with a 4 ohm Amp? And if I do, what are pro's & con's over driving them with 8 ohms?" I own ten year old pair of model 1(1bs?) and love them (they have spent eight of those years stored in their factory cartons). Recently I purchased a second GTA SE-40 tube amp and mono'd them (80wpc +  80wpc), in strapped configuration. The amps are not mod'ed. In so doing, the sound stage changed. According to GTAs owner's manual, 8hms will drop to 4ohms, and that's what happened. I lost base and some highs in the overall sound stage. Consequently, my question runs along the lines of Ned's question. You answered him, saying, "HELLO NED ... THE ONLY EXCEPTION WOULD BE  TUBE AMPLIFIERS AND THIS IS IMPEDANCE MATCHING FOR BETTER POWER TRANSFER, AGAIN MY EXPERIENCE IS THAT MOST TUBE AMPS WILL WORK ON 4 OR 8 OHMS BUT WILL SOUND DIFFERENT. LISTEN TO BOTH AND LEAVE IT HOOKED UP TO THE BEST SOUNDING ONE. SOME LOUDSPEAKER DESIGNERS ALLOW FOR VERY LOW IMPEDANCE, MY EXPERIENCE  IS THERE IS NO REASON FOR THIS AND HAVING AN EASY LOAD WILL MAKE ANY  AMP SOUND BETTER."  The SE-40s are the tube exception. When considering electronics, I am not experienced but have a few ideas and do not wish to proceed without asking an expert. My question to you is, what would you recommend to improve/restore the sound stage for my Model 1s? Are their crossover adjustment/upgrades? and/or speaker upgrades for the model 1? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO RODNEY, YOUR 1B'S CHARACTER SHOULD NOT HAVE CHANGED. I CAN ONLY ASSUME YOUR AMPLIFIERS DO NOT SOUND AS GOOD WHEN THEY ARE STRAPPED MONO. ALTHOUGH THEY ARE MORE POWERFUL STRAPPED THE FIDELITY HAS DETERIORATED. I WOULD GO BACK TO THE SETUP YOU HAD BECAUSE IT SOUNDED BETTER. SOME TUBE AMPS GET MORE POWERFUL AND BETTER SOUNDING WHEN STRAPPED, SOME DON'T. THERE ARE NO UP-GRADES AVAILABLE FOR THE OLD 1B'S.

Jim (4/03/06): HI, THIS IS JIM I HAVE BEEN ENJOYING A 2WQ FOR A FEW WEEKS NOW, AND IT SOUNDS GREAT. I GOT THE ULTIMATE APPROVAL WHEN MY WIFE SAID... THIS ONE MAKES THE OLD ONE SOUND LIKE A P.O.S. THANK YOU. I HOPE YOU PLAN ON MAKING THE 2WQ FOR AWHILE SO WE CAN EXPERIENCE STEREO SUBS IN THE NOT TO DISTANT FUTURE. AND CAN I PURCHASE THE FIXED CAPS DIRECT FROM YOU? THE MAIL IS  MUCH BETTER THAN DRIVING WAY ACROSS TOWN.

Answer: HELLO JIM, HAPPY YOU AND YOUR WIFE ARE ENJOYING THE 2WQ. NOT TO WORRY, THE SUB WILL BE IN PRODUCTION FOR MANY MORE YEARS BUT PROBABLY NOT AT THE SAME PRICE. YOU WOULD ORDER THE X-2 FROM YOUR DEALER WHO COULD THEN SHIP THEM TO YOU. WE DO NOT SELL THEM DIRECT

Pradeep (4/04/06) I own a Vandersteen Subwoofer - Model 2Wq. Offlate whenever I switch on the system there is persistent rumble from my subwoofer. Assuming its due to a Ground Loop problem, I had disconnected the subwoofer from the power outlet where it was connected and reconnected to another power outlet. But the problem still persists. I had purchased the 2Wq subwoofer while I was employed in Muscat, Sultanate of Oman. And I have now relocated to Chennai in South India. Pls. note that there are no Vandersteen appointed Service outlets in India.  Please advice.

Answer: HELLO PRADEEP, DISCONNECT THE INPUT WIRES FROM THE 2WQ WITH THE POWER ON. IF THE UNIT CONTINUES TO RUMBLE THE AMPLIFIER NEEDS REPAIR. DOWNLOAD THE RMA FORM, FILL IT OUT AND SEND IT WITH THE AMP TO VANDERSTEEN AUDIO. BE SURE TO PROVIDE US WITH A FAX NUMBER ON THE RMA FORM. DO NOT REMOVE THE PC BOARD, SEND IN THE WHOLE AMPLIFIER MODULE.

David (4/05/06): I have 3A Sigs and 2Wqs in a narrow, long room (12' x 24').  Bass on test tones and music is more distinct forward and below my ear height in my listening position. Does the tilt on the 3As matter or is this a 2Wq issue? Should I move the speakers and the subs forward or backward to get the bass to sound more full?

Answer: HELLO DAVID, TEST TONES CAN BE VERY MISLEADING, FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL AND USE A RECORDING OF A GOOD STAND UP BASS. SPEAKER TILT HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH BASS. WHETHER FORWARD OR BACK IF I KNEW HOW TO ANSWER THAT QUESTION I WOULD WRITE A BOOK, FIX LINCOLN CENTER AND BE VERY RICH. THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW IS TRIAL AND ERROR.

Mike (4/06/06): What is the Quatro's maximum spl level?

Answer: HELLO MIKE, ASSUMING YOU HAVE A LARGE ENOUGH AMPLIFIER THE QUATRO WILL PLAY MUSIC WITH A NORMAL DUTY CYCLE AND FREQUENCY BALANCE AT 108DB ONE METER. THAT IS A SIMPLE ANSWER TO A DIFFICULT QUESTION. THE PLAYBACK LEVELS AT THE LISTENING POSITION DEPENDS ON HOW FAR AWAY, HOW LARGE THE ROOM IS, AND WHAT METER IS USED. THE RADIO SHACK SPL METER "C" WEIGHTING "FAST RESPONSE" WILL NOT GIVE YOU AN ACCURATE READING BECAUSE THE NEEDLE HAS SOME MASS. THE METER READING WILL BE LOWER THAN THE ACTUAL NUMBER BY ABOUT 3DB. FOR SHORT TERM TRANSIENTS THE SPEAKER IS CAPABLE OF 115DB PEAKS. THIS ALL ASSUMES A 200 WATT AMPLIFIER. THE LEVELS ON HIGH DENSITY COMPRESSED MUSIC WILL BE LOWER. ONE THING IS FOR SURE THEY ARE CAPABLE OF LEVELS ONE SHOULD NOT LISTEN TOO VERY LONG IF HE OR SHE INTENDS TO ENJOY THIS HOBBY FOR MANY YEARS.

Mark (4/08/06): What are the cloth color options available for the Quatro? Also, if the external crossover is needed for the speaker to perform to spec, why is it priced separately (in other words, why is it not included in the base price of the speaker)? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO MARK, THE GRILLE OPTIONS FOR ALL OF OUR PRODUCTS ARE BLACK AND BEIGE. MANY CUSTOMERS ASK WHY THERE ARE NOT LIGHTER COLORS AVAILABLE (OFF WHITE, LIGHT GRAY ETC.). THE AMOUNT OF AIR MOVED BY THE MID-RANGE AND THE WOOFER WOULD SURPRISE YOU, THIS RESULTS IN A DISCOLORATION IN THE GRILLE AROUND THE DRIVERS THAT WILL NOT VACUUM OFF. WITHIN ONE YEAR IT BECOMES UNSIGHTLY AND WOULD REQUIRE REPLACEMENT. THE HIGH PASS FILTER IS OPTIONAL BECAUSE SOME WILL REQUIRE A SINGLE ENDED ONE, SOME A BALANCED, AND SOME NONE BECAUSE THEIR PROCESSOR/PREAMP INCLUDES ONE (B&K, THETA). SOON AESTHETIX WILL LAUNCH THEIR NEW AMPLIFIER WHICH HAS ONE INTERNALLY (IDEAL).

Knox (4/08/06): If I have a pair of 2Wq subwoofers running under my main speakers. Can I plug in the center channel and/or rear channel signals into the unused inputs on each subwoofer to take advantage of the sub's bass capability for more channels? I assume that I could just purchase additional X-2 high-pass filters for the center and rear channels of amplification. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO KNOX, YOU COULD TAKE A SIGNAL FROM THE CENTER TO BOTH THE WOOFERS WITH A HIGH PASS FILTER (X-2) ON THE INPUT OF THE CENTER CHANNEL AMPLIFIER. UNDERSTAND THIS REQUIRES TWO SEPARATE WIRES FROM THE CENTER CHANNEL AMPLIFIER, ONE TO THE LEFT SUB AND ONE TO THE RIGHT. THIS WILL GIVE YOU A 6DB BOOST IN WOOFER OUTPUT WHICH MOST PEOPLE LIKE FOR MOVIES ANYWAY. WHEN PLAYING TWO CHANNEL MUSIC THE WOOFER OUTPUT WOULD GO BACK TO IT PROPER OUTPUT SET WITH MUSIC DURING SET UP.  I WOULD PLACE ANOTHER 2WQ IN ONE OF THE REAR CORNERS TO GET FULL RANGE FOR LEFT AND RIGHT REAR CHANNEL (FUN).

Chris (4/09/06) I have a Vandersteen Home Theater System One (1C,VCC-1,VSM-1, and V2W) and have been very pleased with it for many years. I recently moved  into a new home and may need to change the front main speakers to something smaller (to make for a more domestically pleasing environment). Are the VLR-1's still available, and if so, what kind of performance could one expect in comparison to the 1C's? Would there be any improvement, since the three front speakers would seem to be more closely matched?  Thanks,

Answer: HELLO CHRIS, THE VLR IS CURRENT PRODUCT. A FREE STANDING FULL RANGE SPEAKER WILL ALWAYS WIN THE PERFORMANCE RACE. BY THE TIME YOU PUT THE VLR'S ON A STAND............... I RECOMMEND YOU USE A PAIR OF VSM-1'S AND HANG THEM ON THE WALL, WOUDN'T SHE LIKE THAT EVEN BETTER AND PERFORMANCE WOULD BE THE SAME. ALL OF OUR PRODUCTS ARE TIME AND PHASE CORRECT AND THEREFORE WILL WORK EQUALLY WELL TOGETHER. READ THROUGH THE FAQ SECTION AND LEARN WHY NOT MATCHING THE THREE SPEAKERS ACROSS THE FRONT IS ACTUALLY BETTER. HOPE YOU ARE ABLE TO ENJOY THEM FOR MANY MORE YEARS.

Sean (4/09/06) I have been using a pair of 2Wq subwoofers for several years with my Quads using a x-2 cross over. My dealer has been recommending a HP-5 in place of the x-2. Do you agree? How much will the sound improve?

Answer: HELLO SEAN, YOU FORGOT TO MENTION WHAT ELECTRONICS YOU ARE USING. I WILL ASSUME WITH QUADS AND TWO 2WQ'S THAT THIS IS A VERY HIGH END SYSTEM. GOING TO THE HP-5'S WILL TRANSFORM YOUR SYSTEM. THE HP-5'S ARE USED WITH THE 5A AND QUATRO SPEAKERS, THEREFORE THEY MUST BE VERY TRANSPARENT AND THEY ARE. THE X-2 IS A UP-GRADE FROM THE EXPERIMENTAL BOX PROVIDED WITH THE 2WQ BUT WAS NEVER INTENDED FOR USE IN A SYSTEM WITH STATE OF THE ART COMPONENTS.

David (4/11/06): Richard I just got a pair of 3,s and they are great!  I just have one question they don't seem to have much bass and I know they should have more and when I turn up the amp(a B & k st-140)the light comes on a very moderate volume level. Does my amp have too much power or is something else possibly wrong. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE B&K 140 IS NOT ENOUGH POWER FOR THE MODEL 3'S. I ALSO SUSPECT THE PROTECTION CIRCUIT AND X-OVER HAS BEEN DAMAGED BECAUSE IT SEEMS TO BE TRIGGERING TO SOON. THE ONLY WAY TO KNOW IS TO SEND THEM TO US FOR A COMPLETE CHECK UP. IT SOUNDS LIKE YOU JUST BOUGHT THEM AND WHO KNOWS WHAT THEY HAVE BEEN THROUGH. YOU COULD CONTINUE TO USE THEM UNTIL YOU DECIDE TO UP-GRADE THEM AT WHICH TIME THEY WOULD GET A THROUGH CHECK.

Stephen (4/11/06) I am the proud owner of a pair of 1c's. I would love to get 2ce's sigs or the 3a's but they are out of my price range. They are also too large. Is there any reason why I would not be able switch out the crossover components (with ones of the same value that are of higher grade)? Any plans of coming out with a 1c signature?!?!  System includes Bryston 3bst amp, Odyssey Tempest Extreme preamp, rega planar 2 and benz mc silver cartridge. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO STEPHEN, THE MODEL 1C'S ALREADY HAVE HIGH QUALITY FILM CAPS AND METAL FILM RESISTORS. I DO NOT HAVE PLANS FOR A SIGNATURE VERSION BECAUSE I DO NOT KNOW HOW TO IMPROVE THEM FOR ANY REASONABLE AMOUNT OF MONEY. THE 1C'S ARE PUSHED ABOUT AS FAR AS A TWO WAY SPEAKER CAN BE SHORT OF MAKING IT A THREE WAY, BUT THEN THEY WOULD LOOK LIKE AND COST LIKE A 2CE SIGNATURE. GLAD TO SEE YOU HAVE A HIGH RESOLUTION SOURCE (VINYL)

Mark (4/12/06) Mark here again. I am getting quite serious about buying a new pair of the Quatros. My question is: do you have a preference between the balanced versus unbalanced crossovers? I have the ability to use either in my set-up.  Currently using single-ended interconnects between preamp and amp but would be willing to switch to balanced if there is some sonic advantage.  Thanks!

Answer: HELLO MARK, CONTACT YOU AMPLIFIER AND PREAMPLIFIER MANUFACTURE AND ASK WHICH THEIR CIRCUITS ARE OPTIMIZED FOR. IN SOME CASES THE PREAMP MAY BE A SINGLE ENDED DESIGN WITH A OUTPUT TRANSFORMER USED TO CREATE BALANCED OUT. IN THIS CASE IT PROBABLY WILL SOUND BEST SINGLE ENDED. SOME OTHER DESIGNS ARE FULLY BALANCED WITH A EXTRA CIRCUIT TO CREATE A SINGLE ENDED OUT PUT, IN THIS CASE BALANCED WOULD SOUND BETTER. YOUR MANUFACTURE WILL KNOW BEST SO ASK THEM. THE QUATRO'S DON'T CARE.

Danny (4/12/06)Hi, I'm interested in purchasing a new pair of 2CE Signatures. I live in Fresno CA. and am much closer to Hanford than Stockton (apparently the closest dealer). Can these speakers be purchased at the factory?

Answer: HELLO DANNY, WE OFFER DIRECT SALES INTO REMOTE AREA'S. THE PRICE IS RETAIL, PLUS SALES TAX, PLUS FREIGHT. ORDERING THEM FROM YOUR NEAREST DEALER WILL SAVE YOU MONEY EVEN IF YOU DO IT BY PHONE BECAUSE AS CLOSE AS YOU ARE THEY WILL ABSORB THE FREIGHT COSTS. NO FACTORY PICK-UPS.

Larry (4/13/06) I have a much loved pair of 1B's that need new socks. Can you recommend someone in the Washington DC area who could do this.  Thank you.

Answer: HELLO LARRY, NOT THAT I WOULD RECOMMEND. THIS IS A DIFFICULT PROCEDURE AND WILL BE EXPENSIVE IN LABOR IF YOU TAKE IT TO A REPAIR SHOP. WE INSTALL NEW GRILLE'S ON THE 1B FOR $50.00 EACH INCLUDING PARTS PLUS FREIGHT. YOU WILL FIND THE FREIGHT WILL BE LESS THAN THE LABOR AND MARK-UP WITH A LOCAL SHOP AND THE WORKMANSHIP WILL BE BETTER AT THE FACTORY.

Ben (4/14/06) I bough a pair of 1B's used. How can I get a soft copy of the 1B (or 1c) manual? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO BEN, SEND $5.00 TO VANDERSTEEN AUDIO AND WE WILL SEND ONE. WE WILL IN THE NEXT YEAR CONVERT OUR MANUALS TO PDF FILES AS WE HAVE TIME AND PUT THEM ON THIS SITE.

Jeff (4/15/06)I have an option to buy a used pair of 3A's, serial numbers 8320 and 8321. Two questions: how old are these speakers, and since I'm replacing my amplifier what do you recommend for power requirements? Thanks again for the delightful sound you've engineered.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, I HAVE NO WAY TO KNOW HOW OLD THESE SPEAKERS ARE. WHEN BUYING USED I MUST CAUTION YOU TO MAKE SURE YOU CAN AUDITION THEM TO BE IN GOOD WORKING ORDER. FREIGHT IS A PROBLEM BECAUSE THE PACKAGING IS NOT CERTIFIED BY UPS. FIND A PAIR WITHIN DRIVING DISTANCE, LISTEN TO THEM, IF YOU LIKE THEM LOAD THEM UP AND TAKE THEM HOME. ON AMPLIFIER CHOICE READ THE POSTS ON THIS SITE.

Gerry (4/16/06) Hi Richard. I own a pair of 1Bs I bought in 1994. I still love the speakers, but one issue I've had with them from day one is high end distortion with piano music. When the musician hits a note on the upper register loudly, I get this crackling noise.  It happens when I play CDs or LPs. Now...I can't afford a real high end amp...I drive them with a 70 watts/channel Nakamichi receiver. The turntable I'm using is an older Akai model with a Grado cartridge and a phono preamp by Pro-Ject. Decent equipment, right? So do you have any ideas about the distortion? I notice on LP records, trumpet solos also create this distortion. Is it the speakers?  Should I adjust the tweeter level? Or is it my equipment...or just a function of the recording quality of these records? Please help! Otherwise, I LOVE these speakers.

Answer: HELLO GERRY, SOUNDS LIKE A NICE LITTLE SYSTEM BUT I QUESTION THE RECEIVER. YOUR DESCRIPTION SOUND LIKE CLASSIC AMPLIFIER CLIPPING. IF THE "CRACKLING NOISE" GOES AWAY WHEN YOU LOWER THE VOLUME THEN I AM SURE THAT IS WHAT IT IS. DISTORTION LIKE YOU DESCRIBE COULD BE CAUSED BY A RUBBING VOICE COIL HOWEVER THE NOISE WOULD CONTINUE EVEN WHEN THE VOLUME IS TURNED DOWN. ADJUSTING THE TWEETER WILL NOT SOLVE THE PROBLEM ONLY TURNING THE VOLUME DOWN WILL. YOU MIGHT CONSIDER A DIFFERENT AMPLIFIER WITH HIGHER CURRENT CAPABILITY NOT NECESSARILY HIGHER POWER. MAYBE YOU COULD BORROW AN AMPLIFIER AND TRY IT OUT.

David (4/17/06) I recently ordered a pair of 2WQ sub woofers. I also paid for 1 X-2 crossover (Value ?). My power amp states the following:  Input Impedance:  Balanced input...............................................................................600 ohms Unbalanced input (depends on position of level controls)..............22 kohms (bridged or stereo)  Based on the above, will the dealer be able to determine the value of  the crossover and match this with my system? Do you need more  information? Thanks for your help.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, IT SOUNDS LIKE YOU ARE USING A AMPLIFIER WITH A VOLUME CONTROL THAT IS NOT BUFFERED. IF YOU ARE THE INPUT IMPEDANCE WILL VARY WITH VOLUME CONTROL SETTING. IF THIS IS THE CASE IT WILL NOT WORK BECAUSE THE CROSS OVER POINT WILL BE MOVING DEPENDING ON VOLUME CONTROL SETTING. NOT GOOD. CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER AND RESOLVE THIS FOR YOU OR THE RESULT WILL BE UNSATISFACTORY. THE 600 OHM BALANCED IS BEYOND THE RANGE OF CROSSOVERS WE MANUFACTURE. THE CAP NECESSARY FOR A IMPEDANCE THAT LOW WOULD BE VERY LARGE. THE BEST SOUNDING CAPS ARE SMALL IN VALUE.

Bill (4/17/06) My dealer says the Model 5 and 5A speakers have batteries on the internal crossover. Is he talking about the 9 volt battery in the HP-5? How would I know when to change them? The battery in the HP-5 has 2004 marked on it.

Answer: HELLO BILL, YOUR DEALER IS CORRECT THERE ARE THREE 9 VOLT BATTERIES ON EACH MODEL 5 OR 5A X-OVER. YOUR OWNERS MANUAL FOR THE 5'S HAVE THE DATE FOR REPLACEMENT WRITTEN INSIDE. THE SAME MANUAL HAS COMPLETE INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO REMOVE THEM FOR SERVICE. IF YOU BOUGHT YOUR M5-HP AT THE SAME TIME AS YOUR SPEAKERS THEN THEY ARE TWO YEARS PAST DUE. YOU SHOULD GET THE BATTERIES REPLACED AS SOON AS POSSIBLE BECAUSE MID AND HIGH FREQUENCY TRANSPARENCY WILL BE VERY REDUCED IF THEY ARE DEAD.

Rob (4/17/06) Hi Richard, All other things being equal, is it better sonically to use the HP-5 crossovers or have the amplifier manufacturer insert the appropriate capacitor into the input circuit of the amplifier to achieve the appropriate roll off when using the Quatro's?  Thanks,

Answer: HELLO ROB, MOST MANUFACTURES WOULD PUT THE CAPS ON THE INPUT. THIS WOULD BE LESS TRANSPARENT BECAUSE THE M5-HP MAINTAINS A BIAS ON THE CAPS 24 HOURS A DAY, 365 DAY PER YEAR. FOR CAPS IN THE AMP TO BE AS TRANSPARENT THEY WOULD NEED TO BE PLACED IN THE CIRCUIT WHERE THERE WOULD BE A BIAS AND THEN LEFT ON 24 HOURS A DAY.

George (4/18/06) Dear Mr Vandersteen  My name is George and I am from Athens, Greece. I have a pair of 1C speakers for almost five years now and they sound wonderful. I have recently purchased  VCC-1 to run as a center speaker at my home theater system. I am thinking to replace my 1C speakers with the 2Ce Signature model. I  read at your site that the model usually run's at 6 to 4 ohm and that you recommend an amplifier that can give a maximum output of 160 watt at 8 ohm. I now run my 1C's with Pioneer AX5-AiS as an audio-video preamplifier and Parasound Halo A-23 as a power amplifier. Parasound gives an output of 125 watt at 8 ohm and it doubles its power at 4 ohm. I want to ask if my current amplification will be enough for the 2ce signature to run properly. Will you recommend any changes at the amplification? I am not used to hear very loud but I don't want my new speakers to sound worse than the 1C because of the amplification part.  Finally, how do I recognize that the 2CE Signature's ARE the 2CE  Signature's and not the old ones (2CE)?  I want to thank you in advance. Please continue building such  wonderful speakers!

Answer: HELLO GEORGE, YOUR PARASOUND A-23 WILL WORK FINE AS FAR AS POWER IS CONCERNED. THE 2CE SIGNATURE'S HAVE A BARRIER STRIP FOR INPUTS AND SAY SIGNATURE ON THE REAR PANEL.

Stan (4/18/06) Richard, my name is Stan. We spoke briefly today regarding applications for your sub in the studio. You mentioned using the VS1 and hanging them on the wall. My question is would a pair of the center channels also work as stand mounted monitors in conjunction with my 2wq sub? Doing so would allow me to toggle back and forth between the Vandersteen system and the Event  powered monitors for comparative mixing. Thoughts?

Answer: HELLO STAN, TWO CENTER CHANNEL SPEAKERS WOULD NOT WORK BUT THE VLR'S WOULD. THEY ARE THE SAME SIZE BUT ARE FLAT IN FREQUENCY RESPONSE. THE CENTER SPEAKERS HAVE A CONTOUR BUILD IN TO IMPROVE INTELLIGIBLY. YOU WOULD NEED AN AMPLIFIER AND I WOULD RECOMMEND A 60 OR 70 WATT TUBE AMP.

Eric (4/19/06)I have a set of 2CESigs which I have just moved to my home theatre due to their truly incredible imaging. I am looking for a suitable center to go below my 106" screen (using a DLP projector). Is the VCC-5 or new VCC-2 better suited for application below the screen matching with 2CeSigs. Also I am assuming I will need to work directly with the factory as your Denver dealer no longer carries your line (sniffle). Thanks for an amazing audio experience.

Answer: HELLO ERIC, BOTH THE VCC-5 AND THE VCC-2 WILL WORK UNDER THE SCREEN. THE VCC-5 WOULD BE MORE DYNAMIC AND BETTER SOUNDING OBVIOUSLY. CHECK OUT THE WEB LIST OF DEALERS AND FIND THE NEXT NEAREST DEALER AND ORDER FROM THEM AND SAVE SOME MONEY. I BELIEVE HE IS IN FORT COLLINS ABOUT 45 MILES AWAY. HE HAS A BETTER DEMO AND MORE PRODUCT KNOWLEDGE.

Rico (4/23/06) Used or new? How about discussing the merits of each? Say, for instance, that a certain prospective buyer absolutely LOVES the sound of the 2CE Sigs. Used pairs (with stands!) can be had for anywhere between 800 and 1200 dollars (plus shipping) which is tempting for those of us who get off on finding a bargain. On the other hand, you and your posse appear to be hell bent on constantly upgrading every speaker in your line, especially the beloved model 2. Besides the obvious warranty and local dealer support issues, can you make a convincing case for buying new? Just thought I'd throw this question at ya, since there just might be a lot of us in this same situation. Sincerely, Rico.

Answer: HELLO RICO, EASY QUESTION, IF ALL THE MONEY YOU HAVE IS $800 TO $1200 DOLLARS YOU WON'T FIND A BETTER DEAL AS LONG AS YOU ARE ABLE TO AUDITION THEM. MANY PEOPLE HAVE PURCHASED SPEAKERS ONLY TO FIND UNAUTHORIZED REPAIRS (IE: RADIO SHACK TWEETERS IN A FEW CASES) BY MAIL. AFTER SENDING THEM IN FOR REPLACEMENT PARTS, SHIPPING COST THEY HAVE LOTS OF MONEY TIED UP INTO A PAIR SEVERAL GENERATIONS OLD FOR ALMOST THE SAME MONEY MINUS THE 5 YEAR WARRANTY. SO IF YOUR ON A BUDGET AND CAN AUDITION THEM TO MAKE SURE YOU LIKE THEM IT CAN BE A GOOD DEAL. IT'S A GOOD DEAL FOR US ALSO BECAUSE SOME PEOPLE MAY BE UP-GRADING TO 3'S OR QUATRO'S. IF YOU THINK YOU ARE BUYING WHAT YOU HEARD AT THE DEALER ON THE CHEAP, YOU MAY BE MORE WRONG THAN YOU KNOW. WE DO MAKE SIGNIFICANT IMPROVEMENTS WHEN WE CAN IF IT IS COST EFFECTIVE TO KEEP THEM COMPETITIVE. AGAIN, IF YOU BUY WHAT YOU HEAR NONE OF THIS MATERS.

Eddy (4/24/06)I have a home theatre, the left and right front speakers are 3A Signature, the centre is VCC-1, I am using a home built 15 inch sub woofer. The whole system really rocks and sounds great, however the center speaker vcc-1 sounds a little thin, (insufficient or no oooomph) compared to the rest, my processor has a pre amp output for 2 center channels, would you suggest purchasing another center or have you any other ideas that could help. I am also limited to space, I only have room for 2 VCC-1 centers.  Thank you, hope to hear from you shortly.

Answer: HELLO EDDY, I WOULD STAY WITH WHAT YOU HAVE. ADDING A SECOND VCC-1 WOULD MAKE A MESS, ONE WOULD SMEAR THE OTHER IN TIME AND LOWER INTELLIGIBILITY DRAMATICALLY. A VCC-5 WOULD BE THE CORRECT SOLUTION IF YOU CAN FIND THE ROOM.

Bill (4/24/06) I am buying a used pair of 2c speakers. these were originally purchased in 1981 at Take Five Audio in New Haven CT. when asked about serial #s original owner said the numbers were hand written on the outside of the box. the #s were either s or 5 632c & 633c. does this sound legit? did you not put serial #s on the plate in 81? how can I order new socks and is there any easily installed upgrade to the 2c to enhance performance like the ci or ce? I am really looking forward to when they arrive to finally be able to listen to a Vandersteen in my home.  Thank you

Answer: HELLO BILL, IF THEY ARE THE ORIGINAL BOXES THE SN# ON THE BACK OF THE SPEAKER SHOULD MATCH THE NUMBERS ON THE BOX. BULK GRILLE CLOTH CAN BE ORDERED THROUGH ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER IF YOU HAVE THE ABILITY TO INSTALL (SEW) THEM. THERE ARE NO UP-GRADES AVAILABLE EVEN AT THE FACTORY. MAKE SURE YOU AUDITION THEM BEFORE PURCHASE BECAUSE THEY WON'T BE ANYTHING LIKE THE 2CE SIGNATURES AT YOUR DEALER, BUT THEN THE PRICE WON'T BE EITHER.

Carry (4/25/06) Hi Richard, Are you familiar with the spectron remote sense cables, any comment? Just ordered 3a sigs to replace my aging 2cs thanks.

Answer: HELLO CARRY, I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THEM BUT THAT DOES NOT MATER. IF YOU HAVE AUDITIONED THEM IN YOUR ROOM WITH YOUR EQUIPMENT AND IT WORKED FOR YOU THAT'S MORE IMPORTANT THAN MY OPINION. HAPPY LISTENING.

Peter (4/26/06) Hello--how do i replace my woofer/driver of my model-1b? again, thank you for your assistance!

Answer: HELLO PETER, LOOK UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE ON THIS SITE AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS. YOU CAN SEND THE WHOLE SPEAKER IN IF YOU DO NOT UNDERSTAND THE INSTRUCTIONS. IN BOTH CASES A RMA FORM WILL NEED TO ACCOMPANY THE SHIPMENT.

Bill (5/2/06) Richard, I have heard rumors that the wood Quatro's do not sound as good as the normal grille wrap version. Could you elaborate on this? I find them very elegant and am considering them but its a lot money for less performance.

Answer: HELLO BILL, WHEN WE FIRST COVERED THE QUATRO'S WITH VENEER WITH ALL OTHER COMPONENTS THE SAME THEY WERE SLIGHTLY INFERIOR TO THE CLOTH VERSION. THIS IS BECAUSE THERE ARE LARGE REFLECTIVE SURFACES SURROUNDING THE DRIVERS. THIS WAS THE INFORMATION LEAKED TO THE DEALERS EARLY ON AND PROBABLY THE SOURCE OF THE RUMOR. WE REDESIGNED THE GRILL/DRIVER INTERFACE, INSTALLED A PLINTH OF THE SAME MATERIAL (EPOXY COMPOSITE) LIKE THE 5A ON THE BOTTOM, AND THE ALLOY FACE PLATE OF THE 5A ON THE QUATRO TWEETER. ALL OF THIS EXPENSIVE WORK ALLOWED THE QUATRO WOOD A SLIGHT IMPROVEMENT AT ALL FREQUENCIES OVER ITS LOWER COST CLOTH VERSION. THE COST OF ALL THIS $10.700 BUT THEY ARE BEAUTIFUL.

Kyle (5/2/06)I bought a pair of 2c's from my boss. I was in love with them the first time I heard them but I couldn't afford the rest of his system. I need to buy a a/v receiver for these speakers and was wondering if you could give me a name of one that it inexpensive and would do these wonderful speakers justice? Thank you for your time.

Answer: HELLO KYLE, THERE ARE SO MANY WAYS TO GO I WOULD RECOMMEND LOOKING AT THE DEALER LIST ON THIS SITE AND PAY THEM A VISIT. TELL THEM WHAT YOU HAVE AND WHAT YOUR BUDGET IS AND ASK FOR A RECOMMENDATION. ITS MOST IMPORTANT THAT YOU LISTEN TO WHAT THEY SUGGEST AND MAKE SURE YOU LIKE IT. THERE PROBABLY GOING TO RECOMMEND ONE OF THE FOLLOWING: NAD, ARCAM, ROTEL, ETC.

Bill (5/2/06) hello, I'm interested in purchasing 2wq subwoofer. I currently use JMlab micro utopia be, which has limited bass output (3dB@50Hz and 6dB@45hz). Given this limited bass response, would the speaker still integrate well with 2wq subwoofer? From reading Audio-Perfectionist journal, it mentioned that 2wq can only be used with full-range speakers. Thank you.

Answer: HELLO DION, THE RECOMMENDATION FOR FULL RANGE LOUDSPEAKERS IN AUDIO-PERFECTIONIST IS FOR ALL SUB-WOOFERS. TO PROPERLY INTEGRATE A SUB YOU NEED ONE OCTAVE ABOVE AND BELOW THE X-OVER POINT. YOU DON'T HAVE TO TAKE MY WORD ON THIS JUST LOOK AT THE MARKET PLACE. IF WHAT YOU WANT TO DO COULD BE DONE CORRECTLY NONE OF US SPEAKER DESIGNERS WOULD BE MAKING LARGE, HEAVY, HARD TO HANDLE FULL-RANGE MONSTERS, WE HAVE WIVES TOO. THE WHOLE WORLD WOULD BE THREE OR FOUR PIECE SYSTEMS WITH SMALL MAIN SPEAKERS AND SUB(S). HAVING SAID THAT YOU CAN WITH MUCH EXPERIMENTATION WITH THE HIGH PASS AND PLACEMENT ADD BASS WITH THE 2WQ. IT, MORE THAN ANY OTHER WOOFER LENDS ITSELF TO THAT KIND OF EXPERIMENTATION BUT DO NOT EXPECT IT TO BE AS LINEAR AS A GOOD FULL-RANGE SPEAKER. I HAVE HEARD EXAMPLES IN SOME ROOMS THAT WORKED QUITE WELL, CERTAINLY BETTER THAN MISSING A WHOLE OCTAVE OF BASE WHICH IS THE FOUNDATION OF MUSIC. ONLY IN AUDIOPHILE WORLD DO LISTENERS CALL THAT MUSIC AND TALK ABOUT TRANSPARENCY BECAUSE THE BASS IS MISSING. SORRY, I KNOW YOU KNOW THAT BECAUSE YOUR TRYING TO ADD A SUB.

Dave (5/3/06) I would like to use a pair of VSM-1 speakers for the rear in my 5.1 system (2Ce Signatures f-l/r, VCC-1, V2W). They would be mounted on a brick wall that has a fireplace (brick, marble mantel) 5 feet wide that protrudes 10" from the brick wall. Can they be used in this physical environment? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO DAVE R, IF THERE BACK IS AGAINST THE WALL THE VOICING SHOULD BE FINE. YOU SHOULD CHECK WITH YOUR DEALER AND MAKE HIM A DRAWING AND GET HIS OPINION. THE DEALERS HAVE INSTALLED MANY OF THESE AND HAVE MORE EXPERIENCE THAN I IN DIFFERENT ROOMS AND SITUATIONS.

Curtis (5/3/06) Richard, are you working on automatic bass adjustment for the room like some other manufactures? I am particularly interested if it some day will be available for the Quatro or 5A.

Answer: HELLO CURTIS, WE RESEARCHED THIS COMPLETELY FOR THE MODEL 5'S BEFORE RELEASING THEM. IT WAS RATHER EASY WITH TODAY'S TECHNOLOGY TO DO BUT THE SOUND WAS NOT AS GOOD. THE PROBLEM WAS THE DSP PROCESSORS WERE UNABLE TO RELIABLY CORRECT FOR .707 OF THE FAULT (IT WOULD TRY AND SUCCEED TO CORRECT TO 0 DB). OUR RESEARCH AND LISTENING REVEALED CORRECTING TO FLAT FREQUENCY IN A ROOM SOUNDED EQ'ED. I BELIEVE THIS IS BECAUSE THE EAR/BRAIN KNOWS THE ROOM IS NOT PERFECT EVEN IF IT IS CORRECTED TO FLAT FREQ RESPONSE. THIS IS WHY THE PROCEDURE WE USE MAPS THE ROOM AND THEN CORRECTS .707 OF THE PROBLEM. THE SOUND IS MUCH BETTER BECAUSE THE ROOM PROBLEMS HAVE BEEN MINIMIZED. THE LISTENER IS MORE COMFORTABLE AS THE CHARACTER OF THE ROOM STILL REMAINS. THIS ALSO ALLOWED THE SIGNAL TO REMAIN ANALOG SOMETHING THAT IS A POSITIVE ON HIGH RESOLUTION SOURCES (VINYL). WE USE THE SAME SYSTEM ON THE NEW QUATRO.

Rob (5/4/06) Hi, I have an opportunity to buy a used pair of 5's or a new pair of Quatro's. The dealer has the Quatros and a private individual has the 5's so its impossible to really compare the two - different electronics, rooms, etc. Any advice you can give on the differences between the two sonically beyond the more powerful bottom end of the 5's would be appreciated. I wonder if the latest engineering solutions that went into the Quatros are enough to offset the design of the original 5's.

Answer: HELLO ROB, IT IS EXACTLY THE OTHER WAY, SOME OF THE TECHNOLOGY OF THE 5 HAS TRICKLED DOWN TO THE QUATRO. THE DIFFERENCE IN THE BASS IS THE LEAST SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE. THE MODEL 5 STRUCTURE IS MUCH MORE INERT, MORE UP-GRADABLE, HIGHER TECH IN EVERY WAY, AND LESS DIFFRACTIVE AROUND THE MID AND HIGH FREQUENCY DRIVERS. THE DIFFERENCE GOES OVER THE MOON WHEN YOU UPGRADE TO 5A'S SOME DAY. THE ONLY THING NEGATIVE IS YOU WON'T HAVE THE WARRANTY. BUY THE USED 5'S ASSUMING YOU CAN INSPECT THEM, LISTEN TO THEM, AND TRANSPORT THEM HOME YOURSELF. SOME MODEL 5'S ARE APPROACHING 10 YEARS OLD AND MAY HAVE BEEN BEAT UP. THIS IS NOT THE LAND OF OZ THE QUATRO'S ARE ONLY $6995.00 AND A AMAZING SPEAKER AT THAT BUT I AM NOT A MIRACLE WORKER.

Francisco (5/4/06) Dear Mr Vandersteen, I am using a pair of 5A's with balanced crossover. I would like to test a single ended set-up. Is it OK to use the BAT single ended to balanced adapters? Regards.

Answer: HELLO FRANCISCO, MR VANDERSTEEN LIVES ACROSS TOWN AND IS 81 YEARS OLD AND WOULD NOT KNOW THE ANSWER TO YOUR QUESTION (MY FATHER). SINGLE ENDED ADAPTERS OF ANY KIND WILL NOT WORK WITH THE M5-HP BAL. EXPENSIVE DAMAGE COULD HAPPEN TO YOUR 7" MID-BASS DRIVER AND OR SUB-WOOFER AMPLIFIER. I WOULD SUGGEST YOU BORROW A M5-HP SINGLE ENDED FROM YOU DEALER TO DO THE TEST. IN YOUR CASE THE BAT IS A BALANCED DESIGN AND WILL ALWAYS SOUND SUBSTANTIALLY BETTER BALANCED.

Phil (5/5/06) Richard,I recently purchased two used 2Wq subwoofers and M5-HPB balanced high-pass crossovers on audiogon. On 3/22/06 you said on this Technical Information page that the balanced filters would not work correctly with RCA/XLR adapters on my single-ended cables and electronics. Subsequently I found a gentleman (Kirk) on audiogon would had recently purchased used Quatros with single-ended M5-HP crossovers. Kirk needed balanced crossovers so we agreed to trade. The single-ended crossovers just arrived today and I noticed the decal on the crossovers says "Model M5-HP High-pass Filter (100Hz)." The 2Wq literature talks about an 80Hz crossover but I don't remember whether the decal on the balanced crossovers said 80Hz or 100Hz, and Kirk is currently out of town so he can't check. Will the 100 Hz single-ended crossovers I received in trade work with my 2Wq subwoofers? Will the balanced crossovers I sent to Kirk work with his Quatros? If not, what is the approximate cost for the factory to change the crossover points on our crossovers? Thanks, Richard!

Answer:   HELLO PHIL, THE M5-HP WILL WORK FOR KIRK BECAUSE THE LABEL ON THE COVER IS ALWAYS FOR 100 HZ WHICH IS NECESSARY FOR MODEL 5'S AND QUATRO'S. YOU CAN CALL THE FACTORY AND REQUEST A CHEAT SHEET FOR 2WQ USE WHICH HAS DIFFERENT SWITCH SETTINGS FOR 80 HZ.

Theodore (5/9/06) I have 3a sigs and am very seriously considering the upgrade to the 5a's. Would my McIntosh ma2275 integrated tube amp at 75w/channel be sufficient? It is an all tube design. I never listen at loud levels, usually low levels. Room size 15x23ft. I have read many recommending tube amps such as the quicksilver's but no comments on mac tubes. It is a 5 hour drive to my nearest authorized dealer and I would be willing to bring the amp unless you feel it is not a good match. Thank you,

Answer:  HELLO THEODORE, YOU MUST VERIFY THAT THE MAC HAS PRE-OUT AND AMP-IN CONNECTORS ON THE BACK PANEL, BECAUSE THE MODEL 5A'S REQUIRE A HIGH PASS BETWEEN THE PRE-AMP AND THE POWER AMP. IF SO LOAD IT UP IN THE CAR AND DRIVE TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN AUDIO DEALER AFTER MAKING AN APPOINTMENT. HOOK IT UP AND PLAY SOME OF YOUR FAVORITE MUSIC YOU BROUGHT WITH YOU, IF YA LOVE IT, IT WORKS! NO ONE INCLUDING ME IS GOING TO ARGUE ABOUT THAT.

Ray (5/9/06) Hi Richard, I own 5's and 5A's currently the 5's are more desirable with my present decor because the bottoms are cherry, what I want to do is swap out all drivers, crossovers and powers supplies from the 5As that are all black. Thanks....

Answer: HELLO RAY, THIS WOULD NOT BE POSSIBLE WITHOUT JIGS AND FIXTURES AND A ANECHOIC CHAMBER. IF IT WERE THAT EASY WE COULD HAVE OFFERED A FIELD UPGRADE KIT. THE MODIFICATIONS GO BEYOND JUST CHANGING PARTS.

Carl (5/9/06): I have a pair of 1c's (love 'em). I'm starting to look into tube amps (with little knowledge so far) and wonder what I should know.  In particular, what about "single-ended" amps which have low power output? Any limitations or restrictions I should know about?

Answer: HELLO CARL, THERE ARE LOTS LIMITATION AND RESTRICTIONS YOU AND YOUR DEALER SHOULD TALK ABOUT. READING THE POWER RECOMMENDATIONS IN YOUR 1C OWNERS MANUAL WOULD BE A GOOD PLACE TO START. FOR SOME PEOPLE A TUBE AMP THEY HAVE AUDITIONED ON THERE OWN SPEAKERS MAKE THEIR DAY, IT MAY MAKE YOUR WEEK.

Michael (5/11/06) My name is Michael, and I don't yet own a pair of Vandersteen speakers but having heard them at a friend's house I am very interested now. I am currently doing a lot of online research. Since my space is rather limited, I'm focusing on the VLR & VCC speakers and if I might make a comment, it seems that the majority of questions on this forum are related to these speakers, particularly in reference to home theater. Maybe if the website had more info about this topic, it might answer many of those questions. For example, it could include a section on recommended placement / mounting height of these speakers in a typical HT room, a table listing the differences between similar models, as well as more pictures of the speakers, finishes, and relative sizes next to each other. Also, since many people seem to be purchasing your speakers used, it would be very helpful to have a table of serial number ranges and dates of production. It may be beyond the scope of this website, but some type of certification program, or even a "recommended used dealers" page might be helpful for those who steer clear of eBay-type sites and hence may never hear a Vandersteen speaker as a result. Finally, I am also interested in knowing a little bit more about where the company is headed in the future. While the speakers have a legendary following, to be sure, it also seems as if the focus is on 2-channel / stereo audio rather than HT. I have no problem with this at all - I still prefer my vinyl setup to my HT setup - but that may be precisely because HT speakers are so much harder to configure correctly. These are just my impressions from visiting the website and reading online reviews about Vandersteen speakers. Thank you for your time.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, THIS IS A HARD QUESTION TO ANSWER. FIRST THE EASY PART. WE WILL CONTINUE TO SPECIALIZE IN TWO CHANNEL LOUDSPEAKERS AND HT WHEN THE CUSTOMER WANTS MULTI CHANNEL WITH AUDIO PRIORITIES. THE TWO CHANNEL WORLD IS HELD TO A MUCH HIGHER STANDARD BECAUSE BOTH CD AND VINYL ARE MUCH HIGHER RESOLUTION FORMATS. PLACEMENT OF ANY LOUDSPEAKER IS DICTATED BY THE ROOM NOT THE SPEAKER DESIGN SO GENERIC INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT WORTH THE PAPER THEY ARE WRITTEN ON. WE HAVE STATED ON THIS FORUM MANY TIMES HOW TO BUY USED PRODUCTS, I SUGGEST YOU READ SOME OF THEM.  BUYING USED CAN SAVE A LOT OF MONEY BUT IN ORDER TO DO IT SUCCESSFULLY YOU MUST HAVE MORE KNOWLEDGE THAN YOU COULD EVER PICK UP ON A WEB SITE. I WILL STATE ONE MORE TIME HOW IMPORTANT IT IS TO AUDITION THE PRODUCT YOU ARE GOING TO BUY. IF THE SOUND IS GOOD BRING IT HOME. THE BIGGEST PROBLEM WE SEE WHEN PEOPLE BUY USED GOODS HAS TO DO WITH SHIPPING AND DAMAGE. THE IRONY IS THAT A GOOD DEALER IS MORE KNOWLEDGEABLE ABOUT THIS THAN A MANUFACTURE COULD EVER BE BECAUSE THEY HAVE INSTALLED SO MANY SYSTEMS OVER THE YEARS. I HAVE INSTALLED EQUIPMENT IN ONE ROOM, MINE. AS A MANUFACTURE THE COST STRUCTURE HAS ESTABLISHED THE DEALER FOR THIS FUNCTION NOT THE MANUFACTURE. WITH USED EQUIPMENT THE DEALER IS NOT INVOLVED SO UNLESS THERE IS SOME SYSTEM LIKE A 900 PHONE NUMBER THERE IS NO WAY FOR THE MANUFACTURE TO GET COMPENSATED WHEN THE PRODUCT TURNS SEVERAL TIMES. I FEEL IT IS WRONG TO RAISE THE PRICE TO THE CONSUMER AND DEALER WHO IS NOT INVOLVED ENOUGH FOR A MANUFACTURE TO PROVIDE DEALER LIKE SERVICE TO A SECOND OR THIRD OWNER. THIS SERVICE IS VERY SPECIALIZED THEREFOR EXPENSIVE TO STAFF MAKING IT HARDER TO COMPETE WITH OFF SHORE PRODUCTS. THE SET-UP HAS ALWAYS HAD MORE TO DO WITH AWESOME SOUND THAN THE EQUIPMENT WITH IN REASON.

Theodore (5/12/06): Thank you for the quick reply ,The mac ma2275 does have pre-out and amp-in. It uses 4 KT88s in the amp section. That is obviously 1/2 the number a pair of quicksilver mono's or mac 2102 amps use. My question is this - in your vast experience with the 5a's have you found a 75w/channel amp running a/b with the kt88's to have enough power to successfully run the 5a's at low/mod volumes. Do 8 KT88's do better at low volumes than 4??? Otherwise i will not pack up my 90lb integrated for the trip to the local dealer. I never listen loud - usually low volumes. Looking for a very warm and relaxing (most high end systems (i have owned them too) give me severe listener fatigue after 1/2 hour) amp to pair with the 5a's. Vocals and jazz. In ss many suggest higher powered amps also sound better at low volumes. I just want you expert opinion on tube amps with the va's. If you feel 75w is not sufficient i will buy a pair of higher powered mono-blocks (quicksilver) or the mac 2102 100/channel with 8kt88s. The integrated would go great with 2ce sigs in my office too. Thanks again, Theodore

Answer: HELLO THEODORE, THIS QUESTION IS BETTER ANSWERED BY A DEALER WHO HAS EXPERIENCE WITH YOUR PARTICULAR AMPLIFIER AS I HAVE NO EXPERIENCE WITH IT. I WOULD STILL RECOMMEND BRINGING IT TO THE DEALER TO MAKE SURE.

Jeff (5/12/06): Richard: I read on an internet site of running your sub without the x-2 filter with full range speakers. The person claims improved sound but the sub could be damaged. Could you comment? Jeff

Answer: HELLO JEFF, ONE OF THE MAIN IMPROVEMENTS WITH THE 2WQ IN THE SYSTEM OCCURS BECAUSE THE MAIN SPEAKERS ARE HIGH PASSED. THIS IMPROVES THE DISTORTION IN BOTH THE AMPLIFIER AND SPEAKERS. ONE SHOULD ASK HIM HOW FULL-RANGE HIS SPEAKERS COULD BE WHEN HE'S PILING BASS ON TOP OF THE SPEAKERS LET ALONE 15DB OF BOOST IN THE SUB FREQUENCIES. BUT THEN THE LAST CAR I RENTED HAD THE BASS TURNED ALL THE WAY UP (ONLY 12DB) AND THE TREBLE ALL THE WAY DOWN. COULD IT BE HE WAS IN THE NEIGHBORHOOD? OVER TIME THAT OVER BOOST WILL CAUSE PROBLEMS IN THE AMPLIFIER. IT IS HOWEVER VERY IMPORTANT TO HAVE A HIGH PASS OF APPROPRIATE TRANSPARENCY. THE ADJUSTABLE BOX SHOULD NOT BE USED EXCEPT WITH A/V RECEIVERS. FOR MODERATE SYSTEMS THE X-2 WILL BE SUFFICIENT, BUT FOR VERY HIGH PERFORMANCE SYSTEMS A BATTERY BIASED HIGHPASS LIKE THE M5-HP SHOULD BE USED.

Kent (5/13/06): Kent - I own a Vandersteen 2W and Vandersteen M5-HP balanced crossover. Is it possible to change the crossover frequency for either or both of these units? I would like to try my system with less lower-mids coming from the 2W. My goal is to lower the crossover point to somewhere between 45 - 60Hz. Currently my crossover is set to the amps specified input of 20K ohms. Thank you.

Answer: HELLO KENT, THERE IS NO WAY TO MOVE THE X-OVER FREQUENCY NOR WOULD YOU WANT TO. IF YOU WERE TO MOVE THE FREQUENCY TO SAY 50HZ YOUR MAIN SPEAKER WOULD HAVE TO BE FLAT TO 25HZ. IF YOUR MAINS WENT THAT LOW IT WOULD NOT NEED A SUB. I WOULD RECOMMEND YOU BUY A USED 2WQ TO REPLACE YOUR 2W. THE 2WQ IS A MUCH BETTER SUB AND HAS SUBSTANTIALLY LESS MIDRANGE LEAKAGE.

Chris (5/14/06): I am currently living in an apartment where I have less space and I must keep the volume relatively low. I want to consolidate my gear and build a home theater system. I'd like to use my 2Ce's and a 2Wq sub. I also have bi-amped tube amps and a tube stereo pre-amp that even when the volume turned all the way down, the music is still too loud. So, my question is, since I don't have room to put out all my tube gear and I am willing to part with my stereo tube pre-amp, is there a HT receiver that you are aware of that will work with the 2Wq or can you think of a better way do this? Thanks

Answer: HELLO CHRIS, WOW, YOU ARE IN FOR A BIG DISAPPOINTMENT. TUBE SEPARATES FOR TWO CHANNEL IS VERY SOPHISTICATED STUFF. THERE ARE NO HT RECEIVERS THAT WILL EVEN PALE COMPARED TO WHAT YOU HAD. A/V RECEIVERS THAT HAVE PRE-OUT AND PRE-IN FOR THE FRONT CHANNEL'S WILL WORK WITH THE 2WQ. THE HIGH PASS WILL GO BETWEEN THE TWO.

Moby (5/15/06): Hi Richard, I have a pair of early model 5's powered by a Classe CA150 matched to a Classe CP60. I have gone through the setup many times over and have made all the obvious changes but they still are very very bright. Hard to listen to voice level frequencies. What should my path to warmer sounding speakers be and how do I know if I have damaged the mid drivers somehow? Can I change the crossover roll off? I currently have them @ 50 Ohms should I try changing these? Also I have been told the CA150 is a bright sounding amp to start with so should I look to invest in another amp? Thank You, Moby

Answer: HELLO MOBY, I MUST CONFESS NO ONE HAS COMPLAINED ABOUT THE 5'S BEING BRIGHT. HAVE YOU INSTALLED THE PROPER WASHERS FOR TILT ACCORDING TO THE MANUAL? THE TILT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO GET CORRECT. NOT ENOUGH TILT WILL RESULT IN THE TWEETER FREQUENCIES HITTING YOUR EARS FIRST BEFORE THE REST OF THE FREQUENCIES SOUNDING BRIGHT. THE X-OVER MUST BE SET FOR THE CORRECT AMPLIFIER INPUT IMPEDANCE, DO NOT DEVIATE FROM IT. WHO SET THE SPEAKERS UP FOR YOU? I HAVE HEARD THAT YOUR AMPLIFIER IS ON THE BRIGHT SIDE BUT HAVE NO PERSONAL EXPERIENCE. IF TRUE THE SPEAKER WOULD HAVE NO CHOICE BUT TO BE BRIGHT. CONSULT YOUR DEALER, THEY HAVE MUCH MORE EXPERIENCE WITH ALL THESE DIFFERENT COMBINATIONS.

John (5/15/06): I have read the posts about your use of barrier terminal strips and agree with you. What kind of o-lugs do you suggest, electronics stores seem to carry low quality o-lugs. Your barrier strips look like molex products and I was hoping to find a matching o-lug from molex - but no luck. John

Answer: HELLO JOHN, THOSE CHEAP RING LUGS ARE FINE. THERE IS A POST ON THIS SITE ON HOW TO PREP THEM. REMOVE THE PLASTIC SLEEVE AND INSULATE WITH HEAT SHRINK AFTER TERMINATION.

Roger (5/16/06): Hi Richard, I ordered a pair of 5As back in March and am looking forward to receiving them sometime in the next month or so. In a previous post you mentioned that the standard power cords were fine, and that aftermarket power cords could change the sound of the 5As to something other than you intended. I would like to know your thoughts about using surge protectors/power conditioners for the 5A subwoofer amps. I'm not looking to alter the sound of the speakers, but I would like to provide surge protection for the subwoofer amps. Thank You.

Answer: HELLO ROGER, IN MY OPINION PLUGGING THE SUBWOOFER AMPS DIRECTLY INTO THE WALL IS THE WAY TO GO. REMEMBER TO UNPLUG THEM DURING A BAD STORM OR ON VACATION. JUST A NOTE IF YOU GET HIT DURING A BAD STORM SURGE PROTECTORS DO NOT RESPOND FAST ENOUGH ANY WAY.

Moby (5/16/06): Hi Richard, Moby here again. I found my balanced crossovers (Model 5's)set 4 levels to high being I upgraded my amp and never re-set the crossovers. YIKES! How can I tell if I have damaged the speakers. The midrange is very hard to hear. It's there but sounds like it's in the back ground. If I can't afford to upgrade them to 5A's what are my options? Also I have the shipping bases/pallets but can't find the boxes. Can I purchase new boxes if I need to ship the speakers to you? Thank You.

 Answer: HELLO MOBY, HAVING THE ADJUSTMENT TOO HIGH WILL NOT HURT ANYTHING, JUST SOUND BAD. I AM A LOSS AS TO WHAT YOUR PROBLEM IS OTHER THAN WHAT I ASKED YOU TO CHECK.  CONTACT YOUR DEALER AND HAVE HIM HELP YOU. WE DO HAVE BOXES AVAILABLE BUT THEY ARE EXPENSIVE BECAUSE OF THE FREIGHT. CALL THE FACTORY.

John (5/16/06):  Another question about the o-lugs, does the material make any difference, ie. gold plated, or just any standard #10 o-lug(usually looks like tin alloy) sound fine? What about contact preservative like pro gold or similar?

Answer: HELLO JOHN, ALL CONNECTORS ARE COPPER PLATED WITH TIN, THEY WILL WORK GREAT. USE THE CONTACT PRESERVATIVE THAT SOUNDS GOOD TO YOU. BECAUSE ALL CONNECTIONS IN THE SPEAKER ARE SOLDERED I HAVE NOT TAKEN THE TIME TO LISTEN TO THEM, BECAUSE I DON'T HAVE IT. THIS WOULD BE A GOOD QUESTION FOR YOUR DEALER THEY EVALUATE THINGS ALL THE TIME, BECAUSE THEY ARE IN THE BUSINESS OF SELLING THEM.

David (5/17/06):  I have a pair of 5's which I have worked very hard to get positioned such that sound is optimized (to my ear anyway). I have the 11 "pots" on the bass contour panel all set to "straight up". I plan to be in this house for only another year and really do not want to pay someone $300-400 to come out and adjust the contour. Is there ANYTHING a person can do by ear that will be of benefit in this regard during an interim period? It would seem that with 11 settings, the permutations for finding the perfect setting by ear would be daunting, but is there any chance of damage from making adjustments without measuring equipment?

Answer: HELLO DAVID, NO DAMAGE, BUT IT CAN NOT BE DONE BY EAR. YOU ARE MUCH BETTER USING THE SPEAKERS WITH ALL POTS 12 O'CLOCK LIKE YOU ARE.

Kent (5/17/06): Thank you Richard for your previous response. Please also clarify: With your M5-HP balanced crossover, if I adjust the settings to the next higher or next lower impedance, what does that do to the curve? Does one setting move roll off point to a higher frequency, and the other down? BTW: I love what your crossover does to improve SQ of midrange (by taking low-frequency burden off speakers / amp). Thank you again.

Answer: HELLO KENT, THE X-OVER DOES NOT MOVE BUT THE PHASE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE MAIN SPEAKERS AND THE SUB DOES. DEPENDING ON THE ROOM ONE UP OR ONE DOWN CAN PROVIDE BETTER LINEARITY IN THE MID BASS.

Gregg (5/17/06) RICHARD, FIRST OF ALL I WANT TO TELL YOU I WAS ONE OF YOUR EARLY CUSTOMERS BACK IN 1978. I PURCHASED A SET OF MODEL 2C'S FROM YOU VISITING A FRIEND ANTHONY MOTTO WHO AT THE TIME WORKED FOR INTEL, A START UP COMPANY AT THE TIME. YOU HAVE BEEN MORE THAN KIND THROUGH THE YEARS REPAIRING THE SPEAKERS FROM TIME TO TIME WHEN I PLAYED A POORLY RECORDED RECORD AND POPED THE VOICE COILS. I HAD THEM IN STORAGE FOR AROUND 10 YEARS NOW, FINALLY CONNECTED EVERYTHING BACK UP A FEW MONTHS AGO AFTER RETURNING FROM A EUROPEAN TOUR WITH THE BAND I'M IN AND CAN'T TELL YOU HOW MUCH I MISSED THE CLARITY OF THOSE SPEAKERS. I PLAYED PINK FLOYD MEDDLE AND THOUGHT DAVID GILMOUR AND ROGER WATERS WERE SITTING ASIDE ME IN THE STUDIIO LAYING DOWN TRACKS.HERE COMES THE SAD PART. I THINK THE SILICON ON THE OUTSIDE WENT BAD DUE TO EXTREME HEAT OR COLD BEING IN MY WAREHOUSE ALL THOSE YEARS AND THEY ARE FLUTTERING. IS THERE ANYONE I CAN TAKE THEM TOO I CAN TRUST IN PITTSBURGH, PA? OR SHOULD I SEND THEM OUT TO YOU. I REALLY MISS THEM AND WANT TO ENJOY MY RECORDS AGAIN IN BETWEEN TOURING. PLEASE CHECK OUR WEBSITE OUT TOO. GOOGLE THE CYNICS OR GET HIP RECORDS. THANK YOU AND LOOK FORWARD TO YOUR RESPONSE. GREGG KOSTELICHCEO GET HIP RECORDSGUITARIST FOR THE CYNICS.

Answer: HELLO GREGG, DOWN LOAD THE RMA FORM ON THIS SITE UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE, PACK UP THE SPEAKERS WITH THE FORM INSIDE AND SHIP THEM TO US. MOST REPAIR SHOPS DO SO SO WORK FOR A LOT OF MONEY. IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO REPAIR THEM MAKES SENSE, SHIP US THE PARTS WITH THE FORM. YOUR CHOICE.

Bob (5/17/06): I have purchased a VCC-1. S/N 2223. I assume I should set my Harman Kardon AVR-635 receiver to "small" for this speaker? Is this correct? ( I am using it with a pair of 2C's I purchased on 3/84, S/N 8462c/8463c. They are still working fine.) Until I can afford a Vandersteen sub or two, I will be using my HK 200 watt subwoofer with the HK satellites to complete a 5.1 system.

Answer: HELLO BOB, YOUR MANUAL COVERS THIS, PLEASE READ IT OR CALL ME.

Kevin (5/18/06): Hello Mr. Vandersteen, I purchased 1Cs last year and love them. Do you have any plans for a smaller bookshelf speaker, or a smaller floor standing model with a smaller footprint? I'd like to purchase speakers for my bedroom. Thanks

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, FOR BOOKSHELF SPEAKERS HOW ABOUT THE VSM-1 WHICH HANG ON THE WALL, AND YOU WON'T NEED TO BUILD A SHELF. THEY ARE OUT OF THE WAY AND SOUND GREAT.

Rob (5/18/06) Richard, What finish do you use on your Model 5/5A? I purchased a used pair of cherry veneered 5's and want to have them re-veneered (small dings, scratches, etc.) and really like the finish that is on the existing veneer. Thanks

Answer: HELLO ROB, THE MODEL 5'S ARE SPRAYED WITH A CLEAR POLYURETHANE SATIN RUBBED. JUST SAND THE EXISTING FINISH SMOOTH AND RE-SPRAY WITH THE SAME PRODUCT. DO NOT USE LACQUER. IF YOU ARE TALKING ABOUT PUTTING A DIFFERENT WOOD OVER THE CHERRY YOUR ABOUT TO MAKE A BIG MISTAKE. ANY GLUE YOU TRY OVER THE FINISH WILL NOT STICK. SEVERAL CUSTOMERS HAVE HAD US CHANGE THE WOOD WHEN THEY WERE AT THE FACTORY FOR UP-DATE.

Rob (5/18/06): Richard, If gluing veneer over the existing veneer is a bad idea I take it you actually pull the old veneer off when you re-veneer speakers. What is an estimate to get both speakers veneered new (cherry) as part of a 5 to 5A update? Thanks

Answer: HELLO ROB, MAYBE WE CAN RESTORE THE EXISTING FINISH. CALL ME SO WE CAN DISCUS OPTIONS. THIS IS BEYOND THIS FORUM AND WOULD TAKE A LOT LESS TIME THAN DOING THIS BACK AND FORTH.

Jason (5/19/06):  I have a pair of 3a with a stereo pair of 2wq subwoofers and I'm using the balanced M5-HP variable cross-over. My main amp (Krell KAS200s) has an impedance of 47K, so I set the switches to 100K. I also tested one setting up and down from there as recommended and found I liked the 75K setting best in my room, mainly because it gave a bigger bass punch.  I further experimented with the 50K setting and found that while the sound was less balanced, it seemed to deliver even more bass, particularly on movies. I spend more time watching movies these days than listening to music (which is a change from when I bought these). I was wondering if using a setting 2 levels away (50K) from the amp’s impedance is ok or if system damage could result. What about 3 setting away (33K)? Is there an alternative method to increase the bass output (bass volume?) without switching to the V2W? Thanks

Answer: HELLO JASON, TWO SETTINGS IS NOT RECOMMENDED. THE PROPER SETTING WILL GIVE THE BASS OUTPUT RECORDED ON THE CD OR DVD. I SUGGEST YOU USE THE BASS BOOST ON YOUR PROCESSOR FOR MOVIES THAT WAY YOUR MUSIC WON'T BE SCREWED UP.

Kent (5/19/06): Hi Richard. I tried moving the M5-HP crossover up and down one setting. I most like the 10k ohm setting, which is one down from my amp’s stated input (Ayre V-3 / 20K ohms in balanced). This setting appears to improve both bass quality and overall integration. It also appears that this setting requires less gain from the 2W to achieve proper balance. I’m the kind of guy who likes to understand how and why things work. Will please explain to me what changes occur to the signal or phase when set at 10K (vs 20K), and why the sound is improved (and also seems louder)? Thanks

Answer: HELLO KENT, THE WAY THIS ASSESSMENT SHOULD BE DONE IS AS FOLLOWS: SET THE X-OVER TO THE SETTING CLOSEST TO THE AMPLIFIER INPUT IMPEDANCE AND ADJUST THE 2W(Q) LEVEL CONTROL TO APPROXIMATELY THE SENSITIVITY OF THE MAIN SPEAKERS. TRY ONE SETTING LOWER AND TURN DOWN THE 2W(Q) LEVEL UNTIL THERE IS THE SAME SUBJECTIVE BASS IN THE ROOM. ASSES THE QUALITY NOT QUANTITY OF BASS. ADJUST THE X-OVER ONE SETTING ABOVE THE FIRST SETTING AND RAISE THE 2W(Q) LEVEL UNTIL THERE IS THE SAME SUBJECTIVE BASS IN THE ROOM AS THE TWO TESTS BEFORE. ASSES THE QUALITY NOT THE QUANTITY OF THE BASS. USE THE SETTING THAT GIVES THE BEST QUALITY OF BASS. IF YOU WANT MORE BASS THAN THE RECORDING HAD USE THE BASS TONE CONTROL ON THE PREAMP AND TURN IT UP. IF YOU DO NOT HAVE TONE CONTROLS TURN THE 2W(Q) LEVEL UP AND DON'T TELL YOUR AUDIOPHILE FRIENDS. REMEMBER THAT TURNING THE BASS UP WILL BE PERCEIVED BY MANY AS REDUCED TRANSPARENCY. YOU WANT TO KNOW MORE CALL ME.

Paul (5/22/06) Hi Richard, This is Paul following up on the question I posed on 2/24 having to do with lack of bass in my system. I have an update: much to my surprise it was my Acurus DIA100 passive preamp integrated amplifier that was limiting my system. It simply could not drive the 2Ce Signatures to anywhere near their potential. I tried a pair of Odyssey Stratos Monos with Odyssey Tempest preamp and the sound improved noticeably. Then I found used BEL 1001 Mk V amp and PSE HL-1 preamp and WOW - I now have rich, detailed bass. While all rooms introduce sonic anomalies, particularly at low frequencies, the room was not the primary problem with my system. Before I got my hands on the BEL I also bought a used 2Wq which I will have by the end of this week. That may be overkill but I am eager to experiment with it, and if it's anywhere near as impressive as the 2Ce Signatures I suspect that it would be very difficult for me to part with it. Thank you for dedicating your mind, ears, and hands to creating products delivering truly exceptional sound reproduction and value.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, THESE QUESTIONS ARE HARD FOR ME TO ANSWER BECAUSE I DO NOT HAVE PERSONAL EXPERIENCE WITH MUCH OF THE EQUIPMENT MANY PEOPLE SEEM TO BUY ON SOMEONE ELSE'S SUGGESTION AND NOT ON A PERSONAL EVALUATION. I'M HAPPY YOU FOUND THE GEAR THAT WORKS FOR YOU.  REMEMBER IT DOESN'T MATER HOW GOOD THE DEAL IS IF IT SOUNDS BAD.

Dan (5/24/06): Hi Richard, I own a pair of 2ce sigs. I'm driving them with a high quality "class A" 250 watt amp. I listen at low to moderate volume. I also use a powered sub crossed over at 85hz. The power recommendation for the sigs is significantly lower than 250. To me, the sound is wonderful and I don't want to change a thing. But are my sigs in grave danger? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAN, HIGH POWERED AMPLIFIERS ARE NO MORE DANGEROUS THAN HIGH HORSEPOWER CARS. GET DRUNK OR STUPID ALL BETS ARE OFF. JUST BECAUSE YOU HAVE 250 WATTS IS NOT A PROBLEM AS LONG AS ONLY PART OF THEM ARE USED WISELY. IT IS SAFER TO HAVE MORE THAN YOU NEED THAN NOT ENOUGH POWER.

David (5/25/06): I'm confused about the M5-HP. I thought it was only for Quatros and 5As. I have 3A Sigs and 2Wqs. What is an M5-HP and will it work with my system? How much is one in a balanced set up. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE M5-HP IS RECOMMENDED IN HIGH PERFORMANCE SYSTEMS INCLUDING THE MODEL 3'S. CHECK WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AS TO WHAT IT IS AND HOW TO USE THEM.

Ryan (5/25/06): Just bought a pair of used 1C's from somebody who upgraded to the 3A's. He included the stands but no spikes. I have carpeted floor and would like to add some spikes to the stand. What threaded size spikes do I need to buy, and does your company sell spikes or should I go to a 3rd party? Also, the guy did not include the mounting hardware to screw the stands onto the speakers. What size bolt do I need to correctly attach the speakers? Thanks, I love your product!

Answer: HELLO RYAN, CONTACT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER OR VANDERSTEEN AUDIO 559-582-0324 FOR A HARDWARE KIT FOR THE 1C'S. ENJOY YOUR NEW SPEAKERS.

Randy (5/26/06):  I don't believe everything I read, so I figured I'd ask you. On a web page a gentleman says he runs his 2Wqs with NO X2 or anything else between the amp and the preamp. He said the sound is great and he has been doing so for several months with no adverse concequences. What is the worst thing that could happen trying this? Why should we not do it?

Answer: HELLO RANDY, READ THE QUESTION (JEFF 5/12/06) ON THIS SAME PAGE.

Richard (5/27/06):  I recently purchased two used 2Wq subwoofers and M5-HP balanced high-pass crossovers. On 3/22/06 you said on this Technical Information page that the balanced filters would not work correctly with RCA/XLR adapters on my single-ended cables and electronics. Subsequently I traded crossovers with a gentleman who had single-ended M5-HP crossovers but needed balanced M5-HP crossovers. I set the impedance of the single-ended M5-HP crossovers using a multi-meter, 1kHz test tone, and the method you described in your response on this page to Stuart on 3/22/06.I just played "Ballad of the Runaway Horse" from the Rob Wasserman CD "Duets." This cut, which features Jennifer Warnes singing and Wasserman on upright bass, has been recommended to me for speaker setup. However, there seems to be little difference in the volume of Wasserman's bass regardless of whether the subwoofers' sensitivity and contour controls are at their lowest or highest settings on both subwoofers. To complicate matters, I moved recently and I'm not yet familiar with the sound of my stereo in the new room (approximately 12' wide by 22' long by 8' high). So I tested the subwoofers using the 31.5Hz track on Stereophile first test CD. With the test CD, I could definitely distinguish the bass volume and quality differences as I adjusted the sensitivity and contour controls from their lowest to highest settings. Still, the difference wasn't as much as I expected and I'm wondering if I damaged the subwoofers' internal amplifiers by using the subwoofers with the balanced crossovers and RCA/XLR adapters for a week while I was waiting for the single-ended crossovers to arrive. Can you recommend a test that I can do at home to verify the subwoofer amplifiers are working correctly? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO RICHARD, WE DELIBERATELY MADE THE CONTROLS ON THE 2WQ,5A,AND QUATRO'S SUBTLE FOR FINE TUNING. IF IT MADE A BIG DIFFERENCE THAT WOULD NOT BE VERY FINE! THIS ALSO LIMITS HOW SCREWED UP ONE COULD GET THEM, THEY ARE SOLD AS HIGH END EQUIPMENT. THE SUB WOOFERS EITHER WORK OR THEY DON'T THERE IS NO IN BETWEEN.

Gabriel (5/28/06): "USING ADAPTERS ON A BALANCED HP5B WILL NOT WORK CORRECTLY. I'M SORRY TO SAY THE MP5B CAN NOT BE MODIFIED TO SINGLE ENDED." Is this statement true of the converse? Can I use an XLR to RCA adapter on my XLR amp to convert it to single ended and use the single ended M5-HP?

Answer: HELLO GABRIEL, ADAPTERS OF ANY KIND ARE NOT RECOMMENDED BECAUSE THE HIGH-PASS FUNCTION COULD BE VERY FAR OFF THE PROPER FREQUENCY. ONE HAS TO THINK ABOUT ADAPTERS AND THEIR SONIC EFFECT. WHEN YOU PAY $600.00 - $800.00 FOR A HIGH PASS, ADAPTERS AND THEIR NEGATIVE EFFECT DOES NOT MAKE SENSE.

Craig (5/29/06):  Hello Richard, can you recommend a way to add Quatro/Model 5 type room correction to our 2Wq's? Or much better yet, do you offer such? Thanks again for all you do.

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, I'M SORRY IT IS NOT AVAILABLE FOR THE 2WQ. IT WOULD MAKE THE SUB A LOT MORE EXPENSIVE. THE 2WQ CAN BE PLACED IN THE CORNER OF THE ROOM AND IF USED IN STEREO PAIRS WILL BE VERY FLAT IN MOST ROOMS. IF THE SUB IS Q'ED PROPERLY (MOST ARE NOT) CORNER PLACEMENT IS THE MOST LINEAR. THE MAIN REASON THE 5A'A AND QUATRO'S HAVE ROOM CONTROL IS BECAUSE THEY NEED TO BE PLACED WHERE THE ROOM ALLOWS THE BEST IMAGING SO THE BASS CAN BE ADJUSTED TO THAT LOCATION.

David (5/30/06): Dear Richard, I am currently using a pair of 2Cs with a single 2Wq. My amp’s input impedance is 49k and I am using a 50k X-2 crossover that is an excellent match. I need to replace the amp and the new one is a tube / transistor hybrid with an input impedance of 420k. I spoke to my dealer about a new X-2 but was informed that they only go up to 200k. He offered me the option of using the active crossover from the Model 5’s, but my system is very modest and a passive crossover like the X-2 is fine for me. Is it possible for me to simply wire a 4700pf WonderCap or KimberKap in the signal path? Will this give me a crossover point at 80hz, or am I over simplifying? Any help or advice you can give will be greatly appreciated. Thank you very much.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE REASON WE DO NOT PROVIDE X-2 ANY HIGHER THAN 200K IS BECAUSE THE HIGH PASS FREQUENCY CAN VARY A LOT. YOU COULD USE A SERIES CAP LIKE YOU MENTIONED BUT I WOULD USE A FREQUENCY GENERATOR AND O-SCOPE AND VERIFY THE HIGH PASS FREQUENCY. THE X-2'S ARE JUST EXACTLY THAT, A HIGH QUALITY CAP IN SERIES WITH THE INPUT OF THE AMPLIFIER.

Dan (5/30/06):  Hi Richard, When an upgradeable pair of 2CE's are made into signatures, are they of the present day standard or of the original late 90's standard. Thank You.

Answer: HELLO DAN, UPGRADING AN UPGRADEABLE 2CE TO SIGNATURES IS 85% OF WHAT WE MAKE TODAY. THERE ARE SOME THINGS WE CAN NOT CHANGE BECAUSE THE ALREADY HIGH COST WOULD BE RIDICULOUS.

Bill (5/31/06): Richard, I realize this does NOT fall in the frequently asked question category, but I need some help. You did answer this question when it was much more general back in February, but it has progressed since then. It's about running a pair of 5s in balanced mode with Pass Aleph 1.2s. Here's the exchange I've had with Nelson at Pass recently. Thanks for your help, Bill Mr. Pass,I had a pair of Aleph 2s that were driving a pair of Vandersteen 5s. Because of the crossover with the Vandersteen and the Input Impedance for the Aleph 2s when balanced was, standard 20 K ohm and inverted 5 K ohm, I was running them single-ended. Is the Input Impedance for the Aleph 1.2s the same as the Aleph 2s and is there a way I can run them balanced? Thanks for your help, Bill William Togno 2720 Russell St Berkeley, CA 94705 (415)299-9659 --- Nelson Pass <nelson@passlabs.com> wrote: You can buffer the input to the Aleph 1.2, or you can adjust the values of the crossover to accommodate the impedance. If the filter is passive, that means multiplying the values of the filter parts by 4. Of course you can just hook it up and it will run - I have customers who did that and were happy. best, np Mr. Pass, Sorry for confusion, but I'm only slightly above a novice when it comes to electronic. I was a music lover first, who picked up a few things over the years. I got this response from Richard at Vandersteen; HELLO BILL, YOU MUST CHECK WITH PASS LABS AND MAKE SURE BOTH LEGS ARE THE SAME. SOME OF THE PASS LABS ARE NOT TRUE BALANCED LIKE 5K ON ONE LEG AND 20K ON THE OTHER LEG. THIS IS VERY DANGEROUS FOR THE 7 INCH MID BASS DRIVER. PASS LABS WILL MAKE YOU A CUSTOM HIGH PASS BECAUSE OURS WONT WORK. Running them in balanced mode is ideal, but if this is too much work it's not a problem. I just loved the Aleph 2s and thought the 1.2s would be great for the Vandersteen 5s. Maybe I'll just compromise and run them single-ended. Thanks for your time, Bill From Nelson Pass We don't make a network for the Vandersteens, but if Richard will release the schematic to you, I can point you to the correct values. best, np Sorry for the length, but that's where I am. It would be great to be able to run them balanced, but like I mentioned if this is just too much for the two of you maybe I'll run them single-ended. Thanks again,

Answer: HELLO BILL, THE FACT THAT THE IMPEDANCE OF THE (+) LEG IS NOT THE SAME AS THE (-) LEG IS EVIDENCE THAT IT IS NOT A FULLY BALANCED AMPLIFIER. THIS AMPLIFIER IS BETTER SOUNDING THEREFORE WHEN RUN SINGLE ENDED BECAUSE IT IS SINGLE ENDED!!!!!!

Paul (5/31/06): I'm running a pair of 2Ce Signatures with a single 2Wq sub. The system sounds very good with the cables I made from AudioQuest bulk cable ($3/foot and I'm using two pairs on each side to bi-wire) and terminators but I've been very impressed with BEL P-1 interconnects and will probably upgrade to BEL speaker cable for the 2Ce's well. I'm inclined to order two pairs of the BEL S-12 cables rather than a single set of the heavier gauge S-24s and a pair of jumpers but my Vandersteen dealer says that he and everyone he knows does the latter so he can't loan me S-12's to listen to. If a single pair of S-24s with jumpers works well with his Model 5s should they work well for my 2Ce Signatures? That seems to run contrary to your general recommendations. The cost is about the same either way. I think that you have some experience with BEL cables - do you have a recommendation for me?Also, is it critical to run the same cable to the sub or can I get by with my homemade cables? I could end up spending over $1000 on speaker cables if I get all BELs so any advice you can give as to priorities would be appreciated.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, OUR VIEW ON THIS SUBJECT IS WELL DOCUMENTED IN THE OWNERS MANUAL AND SEVERAL QUESTIONS ON THIS SITE. THAT IS OBVIOUSLY NOT GETTING THROUGH TO YOU SO YOU SHOULD MAKE THE DEALER PROVE ME WRONG.  IF HE WON'T I WOULD FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.

Clay (6/02/06): Dear Richard, I have enjoyed a pair of 2C loudspeakers for years. I am about to upgrade my amplifier to a Rotel integrated amp. I have the opportunity to add a Vandersteen 2W subwoofer to this system. Will the sub work as it is intended with the Rotel and 2C's? Is extra equipment or a special hookup required? Thanks and keep up the great innovation.

Answer: HELLO CLAY, THE 2WQ REQUIRES A HIGH PASS BETWEEN THE PRE-AMP AND AMPLIFIER AND WILL NOT WORK WITH MOST INTEGRATED AMPLIFIERS. CHECK WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER.

William (6/03/06): Richard,I need to order a new manual for my 2Ce's...(How do I do that?)I also lost my soundanchor spikes in the move, can I get them from you as well?Thanks,

Answer: HELLO WILLIAM, CALL THE FACTORY.

Phil (6/07/06): Would it be acceptable to place the VSM's on 24" stands in the back of the room against the back wall instead of up on the wall? This installation would also require them to be very close to corner placement. I am currently considering 1c's in the front, VSM's in the rear and VCC5 center using a single 2W for my home theater. I do not have a placement to hang them at the same height and spacing on the back wall(this also includes my wifes reluctance to "Hang" speakers in the den!)Also, would it be just as acceptable to use 1C's in the back instead of the VSM's if they would not work close in a corner and/or on a stand? I could probably get the 1C's out a little or the VSM out maybe 6-8 inches.I'm trying to build an economical home theater. It certainly isn't required to be of "Reference" caliber-just good sound. I have a large opening leaving the right side of the den which is handicapping placement. One last question, I'm currently using 3a Sigs and a pair of 2Wq's in my 2 channel room. I was considering switching to the Quattro's for ease of placement and space saving. Would this be a move sideways or an improvement in sound?

Answer: HELLO PHIL, HT SETUPS SHOULD BE ADDRESSED BY THE DEALER AS THEY HAVE INSTALLED MANY OF THEM, IN MANY DIFFERENT ROOMS. I HAVE NOT. I KNOW OF A DEALER WHO HAS HUNG OUR SPEAKERS UPSIDE DOWN FROM THE CEILING AND THE CUSTOMER IS VERY HAPPY, I WOULD HAVE NEVER MADE THAT RECOMMENDATION. FORTUNATELY FOR HIM, HE ASKED HIS DEALER. THE QUATRO IS A SIGNIFICANT IMPROVEMENT OVER 3A SIG'S AND SUBS.

Steven (6/10/06): Richard, thank you very much for taking the time to review and answer all our questions--I enjoyed reading all the Qs and replies and learned a lot. I've read enough recently to know I want to get a 2Wq subwoofer. I have an Audio Research SP-9 MkII preamp, 2 bridged sons of ampzilla (using "The Bridge" by GAS), and upgraded Dahlquist DQ-10 speakers. (1) Do you think the 2Wq would work well with this system? (2)If I get just one 2Wq to start, do I run speaker wires from the L and R out channel of my bridged amps to the L and R inputs on the back of the 2Wq? (3) Later, if I get another sub, would I just connect the amp L out to L in on one sub and amp R out to the R in on the other sub? (4) You say "FOR MODERATE SYSTEMS THE X-2 WILL BE SUFFICIENT, BUT FOR VERY HIGH PERFORMANCE SYSTEMS A BATTERY BIASED HIGH PASS LIKE THE M5-HP SHOULD BE USED." Do you think there would be a noticeable sound difference if I were to use the M5-HP on my system, or should I just use the X-2?

Answer: HELLO STEVEN, THIS LATE AT NIGHT I AM GETTING DIZZY TRYING TO FOLLOW ALL OF THIS. ASK YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER WHEN YOU VISIT HIM AND BRING A DRAWING. THE X-2 WILL BE FINE.

David (6/10/06): Six weeks ago I had a pair of 2Wq Subwoofers installed in my listening room in my home. I was aware that a break in period was required, but even after the manual instructions, I was not impressed. I also had ordered a X-2 Fixed Crossover which I am waiting for. I just wanted to report that the sound is NOW awesome!! The deep bass is tight with absolutely no hangover (maybe not correct terminology). It just took a little longer to break them in than the manual indicated. Am told that when the crossover arrives the sound will be improved more. Can't wait. I can strongly recommend your subwoofers. I have owned other brands of subwoofers in the 80's and very early 90's and they were not close to yours in the quality of sound. I know you know all this, but thought you might like to hear again. David Glover The Woodlands, Texas

Answer: HELLO DAVID, ENJOY YOUR MUSIC AND PLEASE POST HERE WHAT YOU HEAR WHEN YOU INSTALL THE X-2'S. BE SURE TO GIVE THEM A CHANCE TO BREAK IN.

Mauricio (6/14/06): I've recently bought a pair of second hand Vandersteen 1C. They seem to be OK. and 'm very satisfied with them, but I didn't get the stands and the catalogue. I have problems positioning the speakers in order to get the most of them. My rectangular room size is (WxHxD) 3.5mts. X 2.5mts X 5mts, would you give me an advise? I live in Colombia (south America) and I would like to know how to get the stands, which seem to be crucial to obtain the whole sound they can reproduce. When I use them with a subwoofer the sound becomes less natural, so how can I get a better bass response of them? I've made listening comparisons against the Von Schweikert VR-4 of a friend of mine, and despite they are in a different level of price and level, we both, for our surprise, didn't heard the difference they have in price. I thank you in advance for your help.

Answer: HELLO MAURICIO, YOU CAN REQUEST A MANUAL BY MAIL. SEND $5.00 US TO COVER POSTAGE. SOUNDS LIKE THEY ARE WORKING VERY WELL.

Truck (6/17/06):  RE: 5a, Bass EQ and Set-up Procedure.  Hello Richard. I have owned my 5a's for a year now, and I enjoy them more and more every day; the only drawback is that my music loving friends have practically moved-in and my wife is threatening divorce. Since I have relocated since my purchase, I have done the set-up procedure on my own according to the instructions in your fine owner's manual. I was wondering why you do not recommend taking a final step in the set-up of the EQ, which would be to take the measurements at the listening position in the aggregate (both speakers playing simultaneously). I am quite certain you have considered this - you seem to have thought of everything else - so I am just wondering why this would not work, or if you consider it a redundant and therefore unnecessary step? Many thanks in advance for you considered reply.

Answer: HELLO TRUK, ASK YOURSELF, IF BOTH SPEAKERS ARE PLAYING WHICH ONE WOULD ADJUST? THE MOST COMMON MISTAKE MANY PEOPLE MAKE IS TRYING TO ADJUST THE SPEAKERS AS FLAT AS THEY CAN. THE RESULT IS A LACK OF INTEGRATION, BORING, AND COMPRESSED BASS. ONCE THE LEVELS ARE SET ON THE PRE-AMP WRITE DOWN THE SPL METER READING FOR EVERY BAND ON BOTH SPEAKERS. NEXT TO THAT COLUMN WRITE DOWN WHAT YOUR TARGET IS FOR THE FINAL ADJUSTMENT. IE: +9DB X .3=3DB. 3DB WILL BE WHAT YOU WANT THAT BAND(POT) TO BE ON THE METER WHEN FINISHED.  ALWAYS GO BACK AND RUN THROUGH ALL BANDS TWICE AND MAKE TRIM ADJUSTMENTS. NEVER USE A CALIBRATED MIKE, USE THE RADIO SHACK ANALOG SPL METER IT HAS THE CORRECT ROLL OFF BUILT IN. DO NOT USE A RADIO SHACK THAT HAS BEEN MODIFIED OR A CORRECTION CHART SOME PROMOTE.

Jonas (6/19/06) Richard, Thanks for continuing to operate this forum. I have another question as I come to the final stages of designing the room that will hold my beloved stereo (5A's, tube pre, SS amp and universal digital player) and a HT setup as well (not yet purchased but will have front projection and 5 channels including the stereo): I have the ability to install dedicated AC lines back to the main panel, how many should I get to accommodate the HT and the Stereo? Also, do think there is any value in "audiophile" grade outlets? Thanks again,

Answer: HELLO JONAS, RUNNING SEPARATE DEDICATED LINES IS A GOOD IDEA ALTHOUGH OVER RATED EXCEPT IN THE BIGGEST SYSTEMS. AS MANY AUDIOPHILES HAVE DISCOVERED, RUNNING THE WHOLE SYSTEM FROM ONE CIRCUIT CAN OFTEN IMPROVE THE SOUND. THIS IS BECAUSE THAT GUARANTIES THE WHOLE SYSTEM IS ON THE SAME LEG. IF YOU RUN MULTIPLE LINES TELL YOUR ELECTRICIAN YOU WANT ALL OF THEM ON ONE LEG. THE OTHER LEG SHOULD BE USED FOR THE REFRIGERATORS AND ANY LIGHT CIRCUIT WITH DIMMERS OR FLUORESCENTS. DON'T KNOW ABOUT AUDIOPHILE OUTLETS BECAUSE I DO NOT USE THEM AND HAVE NO EXPERIENCE WITH THEM.

Mike (6/19/06): Hi there, I am in NZ and have a pair of 3a Signatures, a pair of 1c's and the VCC 5.  I am wanting to replace the sock on all speakers with a new color (color for you guys) and am hoping you can send me a) instruction on removing the sock and b) the template pattern for replacements so I can have them ready to swap over. Thanks in advance.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, INSTRUCTIONS ARE ONE OUR WEB SITE UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE. THIS IS A BIG JOB!! BE SURE TO SELECT A FABRIC THAT IS AS TRANSPARENT AS WHAT IS INSTALLED. YOU SHOULD BE ABLE TO SEE THROUGH IT EASILY. ONCE YOU HAVE SECURED YOUR NEW FABRIC REMOVE THE OLD AND USE IT AS A PATTERN. DO NOT USE A LIGHT COLOR AS THEY WILL SOIL IN A VERY SHORT TIME BECAUSE THEY ACT AS ROOM FILTERS. YOU WOULD BE SURPRISED HOW MUCH AIR IS PUMPED THROUGH THE GRILLE.

Havish (6/23/06): Hi Richard,My question is about speaker break in. When I bought my 2Ce speakers, I was told that they need to be broken in for a certain number of hours. However, I also know that the two speakers are hand matched in the factory to be very close in response prior. If the speakers aren't broken in yet, how can hand matching in the factory guarantee that the speakers will be matched after the break in period as well? Or is the information that the speakers need breaking in a mistake? Could you throw some light on what exactly is happening during the breaking in process and why this does not affect the results of the hand matching done apriori in the factory? Thanks for taking the time to operate this forum. Regards,.

Answer: HELLO HAVISH, BREAK IN INVOLVES THE SUSPENSION COMPONENTS OF A DRIVER. THIS IS A LINEAR FUNCTION AND IS WHY WE BREAK IN DRIVERS FOR 1000 HOURS BEFORE DOING ANY DESIGN WORK. MATCHING THE DRIVERS INVOLVES SUBTLE DIFFERENCES IN THE DIAPHRAGM (CONES AND DOMES) THAT NEVER CHANGE IF THE MATERIALS ARE NOT EFFECTED BY AGE, MOISTURE, ETC. ALL OF OUR DIAPHRAGM ARE ENVIRONMENT STABLE FOR THIS REASON, AN EXAMPLE OF ONE THAT IS NOT WOULD BE PAPER. YOU SHOULD HAVE HEARD THIS CHANGE IN THE FIRST 100 HOUR ESPECIALLY.

Stan (6/24/06): Hi - I just read the Stereophile report on your Quatro. Congrats on the wonderful review. Unless I misread the review, they said it was not only better than the Wilson product, but also better than the 5A's. I just recently (about 5 months ago) got my 5A's. I listened carefully to the 2 speakers and although I think the Quatros are very good, I don't think they are as complete as the 5A's. Do you have any thoughts on this matter?

Answer: HELLO STAN, IF YOU READ THE REVIEW CAREFULLY IT SAYS SOME SONIC FEATURES ARE BETTER THAN THE WILSON PRODUCTS. AS FAR AS COMPARISONS WITH THE 5A'S THEY WERE BASED ON HIS LIMITED EXPOSURE AT SHOWS. ALL SPEAKERS ARE HANDICAPPED BY THE HOTEL ROOMS TYPICALLY USED AT THE SHOWS SO BASIC ROUGH ASSESSMENTS CAN BE MADE BY A ASTUTE LISTENER IN THAT VENUE, BUT CRITICAL LISTENING LIKE IN A REVIEW IS IMPOSSIBLE. THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN ROOMS CAN MASK LARGE DIFFERENCES. I AM ALWAYS AMAZED WHEN A AUDIOPHILE GETS INTO THE SHOW AND ASKS ME WHY THE SPEAKER I'M SHOWING DOES NOT SOUND AS GOOD AS HIS AT HOME. I HOPE THEY ARE NOT LIVING IN A HOTEL ROOM WITH ONE DAY TO WARM UP THE GEAR AND DO THE SET UP. THE CES SHOW IS FOR DEALERS AND MOST OF THEM HAVE LEARNED HOW TO LISTEN AROUND THE CONDITIONS. YOU HAVE THE SAME ISSUE IN MOST DEALER SHOW ROOMS BECAUSE THAT'S RETAIL. MOST PRODUCTS WILL ALWAYS PERFORM MUCH BETTER IN A HOME ENVIRONMENT BUT VANDEERSTEEN'S  ARE PARTICULARLY HANDICAPPED BECAUSE THEY ARE TIME AND PHASE CORRECT WHICH IS OBSCURED BY THE RE-RADIATION FROM THE OTHER SPEAKERS IN THE ROOM OR THE HIGH AMBIENT NOISE. AUDIOPHILES WHO ARE CRITICAL LISTENERS DEVELOP THAT SAME ABILITY IN THEIR FAVORITE DEALERS SHOWROOM, OVER TIME THEY LEARN HOW TO EVALUATE GEAR AS WELL AS AT HOME. GETTING BACK TO THE REVIEW THE QUATRO IS AN AMAZING SPEAKER FOR THE MONEY (MOST OF IT'S COMPONENTS CAME FROM THE MODEL 5) BUT IT WON'T HOLD A CANDLE TO THE 5A'S IN MY OPINION.  WE CAN ONLY IMAGINE WHAT THE REVIEW WOULD HAVE BEEN IF HE WERE AUDITIONING THE 5A'S.

Jack (6/24/06): Will the 2ceSignature perform alright if installed in my existing wall unit? Each speaker would be in a 17" wide cabinet. Thus, no open space on the sides. I would use vcc-1 center channel under the tv. Best wishes,

Answer: HELLO JACK, THIS IS ALWAYS A HARD QUESTION TO ANSWER. YOU WILL COMPROMISE THE SOUND SIGNIFICANTLY BUT STILL HAVE BETTER SOUND THAN A BOX SPEAKER IN THE SAME LOCATION. THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT AMOUNT OF OPEN SPACE AROUND THE TWEETER AND MIDRANGE IN THE VANDERSTEEN WITHIN THE SOCK WHEN INSTALLED IN A CABINET. YOU WILL STILL GET A OPEN SOUND BECAUSE THE DRIVERS ARE UN-BAFFLED TO A DEGREE. INSTALLING SOME SOUND ABSORBERS ON THE SIDES OF THE CABINET WILL HELP. VCC-1 WILL WORK GREAT UNDER THE SCREEN.

Paul (6/24/06): Dear Sir; Can you outline the differences between the 3A and the 3A Signatures? On your upgrade pricelist, you have two prices for what appears to be the same upgrade. Can you elaborate on this difference? Regards,

Answer: HELLO PAUL, IT IS THE SAME UPGRADE FROM TWO DIFFERENT STARTING POINTS; 3 OR 3A TO 3A SIG. NO MATER WHICH ONE YOU START WITH YOU END UP WITH 3A SIGNATURES FOR TWO DIFFERENT PRICES.

Jeff (6/24/06): My first adventure into high end equipment 15-20 years ago included a purchase of 2CI's. I loved them. Then I got money, and got stupid, and migrated to Wilson Watt Puppy 5's. Recently, I decided to audition some of your terrific choices, including the 2CE's and 3A Signatures. Brought back fond memories...and now the Wilson's are for sale. So, thank you. My question is somewhat mundane. Back on March 9th, you answered Mark's question about veneers on the 3A Signatures. My dealer didn't know the name of the wood for the pair on display, and told me to check your web site. Neither the site, nor the response to Mark, allow me to determine the wood I saw. To my eyes, it appeared to be light oak...not white oak as your site pictures for the 5As...it's darker than that. I'm sure it's not cherry, so that leaves me with oak, walnut, or maple as possible choices. But, any of those can be lighter or darker. So, how do I determine what's what? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, WE USE WHITE OAK SPECIES WOOD WHICH IS NOT WHITE. YOUR DEALER CAN LOOK AT THE SHIPPING BOXES IT WILL SAY WHAT THEY WERE. REMEMBER THEY ARE NOT VINYL AND WOOD VARIES TREE TO TREE.

David (6/25/06): Hello, I need a little help determining if my 2Wq subwoofer is working properly. My entire system was in storage for a few years and I just set it back up in the same room it was in before. The bottom end seemed very week from what I remembered, so I ran a couple of tests. My main speakers are 2C’s and I am using X-2 crossovers. The sensitivity pot is set properly for the 2C’s. The subwoofer passed the acid test, the speakers popped when I plugged it in. I used the method you described to check the crossover frequency, using a volt meter and a 1000Hz test tone. When I played the 80Hz tone the meter read .702, so the 33k X,s are a very good match. Here’s the kicker: I used the test method described by Stewart (3/22/06) below:1. Wire the subwoofer and a main speaker to separate speaker outputs on the amplifier. 2. Play a 80Hz test tone alternating between the main speaker and subwoofer. 3. If the proper capacitor is chosen, the main speakers and subwoofer will each have the same loudness. I do not have a Db meter, but the speaker is about 10 times as loud as the subwoofer by my ear. I pulled the bottom of the sub cabinet to make sure there wasn’t a dead animal in there or something equally stupid going on with the woofers, and everything looked fine. Is Stuart’s test valid? Should I send the sub in to be checked, or is this just a case of false memory? Thank you for your help.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE EAR IS LESS SENSITIVE AT LOW FREQUENCIES THAN HIGH FREQUENCIES THAT IS WHY THE 2C'S SOUND SO MUCH LOUDER. THE TEST YOU MENTIONED MAY WORK BUT YOU WOULD HAVE TO USE A SPL METER. IF YOU ARE USING JAZZ OR ROCK THERE SHOULD BE NO DIFFERENCE WITH A SUB OR NOT BECAUSE THE 2C'S ARE FLAT TO 32 HZ. USE ORGAN MUSIC WHICH GOES VERY LOW AND THERE SHOULD BE A DIFFERENCE. MOST OF THE TIME IF IT THUMPS IT IS WORKING. IF YOU WANT MORE BASS THAN IS ON THE RECORDING YOU WILL NEED A THUMPY WOOFER OR BASS CONTROLS ON YOUR PREAMP.

Greg (6/25/06): Mr. Vandersteen, I have owned Model 2ci speakers since 1990 and upgraded to 3a Signatures a couple of years ago. At the time I purchased my 3a's, I imagined that my most likely step forward from there would be to add a pair of 2Wq's and high-pass my 3a's. The introduction of the Quatro has complicated things. Can you please describe the advantages (apart from the room equalization) of the Quatros versus a pair of 3a signatures with 2Wq's? I have measured the frequency response of my 3a's with an SPL meter and the bass is relatively linear in my room. My second question is whether the lengths of cables running to the main speakers and the subwoofers should be of the same type and length? Thank you in advance for your time.

Answer: HELLO GREG, THE MID-BASS DRIVER ON THE QUATRO IS FASTER AND MUCH LOWER IN DISTORTION THAN THE 3A SIG'S. THE ENCLOSURE ON THE QUATRO IS VERY INERT ALLOWING A MUSH BLACKER BACKGROUND WHICH IMPROVES IMAGING A LOT. OTHER REFINEMENTS ALLOW THE QUATRO TO OUT PERFORM THE 3A SIG'S WITH SUBS IN EVERY WAY EXCEPT IN PEAK POWER IN THE DEEP BASS WHERE THE 2WQ'S HAVE ONE MORE DRIVER PER SIDE. THE WIRES ARE PROVIDED FOR THE 2WQ AND DO NOT NEED TO BE THE SAME LENGTH.

Ted (6/26/06): I have a pair of 2Ci'sI bought new long ago and I very happy with them. I have upgraded my system and I am considering upgrading to the 2Ce Sig's. Is it worth it? There is nothing I do not like about about the 2Ci's,so, how do they compare to the 2Ce Sig?

Answer: HELLO TED, YOU SHOULD VISIT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND AUDITION THE 2CE SIG AS EVERY SINGLE PART HAS BEEN UPGRADED OVER THE 20 YEARS SINCE YOURS WERE MANUFACTURED. YOU WILL RECOGNIZE WHAT WAS IMPORTANT THEN IS STILL IMPORTANT TO ME NOW, JUST MORE SO.

Jeff (6/26/06): In your archived FAQs from 11/1/04, #7, you address bi-wiring. You state that the wires should be the same, not ones separately best for treble or bass. At my Vandersteen dealer, he had Audioquest speaker cables...same "series", I think...but one was marked for treble, and one for bass. Is this incorrect, or are wires from the same manufacturer and series considered ok, even if dedicated to treble or bass? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, I WOULD ASK THE DEALER WHAT IS GOING ON, MAYBE THE ONE MARKED TREBLE IS A NEWER VERSION. YOU ARE NOT RESTRICTED TO THE SAME WIRE IT JUST GUARANTIES A SMOOTH TRANSITION THROUGH THE MIDRANGE. SOME DEALERS MAY HAVE FOUND COMBINATIONS THEY LIKE BETTER, GIVE IT A LISTEN AND SEE IF YOU AGREE.

Robin (6/26/06): Hello, I didn't find an email-address for direct contact, but I hope You'll have the time to review this question. I live in Finland and would potentially like to import a pair of 5A´s. I've owned big Dunlavys before and have since then changed speaker brand, but the time- and phase-coherent sound is very hard to beat. Thus I'm very interested in Your speakers and especially in the 5A.Now there is no Vandersteen-distributor in Finland, would it be possible to buy the speakers directly from You? I would also be more than willing to provide demos for other finish customers who might be interested in the brand and assist potential customers with imports (I've handled imports before so I know what it takes). I know there is a large group of audiophiles who appreciated the (coherent) Dunlavy-designs, the brand actually sold hundreds of pairs (including several SC-V and one SC-VI) in Finland, which has only 5 million inhabitants. I'm currently renovating an old house, which will feature a basement listening room with very extensive acoustic treatment, so I'm expecting the room to "sound" excellent when finished. I hope You have the time to consider this possibility, please let me know what You think. Best regards,

Answer: HELLO ROBIN, WE DO NOT SELL FACTORY DIRECT. FOR FOREIGN SALES CONTACT: DELRAMA INTERNATIONAL-FAX 480.367.1355

Phillip (6/27/06): I am looking to buy a used pair of 2ce signature's about 7 year old.  Is there a difference to the current model. thank you in advance

Answer: HELLO PHILIP, THERE ARE SEVERAL Q&A'S ON THIS SITE THAT ADDRESS THIS QUESTION YOU MIGHT WANT TO READ. THE SHORT ANSWER IS THERE HAVE BEEN MANY CHANGES SOME VERY SIGNIFICANT. SUGGEST YOU LISTEN TO THE PAIR YOU ARE CONSIDERING INSTEAD OF THE DEALERS DEMO'S WHICH WOULD BE DIFFERENT. IF YOU LIKE THEM BUY THEM, THE DIFFERENCE IS THEN MOOT.

Craig (6/28/06) Richard, Sorry to bother you with this question but I've run into a dead-end trying to find a PSE contact. I have an opportunity to buy a pair of PSE Studio V's, which I understand you've used extensively, to drive my 2Ce Signatures and I'm trying to find out if anyone is still servicing PSE products. I even tried calling Dean directly using a number I found on the web. I'm nervous about buying a product without knowledge of source for service should I ever need it. Do you know what PSE's status is? or do you know anyone who services these amps? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, I BELIEVE DEAN HAS MOVED ON TO OTHER THINGS. THE CORRECT ANSWER FOR ANYONE BUYING ANYTHING NO LONGER SUPPORTED BY A MANUFACTURE NO LONGER ACTIVELY IN BUSINESS SHOULD BE; KNOW A GOOD TECH FOR THE TIME THE INEVITABLE OCCURS.

 Kent (6/29/06): Hi Richard, I am considering a First Watt F1 amplifier for use with my 2W. F1 is made by Nelson Pass. The F1 is a current amp (as contrasted with a voltage amp). My goal is to try the F1 with both its single-end and balanced inputs. I asked Nelson Pass about using the 2W, and this was his response..."...if the subwoofer input takes its input from the output of the F1, then most likely you will want to use just one output leg for the signal and take the ground from the input ground of the F1, which is pin1 of the XLR or the ground of the RCA connector and also you would need to find out whether the input to the subwoofer amplifier is capacitively coupled, as the balanced outputs of the F1 are both live and at a 13.8V DC potential with respectto ground."Will my 2W be compatible with this amp (I also have M5-HP balanced xover)? If so, will I need to do special wiring to make it work?

Answer: HELLO KENT, THE 2W SUBWOOFER IS NOT CAP COUPLED ON ITS INPUT. I DO NOT KNOW ENOUGH ABOUT THE F1 AMPLIFIER TO MAKE A COMMENT, SHOULD THINGS GO WRONG. THE INPUT OF THE 2W IS A DIFFERENTIAL AMP FOR EACH CHANNEL AND THEM SUMMED. YOU SHOULD GIVE THIS INFO TO NELSON AND LET HIM ADVISE.

Paul (6/29/06): Hello, I have lC's, would I gain anything by using 4 conductor speaker wire as I do on the 3A Sigs. I know that the difference would be that the connection on the speaker end would be the same as the connection on the amp end of my 3A Sigs. Wonderful sound, I am enjoying immensely. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, MAY BE, MAY BE NOT. YOU WILL HAVE TO TRY IT AND LISTEN. YOU COULD HAVE TRIED THIS AND KNOWN THE CORRECT ANSWER BEFORE THIS RESPONSE IS POSTED. IN THIS GREAT HOBBY, WHY ARE PEOPLE SOOOOO SLOW TO TRY THINGS INSTEAD OF ASKING SOMEONE?

Ray (6/30/06) Hello, are there any plans, or could you perhaps be bribed :) to release a speaker model for use with CARA? This is not meant as an endorsement of the software, but would be exceedingly useful to those of us who use it anyway. If not, could you explain why? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO RAY, YOU CAN USE CARA TO HELP LOCATE ANY OF OUR SPEAKERS TODAY. AS FAR AS SPEAKER CORRECTION FOR THE ROOM I DO NOT BELIEVE, EXCEPT BELOW 150HZ THAT IT HAS ANY THING TO OFFER AND COULD DO A LOT OF DAMAGE. I BELIEVE THAT A TIME AND PHASE CORRECT SPEAKER SHOULD BE USED IN A WAY THAT REPRESENTS THE MUSICAL INSTRUMENT'S) THAT WERE RECORDED. IMAGINE THAT CARA MEASURES YOUR ROOM TO HAVE A SUCK OUT AT 500HZ. IF WE MOVED A 9 FOOT GRAND PIANO INTO YOUR ROOM WOULD WE ASK THE PIANO PLAYER TO HIT THE KEYS AROUND 500HZ HARDER BECAUSE OF IT? THIS IS OVER SIMPLIFIED BUT IS WHAT ROOM CORRECTION DOES. BECAUSE OUR EAR/BRAIN DOES FOCUS ON THE DIRECT SOUND VERSES REFLECTED SOUND ABOVE 150HZ THAT WOULD BE A STRANGE PIANO SOUND. IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT THE SPEAKER PRESERVE THE WAVEFORM THAT MAKES EVERY INSTRUMENT AND VOICE WHAT IT IS. SOME PROGRAMS CORRECT BOTH PHASE AND TIME FOR SPEAKERS THAT ARE NOT CORRECT BUT THIS INVOLVES A LOT OF DIGITAL WORK WITH IT'S OWN COMPROMISES. IT'S MUCH EASIER IN MY OPINION TO MAKE THE SPEAKER CORRECTLY IN THE FIRST PLACE AND TREAT THE ROOM WITH DIFFUSION AND AS LITTLE ABSORPTION AS NEEDED. SOME WOULD SAY YOU CAN DO ANYTHING WHILE DIGITAL WITHOUT SONIC COMPROMISE. HA! TELL THAT TO THE AUDIOPHILE WHO IS TRYING TO FIND THE BEST CABLE BETWEEN HIS TRANSPORT AND DAC AND THEY ALL SOUND DIFFERENT! THIS IS LITERALLY ONLY MOVING BITS NOT PROCESSING THEM.

Tim (6/30/06): Hi Richard, this is Tim. I got to meet and talk to you a few years ago at the Stereo Shoppe in Selinsgrove, PA. I hope that you can get back to visit Dale there sometime in the near future. As for my question, it is regarding the VCC-5. I have seen a picture of the back of the VCC-5, and it looks like it is not bi-wire able. Knowing that this is the recommended center channel speaker for the 3A Sigs and the 5A, I was surprised to see that you cannot bi-wire the VCC-5. I'm just curious as to why this is, given the importance of a center channel speaker to a great home theater setup, and the fact that the 3A Sigs and 5A speakers are bi-wire able. Did you find that there is no benefit to making center channel speakers bi-wire able? Thank you!

Answer: HELLO TIM, THE ONLY TIME BI-WIRING IS A BENEFIT IS WHEN THE SPEAKER GOES VERY LOW AND THEREFORE HAS A SIGNIFICANT AMOUNT OF MASS IN THE DRIVER'S). THIS MASS CREATES A LOT OF BACK EMF WHICH CAUSES SIGNIFICANT CURRENT MODULATION. CHECK THE FAQ ON BI-WIRING AND HOW IT WORKS. YOU WILL FIND THAT SPEAKERS WITH SMALL DRIVERS WILL HAVE LITTLE OR NO BENEFIT SO THE MONEY IS BETTER SPENT ON A BETTER TWEETER FOR INSTANCE.

Philip (6/30/06) I am looking to buy a used pair of 2ce signature ,the person selling them says they are seven years old did you make the signatures seven years ago? what would be the difference from today's model? other than dust. thank you in advance

Answer: HELLO PHILIP, THERE HAVE BEEN MANY FAQ'S ANSWERED ON USED SPEAKERS, HOW TO BUY THEM, AND WHAT THE DIFFERENCES ARE. PLEASE PERUSE THIS FAQ SECTION FOR YOUR ANSWERS.

Kent (6/30/06) Hi Richard, thank you for your previous response regarding the First Watt F1 (current amp). Nelson Pass wrote this..."If the input to the sub is differential, then you can use both terminals at the output, but since we don't know whether they will reject DC, then we should place a capacitor in series with each so that the sub amplifier doesn't see DC regardless. I don't know the input impedance, but I would guess that10 uF would be enough, and as a precaution, I would turn the F1 on before the subwoofer amp. "Please let me know if you agree with the capacitor, or if you think I should let Nelson know the input impedance, etc. Best Regards, Kent

Answer: HELLO KENT, INPUT IMPEDANCE IS 200K. IF THE F1 IS A CURRENT AMP HOW MUCH POWER WILL THE AMP PUT INTO THE 200K RESISTOR. THAT RESISTOR IS A 1/8TH WATT.

Dan (7/02/06): Hello Richard, my name's Dan and I'm a long time Vandersteen fan (of the speakers, sorry but we've never met, though my dealer says you're a wonderful guy...). I started with the 2ce and now own a pair of 3A, there have been numerous amplifiers, cables, etc, the usual audiophile nervosa thing... I have noticed that the 3A is quite sensitive to amplification and cables and the best setup I've had was with passive bi-amping two channels driven full range each to a different bi-wire post. This was the best sound I've achieved with the 3a by far, even though it was with solid state (and a few years ago). Thanks to a child in the Boston University theatre program (costs a dream system every year) I find myself in possession (yes, legally) of a Yamaha DME32 digital processing engine capable of n-way crossover and user defined filtering. My thinking is (and I know this must have occurred to you) replace all those pesky inductors and capacitors with an 'equivalent' digital filter and quad-amp my beautiful 3As. So, I was wondering if there is any public information available about the crossover curves, driver characteristics, phase vs. frequency, your intentions in the crossover design, etc.? I know I can go in there and measure things, build a spice simulation (well, ask someone to help me), etc., etc. But it seems so much simpler to ask the master. I'd love to hear your thoughts on this. Thanks,

Answer: HELLO DAN, WHAT YOU ARE ASKING IS POSSIBLE TO DO AND WE HAVE EXPERIMENTED WITH D.S.P. PROCESSING FOR THE SPEAKER. ALL OF OUR SPEAKER X-OVER'S ARE DIALED IN FOR EACH SPEAKER. EACH DRIVER HAS SOME IMPERFECTIONS NO MATER HOW CAREFULLY WE MATCH THEM. THE MATCHED DRIVERS ARE INSTALLED INTO THE CABINET THEN THE SPEAKER GOES INTO THE ANECHOIC CHAMBER TO BE DIALED IN. WE LOOK AT THE ACOUSTIC OUTPUT OF ALL THE DRIVERS AND MANIPULATE THE NETWORKS ON THE X-OVER SO THAT THE INTERACTION OF THE DRIVER AND THE X-OVER ARE WHAT WE WANT. EVEN IF THERE WERE NO PRICE TO BE PAID FOR ALL THIS MANIPULATION IN THE DIGITAL DOMAIN (WHICH THERE IS BIG TIME) UNLESS DONE ON A ONE BY ONE BASIS THE RESULT WOULD BE INFERIOR. AIR CORE INDUCTORS AND HIGH QUALITY FILM CAPACITORS INTERACTING WITH THEIR RESPECTIVE DRIVERS WILL ALWAYS BE MORE TRANSPARENT THAN ALL THAT ELECTRONIC CIRCUITRY ESPECIALLY DIGITAL. I SUGGEST YOU CONTINUE TO DO WHAT YOU ARE DOING AND SHOULD YOU BUY A TURNTABLE YOUR HIGH REZ SOURCE WILL NOT BE CORRUPTED BY THE DIGITAL PROCESSING.

Stefano (7/02/06):  Hello, First of all, excuse for my bad English. I'm considering to buy a 2ce Signature, but I'm not sure about the compatibility with my power amplifier, a Conrad Johnson MV55. The room measure 4,5x5,5mt.The sound of CJ and his 45+45w are right for the 2ce? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO STEFANO, IT IS ENOUGH POWER FOR SOME PEOPLE. I SUGGEST YOU BRING THE AMPS TO THE DEALER WITH SOME OF YOUR MUSIC AND SEE IF IT IS ENOUGH FOR YOU.

Michael (7/02/06): I am looking to buy an integrated amplifier for my 2ce sig that I bought last December. Currently I am driving them with an av denon (avr 2106).I know that I haven't heard anything from my speakers with this amp but I am already very enthusiastic with their sound. Can you please give some advice on some brands of amplifiers that will make my speakers "sing"? What about valve amplifiers? Can they drive them? My budget is up to 2000$.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, I SUGGEST YOU MAKE AN APPOINTMENT WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND ASK WHAT YOUR OPTIONS ARE FOR $2000. MOST IMPORTANT IS THAT YOU WILL BE ABLE TO LISTEN TO THE RECOMMENDATION AND SEE IF YOU AGREE.  FOR TUBES AT THAT PRICE THEY PROBABLY WILL HAVE TO BE USED.

John (7/03/06) I own and love the 2CE's - I just upgraded my amp to a rotel 130WPC amp, and am very happy with the result, but still come across those who have me second guessing my choice since they have much more power in their systems and claim I need more reserve for the momentary orchestral peaks and operatic peaks and highs in the music I like. My listening room is 16ft x 24 ft. Any advice? Thanks

Answer: HELLO JOHN, BECAUSE THIS IS MY FORUM I THINK IT'S TIME I ASK A QUESTION. WHY ARE SO MANY OF THE QUESTIONS ON THIS SITE FROM PEOPLE WHO QUESTION THEIR OWN OBSERVATIONS? DUDE! IF IT SOUNDS GOOD TO YOU, IT IS GOOD! WHO GIVES A RATS ASS HOW MUCH POWER YOUR FRIENDS HAVE, MAYBE THEY SUFFER FROM NAPOLEON COMPLEX. 130 WATTS IS A LOT OF POWER ESPECIALLY IF YOU FACTOR IN THE TYPICAL 3DB HEADROOM MOST AMPLIFIERS HAVE(260 WATTS) AGAIN IF IT WORKS IT WORKS.

Ron (7/04/06): I have Nagra VPA mono-block amplifiers - rated 50 w/ch. Are they likely to be able to achieve the full performance potential of the 5As? My room is open space with the main listening area 16 feet x 20 feet x 10 feet. Thank you.

Answer: HELLO RON, I WOULD AUDITION THIS COMBINATION AND MAKE SURE THE LISTENING LEVELS ARE ENOUGH FOR YOU. THESE CUTE TRIODE AMPLIFIERS ARE GREAT SOUNDING BUT WILL ONLY PLAY SO LOUD. IN MY OPINION THESE WILL ACHIEVE FULL PERFORMANCE POTENTIAL WITHIN THEIR POWER. THEY ARE VERY GOOD SOUNDING. YOUR PROBLEM IS THAT IF YOU LIKE THE SOUND OF THESE AMPS AND THEY ARE NOT LOUD ENOUGH IT IS GOING TO COST A LOT OF MONEY TO GET THE SAME SOUND AT A HIGHER POWER LEVEL.

Jeff (7/05/06):  I'm considering the purchase of either 3A Sigs or Quatros. Forgive me if you've answered these questions elsewhere, but if so, I didn't see it. On the Quatros, are there any sonic and/or component differences between the sock and wood versions? One dealer said that the wood version incorporated a few enhancements to the components, e.g., to the tweeters. I've only been able to audition the sock version and wonder if, apart from esthetics, there might be other differences for me to consider. On the 3A Sigs, my question relates to room size. My room is 13 by 13 (carpeted), and although I realize that sound quality relates to much more than just size, do you have any rule of thumb on the minimum size space for this speaker? The only other stuff in this room for now is an upholstered chair opposite the speakers, and a component rack to the right of the right speaker. So, with the chair against the rear wall, and the Sigs about 2 feet from the opposite wall, my ears are roughly 8-9 ft. away. I like the "bigger" sound of the 3A vs the 2ce, but wonder if my room might be better suited to a smaller sound. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, CHECK OUT Q&A (BILL 5/2/06) FOR THE LOW DOWN ON THE QUATRO. YOUR ROOM IS SQUARE AND WILL BE A PROBLEM IN THE BASS FOR THE MODEL THREE'S. I SUGGEST THE QUATRO BECAUSE OF THEIR ROOM BASS COMPENSATION.  THE PERFORMANCE OF EITHER QUATRO WILL BE HEAD AND SHOULDERS ABOVE THE 3A SIG'S ANYWAY.

Joseph (7/06/06): Will the powered subwoofer on the Model 5/5A work fine with 100v/50hz instead of normal US of 120v/60hz or do I need to get a step down transformer? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JOSEPH, THE MODEL 5 WILL BE A PROBLEM AND NEEDS TO BE MODIFIED AT THE FACTORY. THE 5A WILL WORK FINE. BY THE WAY IT WOULD BE A STEP-UP TRANSFORMER FROM 100 TO 120.

Mike (7/04/06): You're comments about turntables being a higher resolution source than CD triggered my curiosity. Is this because of the limitations (flaws) in the CD format such as pressing quality, error correction, samples rates, etc. or is it a fundamental problem with digital? Since many records come from digital records is it the CD format that is the problem not digital? I like the convenience of digital but wish for a higher resolution format than CD. I am hoping that the highest resolution recording technology exists using digital in the recording studio?

Answer: HELLO MIKE, COULD BE ALL OF THE ABOVE. ALL I KNOW IS THAT A RECORD MADE FROM A DIGITAL MASTER SOUNDS BETTER THAN A CD. NO QUESTION A RECORD MADE FROM ANALOG MASTER IS BETTER. AT THIS TIME THE FORMAT MUSIC IS AVAILABLE ON THAT HAS THE MOST INFORMATION IS VINYL! WITH LOW FI SYSTEMS THIS IS NO BIGGIE, MPEG WOULD WORK BUT HIGH REZ SYSTEMS CAN ONLY BE FULLY APPRECIATED ON VINYL.

Reynold (7/06/06): I recently bought a brand new 2ce signature with SN 57208 here in Jakarta, Indonesia. My components: ARC VT130se,CJ Premier 17ls,Ah Tjoeb cdp, VandenHul the First interconnects and Cardas speaker cables. I have great respect for the 2ce after listening to friends' audio systems with 2ces,thus I sold my Merlin VSMs. My concern: after listening (break-in stage am aware is 150hrs) for 3 days the lack of highs is so severe. I did manage my expectations (not to expect Merlin kind of highs) but it is really very dull, and I doubt if it will greatly improve even with break-in. Need your help, could it be a factory defect?

Answer: HELLO REYNOLD,  I KNOW YOUR AMPLIFIER IT IS VERY GOOD. YOUR PREAMP IS KNOWN TO BE VERY GOOD BUT POLITE. YOUR INTERCONNECT AND SPEAKER WIRES ARE VERY DARK USUALLY USED WITH SPEAKERS THAT MEASURE HOT IN THE HIGH FREQ (CHECK MEASUREMENTS IN STEREOPHILE AND NOTICE HOW MANY SPEAKERS ARE LOUDER IN THE HIGHS THAN THE MIDS). IT IS IMPOSSIBLE FOR BOTH SPEAKERS TO HAVE A PROBLEM OUT OF THE BOX. I SUSPECT TO MANY DARK COMPONENTS IN THE SYSTEM. IT LOOKS LIKE A SYSTEM DESIGNED TO TAME A VERY, VERY BRIGHT SPEAKER. I WOULD TRY SOME DIFFERENT WIRES MAYBE EVEN LESS ROOM TREATMENT IF YOU HAVE ANY.

?????? (7/08/06): Hi Richard, If side wall reflections are NOT an issue in the listening room, would you recommend Vandersteen speakers placed facing straight ahead or do you prefer toe-in? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO ???????, FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE MANUAL ON TOE- IN. EVERY ROOM IS DIFFERENT SO EXPERIMENT WITH TOE-IN (IT'S EASY AND FREE). IF THE SIDE WALLS ARE 4 FEET AWAY OR MORE THE TOE-IN WILL PROBABLY BE LESS OR STRAIGHT.

Matt (7/08/06): Richard, I've had the pleasure of listening to the 3A Sig at Ayre's sound room - fantastic sound, and at a fair price (but still a bit beyond my current budget). In this forum, I've read that the 2ce Sig is frequently updated, including a "significant" update in Feb 2005. Could you please give a short description of the changes, including the sonic benefits? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO MATT, ALL THE CHANGES ARE A MOOT POINT AND DID NOT CAUSE THE 2CE SIG'S TO RIVAL THE 3A SIG'S. TRY TO FIND A GOOD USED PAIR OF 3A SIG'S WITHIN DRIVING DISTANCE.

Brien (7/08/06): Sir, I just purchased a pair of Vandersteen Model 4 speakers. Now I need a owners manual and information on the power requirements of these speakers, especially the low end woofers. Thank you, Brien.

Answer: HELLO BRIEN, THERE IS NO MANUAL AVAILABLE FOR THE MODEL 4. THIS SPEAKER MUST BE BI-AMPLIFIED WITH THE WX-4 ELECTRONIC X-OVER. A GOOD 100 WATT HIGH CURRENT AMPLIFIER IS ALL THAT NEEDED. IF YOU HAVE ANY FURTHER QUESTIONS CALL THE FACTORY 559-582-0324.

Michael (7/09/06): I am looking into a home theater system for a small room. The room will have a two channel set-up and a separate 5 channel set up. So you can imagine that space is a big problem. So I was thinking of a multi channel system consisting of 2-pairs of VM-1 signatures and the Vcc-5 signature center. I was wondering if the VSM-1 signatures would do well as front channels. My room is 12 ft x 15ft.

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, THE VSM-1 WILL WORK VERY WELL FOR FRONT SPEAKERS IN A 5.1 SYSTEM. I WOULD ENTERTAIN A 2WQ FOR THE FRONT CHANNELS AND A V2W FOR L.F.E. SIGNATURE VSM-1 FOR THE REAR WOULD BE OVERKILL, THE MONEY SAVED COULD GO TOWARDS THE 2WQ. FOR THIS SYSTEM TO WORK YOU WOULD NEED A SEPARATE PROCESSOR AND AMPLIFIERS OR A A/V RECEIVER WITH PRE OUT/ MAIN IN FOR THE FRONT CHANNELS.

David (7/10/06): What is the proper method for bi-wire amplification of the 2CE speakers? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, BI-WIRE HAS NOTHING TO DO WITH AMPLIFICATION. LOOK AT THE DRAWING IN YOUR OWNERS MANUAL AND YOU WILL SEE IT INVOLVES TWO SETS OF WIRE FROM THE SAME OUTPUT TERMINALS ON THE AMPLIFIER. ANY FURTHER QUESTIONS CALL TECH 559-582-0324.

Pradeep (7/11/06): Hi Richard, Is it possible for you to send me the Service Manual for the 2Wq Subwoofer. I am requesting this because my 2Wq Subwoofer needs to be repaired and it works out to be very expensive to send the 2wq to your factory from India where I reside now. Awaiting a favorable reply. Many Thanks !

Answer: HELLO PRADEEP, A SERVICE MANUAL FOR ANY OF OUR PRODUCTS IS NOT AVAILABLE. WE DO ALL REPAIRS HERE AT THE FACTORY. SOME OF THE PARTS IN THE 2WQ AMPLIFIER ARE IN LIMITED SUPPLY BECAUSE THEY ARE NO LONGER MANUFACTURED. WE HAVE AMPLE SUPPLY FOR MANY MANY YEARS AS LONG AS THEY ARE NOT WASTED. I RECOMMEND THAT YOU SEND THE AMPLIFIER MODULE COMPLETE TO US FOR REPAIR. WE SERVICE THEM AS A MODULE FOR $160.00 US OR FREE IF IT IS STILL UNDER WARRANTY. FREIGHT COSTS WOULD BE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY AND THE REPAIRS USUALLY TAKE 1 OR 2 DAYS. DO NOT SEND IN ONLY THE CIRCUIT BOARD OR SERVICE WILL NOT BE AVAILABLE.

(7/13/06): Yesterday I bought a pair of your speakers, actually I do not have mine yet, but the dealer loaned me a pair. I had gone a bit out of budget doing this and was a bit worried about the response when I got home, but I had to tell you: my wife said, "Do we have to sleep tonight? I need to listen to all of our music. I've never heard it before." Thank you

Answer: HELLO HAPPY CAMPER, THANK YOU FOR YOUR COMMENT, ENJOY.

Jim (7/14/06): I'm planning a move to South America. Do you make a dual-voltage (or 220v only) version of the subwoofers or Quatros? Thanks

Answer: HELLO JIM, THE 2WQ WOULD NEED TO BE MODIFIED BY US FOR 220. THE QUATRO IS AVAILABLE IN 120V ONLY AND WOULD REQUIRE A 300VA STEP DOWN TRANSFORMER. FOR SOME REASON THE DISTRIBUTOR IN SOUTH AFRICA CLAIMS IMPROVED PERFORMANCE. MAYBE ONE MORE STAGE OF LINE ISOLATION IS THE REASON.

Tom (7/16/06): Richard, Recently was told by friends there are upgrades available to my Model 2C's (serials 28290c and 28291c). Is this true and what is the upgrade and cost. Thank you for your great speakers. They have traveled a lot since first purchased in California. Nevada, California again, Key West, Florida, Vienna, Virginia, and now on to South Carolina.

Answer: HELLO TOM, MODEL 1'S AND 2'S WERE NEVER UPGRADEABLE.  THERE WERE A FEW 2CE'S (LATE MODELS) THAT COULD BE UPGRADED, CHECK AN EARLIER POST FOR DETAILS.

Jim (7/16/06): Richard I bought a pair of Vandersteen model 2 off eBay. they work perfect, but I did not get the jumper so I can run one set of speaker wires or the manual. are these still available threw you or a dealer. I live in Omaha where there is no dealer at this time.

Answer: HELLO JIM, JUMPERS WERE NEVER AVAILABLE FROM US, WE BELIEVE IN BI-WIRING.

Robert (7/16/06): I've noticed that a pair of Vandersteen Quatro Woods are pictured on a Stereophile blog. They mention that they have 5A Signature tweeters. The products page here lists the Quatros as having 3A Signature tweeters. Have the tweeters been upgraded on the Woods? Which tweeter accompanies the "Woods"?  Is the Stereophile blog correct? Thanks ever so much for your time in advance. Also, it would be very helpful to know which finishes are available for the Woods and their corresponding prices. I only see quotes for 5A veneers and because there is so much more wood on the Quatro Woods I'm assuming that a price increase would accompany their implementation.

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, CHECK OUT Q&A BILL 5-2-06 ABOUT THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN FABRIC AND WOOD QUATRO. ALL THE WOOD OPTIONS AVAILABLE ON THE 5A'S ARE ALSO AVAILABLE ON THE WOOD QUATRO'S FOR THE SAME PRICE, EXCEPT THEY WILL BE SATIN FINISH NOT HIGH GLOSS.

Stephen (7/17/06): Mr. Vandersteen, are there any particular budget cables (<$200.00 for 30ft pair). or what gauge would you recommend going between a Bryston 3bst and your 1C's. I've found a few, but am not sure of the synergy and don't want to waste a lot of money. Audioquest GBC (12awg, 6 conductor), DH Labs T14, ???? Any preferences?

Answer: HELLO STEPHEN, I HAVE NOT HEARD A CORRELATION BETWEEN SOUND AND WIRE GAUGE. DO NOT PAY MORE THAN A $1.00 A FOOT FOR WIRE UNLESS YOU AUDITION IT ON YOUR SPEAKERS. THERE IS A LOT SAID ABOUT WIRE IN THE FAQ SECTION.

Robert (7/17/06) Richard First let me Thank You and Richard Hardesty for leading me to the awesome sound that I have found with your products, your article in Widescreen Review is what lead to my trying your product and I have been very pleased since. I’m at the point of upgrading the amplification for my 3A’s, my question concerns vertical bi-amping. I’ve enjoyed Richard Hardesty’s writings in The Audio Perfectionist concerning your speakers and in one of his configurations he had his 3A Signatures vertically bi-amped with a Theta Dreadnaught (One amplifier module driving the Hi input and one module driving the Low input). With the 3A’s and 2Wq combination would you recommend using a single amplifier with 200 watts with bi-wiring or two 100 watt amplifiers in a vertical bi-amp configuration? Also I liked your comments about analog; I started with an older Rega P3 now I have a heavily modified P25. Your speakers really show the differance between digital and analog. Thank You for your time.

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, FOR THE MOST I THINK BI-AMPING IS OVER RATED AND NOT THE BEST WAY TO GO. BI-WIRING WITH SHORT SPEAKER WIRES FROM A 200 WATT MONO AMPLIFIER NEXT TO THE SPEAKER WILL RUN CIRCLES AROUND THE OTHER OPTIONS. KEEP SPINNING THAT ANALOG.

Chicken (7/17/06): Since your Quatros Woods are: physically smaller than your 5A's (1/8th less surface area) and have about 1/3 more wood (the surface area reduces at the top of Quatros where the extra wood would be placed) that gives us a 20.5% increase(33% minus 12.5%) coupled with about a 10% increase for manufacture and  material- we get a 30.5% reasonable increase for upgrades in wood choice. All this gibberish means that it would be reasonable for you to charge 1/3 more for wood upgrades from your 5A veneer choices to those offered to a Quatro Wood purchase. Vandersteen speakers have always been known for their superlative sound but have always lacked in the beauty and practicality department. It makes good business sense to make beauty upgrades more affordable because they, in turn, make your products easier to live with visually. More visually appealing products also convey a greater level of taste. "WOW...not only do the sound phenomenal but just LOOK at them- they're beautiful...works of art!" instead of..."Yeah...they sound really good but, would you get a load of those sock things!" Fabric retains fragrance, can't be washed, and can be easily snagged or damaged. The more beautiful wood you send out there- the better you look...period. Think about it. And also, Richard...thanks so very much for giving the world really swell sounding stuff. I appreciate your efforts more than you might ever guess.

Answer: HELLO CHICKEN, OUR PRODUCTS HAVE ALWAYS BEEN PRICED ACCORDING TO WHAT THEY COST TO MANUFACTURE. MOST PEOPLE WHO HAVE BOUGHT VANDERSTEEN SEE THE BEAUTY IN VERY EFFICIENT DESIGN AND ARE LOOKING FOR THE HIGHEST PERFORMANCE AVAILABLE, NOT FURNITURE. I ASSURE YOU IF I HAD TO FEED MY FAMILY ON THE SALES OF OUR (BEAUTIFUL) SPEAKERS WE WOULD HAVE BEEN IN A BREAD LINE LONG AGO. HAVING SAID THAT YOU CAN HAVE IT BOTH WAYS NOW, BUT IT COSTS MONEY. TO THIS DAY WE STILL SELL MORE SOCK VERSIONS BY FAR.

Dan (7/18/06): Dan from Inland Empire: Richard I can think of two ways to make your subwoofers work, firstly sample the signal with a computer and make any adjustments necessary or two and more likely preprofile the subwoofer for any dispersant signals ( gross vibrations & frequencies inabilities ) and program these out when ever they occur. Which of these methods have you employed? It is impossible to tell by your rather vague description.

Answer: HELLO DAN, WE USE FEED FORWARD WHICH IS AS YOU SAY A PRE-CORRECTION IN REAL TIME OF KNOWN PROBLEMS. OUR "VAGUE DESCRIPTION" IS NOT DESIGNED TO TEACH SOME ONE HOW TO MAKE ONE JUST INFORM THOSE WANTING TO BUY ONE. MOST PEOPLE ARE BORED BY THESE THINGS AND JUST LISTEN TO IT AND MAKE A DECISION.

Joseph (7/20/06) Can you please let me know if the new 'analog switching' amps, like the Nuforce, will work with the Model 5's. I have gotten feedback directly from Nuforce and they state that they can not say whether there would be a problem or not. The technical aspect of this is way above my head, but I have done a 'cut and paste' of their response here..."We usually point the finger back to the active subwoofer manufacturer since we can't tell how the active subwoofer is wired internally. Martin Logan Summit is one such example where ML upgraded the speaker in 2006 to allow for active woofer with amps that have half rail DC offset on the speaker terminal. With so many amps using Icepower module internally (Icepower also has DC offset), I think a lot of active subwoofer manufacturers will have to accommodate this issue." I recently heard the Nuforce and was impressed, plus they won't cause me to take out a second loan on the house;) But I am worried if they would be compatible with the power subwoofer in the Model 5's. If you have any advice, it would be greatly appreciated. Thanks!

Answer: HELLO JOSEPH, THEY ARE NOT COMPATIBLE. THE NEWER VERSIONS OF THE ICE POWER AND MANY OTHER MODULES NO LONGER HAVE THE DC ON THE OUTPUT. IT IS IMPORTANT TO KNOW THAT THESE AMPLIFIERS ARE ANALOG IN YES, BUT ARE STILL SWITCHING AMPLIFIERS. WE SHOULD CALL THEM WHAT THEY ARE INSTEAD OF PLAYING SEMANTICS. THE MODEL 5'S ARE HIGH REZ SPEAKERS BE SURE YOU LISTEN BEFORE YOU BUY. ITS NOT A GOOD DEAL AT ANY PRICE IF IT DOES NOT SOUND GOOD.

Randall (7/20/06) Have the M5 HP's changed in the past two years? I just bought a used pair and I was wondering if they are as up to date as a new pair. I am using the M5 with mono-block amps, a pair of 2Wqs and a pair of 3A sigs. The manufacturer says the input impedance of the amps is 100k ohms each. Am I correct I can safely test my system using the M5 set at 200k, 100k, 75k and 50k to determine what sounds best? Can I can also safely perform the digital voltmeter test with the 1000 hz and 80hz test CD you described in an earlier post? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO RANDALL, THERE HAVE BEEN CHANGES BUT NEW ONES WERE NOT AN OPTION OR YOU WOULD HAVE BOUGHT THEM. THE DIFFERENCES ARE MOOT THEN SO I WONT BOTHER YOU WITH THE DETAILS. YOU CAN CONTACT THE FACTORY FOR A COPY OF THE SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR 2WQ USE. YOU CAN USE THE TEST DESCRIBED ON A EARLIER POST.

Sam (7/21/06) I am pretty well decided on Vandys for my next purchase, am moving from old tannoys.In a personal exchange with an old Vandersteen 2ce owner, he recommended trying, if I had the bucks - the new deqx pre with room correction, speaker correction etc. which I have researched. I am very pleased with the British sound, laid back with excellent mid range, which the Vandys offer along with proper bass, missing from such lines as Harbeth and Spendor. I have heard a pair and want to go for them.  He also told me the Vandersteens would be ideal to usewith deqx as the crossovers are easily accessible - i.e. the speaker posts are right-on the crossover. Could you assist me in this? My choice would be the 2 or 3 sig as my room is not too large, more of a study. 15 by 14 feet, which I suspect the 3/s would overload. Any feedback on this too would be greatly appreciated. I have yet to read the full length of the tech page so please accept apologies if this is a redundant question.

Answer: HELLO SAM, READ Q/A (DAN 7/02/06) IT WILL ANSWER YOUR QUESTION. IF YOU WILL HAVE OVERLOAD IN THE BASS IN THAT SIZE ROOM PERUSE THIS FORUM ON HOW TO SOLVE THIS WITH A HIGH-PASS. THE 2'S OR 3'S WILL WORK ABOUT THE SAME, MIGHT AS WELL GO FOR HIGH REZ AND GET THE 3'S.

Louie (7/21/06): Hello Richard, My Quatros were delivered in Jun05. This was before the Quatro manual was available. After reading the Stereophile review, I realized that the manual was now available and had my dealer obtain a copy for me. Using the manual I wanted to check and adjust the listening height of my Quatros. The problem that I encountered is that my early Quatros did not come with washers or rear cones. My Quatros came with a set of short and a set of long rear spikes. Since the manual only discuses the height adjustment in terms of washers, I am unable to perform this critical setup. How can I go about purchasing the correct hardware?--Louie PS: I just have to say that these speakers are one of the best purchases that I have ever made. Thanks for designing such a wonderful product.

Answer:  HELLO LOUIE, THE LATER VERSIONS OF THE QUATRO'S DO NOT USE CONES ON THE REAR ONLY SPIKES. THE BEST WAY IS TO FIND THE SWEET SPOT IS BY EAR OR INTERPOLATE.  THE WASHERS ARE 1/16" THICK SO YOU CAN ADJUST THE JAM WASHER ACCORDINGLY. GLAD YOU ARE ENJOYING YOUR QUATRO'S.

Mike (7/21/06) After reading the comment by "Chicken" about wood finishes I have to disagree. I have owned many speakers in the last 30 years and not only prefer the sound of my 2CE signatures to anything I have previously owned but I also prefer the look. Wood finishes go in and out of style, require oiling, if marked are very difficult to repair, sunlight can also lift the finish, etc. The sock can be replaced if damaged, is easily vacuumed and is visually non intrusive. My wife says that speakers that look like furniture don't hide the fact that they are speakers and prefers the Vandersteen look (and sound) over anything I have shown her. I think the look of the Quattro sock version in black is even nicer than the 5A. Wish the Quattro or 5A were in my budget.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, NICE OF YOU TO USE YOUR NAME. IT IS BECAUSE OF CUSTOMERS LIKE YOU THAT WE ARE STILL HERE AFTER 30 YEARS IN OUR FIRST INCARNATION. THANK YOU AND YOUR WIFE FOR YOUR SUPPORT AND 100'S OF THOUSANDS LIKE YOU. WE AT VANDERSTEEN AUDIO ARE VERY HAPPY WE CAN ACCOMMODATE BOTH CUSTOMERS TODAY ALBEIT EXPENSIVE. WE STILL OFFER MORE HI-TECH DRIVERS AND X-OVER COMPONENTS (NON CHINESE) THAN MOST, FOR THE MONEY.

 

Sam (7/22/06) Richard - first off not to bother you with redundant questions, I read through your entire FAQ  last night and I must applaud you for running this feedback forum. The only other manufacturer I know who comes close is Alan Shaw of Harbeth, he is right in there too. Thanks again! not only for your effort but patience too. I am moving from Tannoys (just sold), and Harbeths in another system and love the British sound, but having recently heard you products for the first time, both in nice audiophile setups [one a Heart Surgeon and the other, wouldn't you know - a plumber!!]. I am sold on them. Quite overwhelmed at listening to their phase correct sound, fine mid-range not to mention with the addition of bass - after your designing protocol of no proper music without the foundation of bass. Wow! I have been missing this for 25 years! Also a great thank you to the writer for Audio Critic who did the long article on your speaker line, written so well in fact, seems his conclusions are indisputable. What more can I say. You have a great ally there, as well as Shane Beuttner (sic) of TAS. My question is simple though. My room which is a study is almost 16 feet wide, and almost 14 feet deep. As the right side of the room has a writing table that comes into the room about 3 feet - my listening space is more or less square although the room is technically wider. I noted in reading the FAQ and site materials that the 3 Sigs are guaranteed upgradeable, the the 2Ce Sigs are not, if I read correctly. Do you think then the 3 signatures would be appropriate for my room? This would simplify the delivery of bass, and not possibly mandate 2ce Sigs with additional subwoofers. Do you think the 3's may overload the room? and if only slightly is it possible to roll off the bass so that it may not be so deep. With the upgradeability factor, I am tempted to go for the 3's as they are not vastly larger than the 2's and according to reviewers a much superior listening experience. As I have a 3B SST Bryston, I may add another and bi amp. I have heard your speakers with Bryston SST equipment, their noise floor is the blackest of any amplifier I have heard - on your speakers (2ce sigs, and 3Sigs) they are incredible - especially notable on solo string, piano and string quartet music. Thanks for you time and congrats on your hard work in this forum. Being an entrepreneur myself (bookseller) I know the importance and significance of customers dealing with the 'owner' or in your case the 'designer / manufacturer'. Much appreciated. Sam

Answer: HELLO SAM, WOW ALL THAT WRITING, AND READING ALL THE FAQ'S AND STILL A QUESTION ABOUT HOW A SPEAKER WILL SOUND IN A ROOM I HAVE NEVER BEEN IN. AS STATED IN SEVERAL FAQ'S DIMENSIONS DO NOT DETERMINE HOW A ROOM WILL SOUND THERE ARE MANY OTHER CONTRIBUTING FACTORS.  YOU NEED A VANDERSTEEN DEALER TO VISIT YOUR ROOM AND IN TWO MINUTES ANSWER YOUR QUESTION FOR YOU. YOU MUST PUT IN A PAIR OF 2CE SIGS OR 3A SIGS AND SEE WHAT HAPPENS IF YOU WANT TO BE SURE. THANK YOU FOR YOUR KIND WORDS AND GOOD EXPERIMENTING.

Stan (7/23/06) Hi - I'm enjoying my 5A's. It's taken a while since I've been able to get the right wire, the right resonance control things for the components, etc. but it's a pleasure. Anyway, I'm using an Ayre V1xe which is 200 watts/8 ohms/side with their K1xe preamp, etc. They have just come out with mono-bloc 300 watts each.  They say that the sound is better from these amps and was just wondering if you'd change to the new amps... Thanks Stan

Answer: HELLO STAN, IF YOU HAVE AUDITIONED THE TWO AND THE MONO'S WERE BETTER, AND THE DIFFERENCE IN MONEY IS WORTH IT TO YOU IN SOUND, GO FOR IT.

Randall (7/23/06): I auditioned Quatros this weekend and a speaker of another manufacturer that costs twice as much as Quatros and the Quatros blew the other speaker out of the water. Not even close. If the input impedance of my amp is 100k, what settings can I safely experiment with on an M5HP with 3A Sigs and 2Wqs. I have the cheat sheet, I simply don't want anything to blow up.

Answer: HELLO RANDALL, FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE 2WQ MANUAL. IF I RECALL YOU WOULD TEST THE EXACT VALUE, ONE ABOVE AND ONE BELOW. REMEMBER TO READJUST THE WOOFER LEVEL SO THERE IS THE SAME AMOUNT OF BASS FOR EACH SETTING.

Bob (7/23/06): I purchased a pair ov 2C's back in the early 1980's. They still sound good except at times they break in the lower end watching movies and sounds like the bass driver may be bad. Playing music I do not have that problem. I just purchased a new Pioneer Plasma, Denon receiver and Denon DVD. I was wondering if I should build my sound around the old 2C's or start from scratch for HT. Is it even feasible or possible to rebuild these with new drivers and or has the technology changed so much that I am wasting my time with these very old speakers. Thanks in advance.

Answer: HELLO BOB, THIS QUESTION HAS BEEN ANSWERED HERE BEFORE. THE 2C'S CAN BE BROUGHT UP TO SPEC AT THE FACTORY. THE OLD 2C'S ARE COMPATIBLE WITH OUR CENTERS AND REAR SPEAKERS. BY ADDING A SUB THE BASS WILL BE MORE APPROPRIATE FOR HT.

Bob (7/23/06): Could you tell me how the model 4 sounds compared to the model 3 or 3a? I listen to home theater or classical music. Thanks, Bob

Answer: HELLO BOB, THE MODEL 4 SERIES SPEAKER WAS DISCONTINUED WHEN THE MODEL 3 SPEAKER WERE INTRODUCED BECAUSE THE 3'S WERE BETTER 80HZ AND ABOVE. THE COMBINATION OF THE 3'S AND THE 2W SUB WAS BETTER TOP TO BOTTOM AND EASIER TO PLACE IN A ROOM. THE RESULT, NO SALES.

Wilbur (7/24/06): I bought a cheapo digital voltmeter at Radio Shack to do the M5HP test you describe here. The meter only displays 10ths, not 1000ths of a volt. On one leg, 75k is the proper setting; on the other, 50k. Is it OK to run them that way? I determined the setting by playing a test tone at 1000hz and getting the meter to read 1.0. I then played an 80hz tone and got the meter to read .7.

Answer: HELLO WILBUR, I DO NOT KNOW WHAT YOU MEAN BY ONE LEG AND ANOTHER. IF YOU TESTED EACH LEG INDEPENDENTLY THAT WOULD MEAN YOUR AMPLIFIER IS NOT TRULY BALANCED AND WOULD PROBABLY SOUND BETTER SINGLE ENDED. IF I MISSED SOMETHING CALL ME 559-582-0324.

Jeff (7/26/06) Thanks for answering some of my questions over the last couple of months. At the end of the day, I purchased your 2ce Sigs. Contrary to Mike's situation on 7/21 (to which I totally relate), I could have afforded the 3's or the Quatros, but frankly I couldn't be happier with my choice. With the sale of my Wilson's, I now have the upgraded version of the same speakers I bought 15 years ago. And, the sale allowed me to buy your speakers, a new cartridge for my turntable, and most importantly, some great new albums to listen to. I also love the look of the basic sock 2ce, but that's gravy considering the joy of listening to Billie Holiday last night on your speakers. If this were a MasterCard commercial...priceless.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, UPGRADING ONES SOURCE IF NOT IN LINE WITH THE REST OF THE SYSTEM IS ALWAYS THE CORRECT THING TO DO. WELCOME BACK TO YOUR NEW MUSIC. WHEN EVER I UPGRADE MY SYSTEM IT IS HARD TO GET ENOUGH SLEEP.

Nick (7/26/06) I have finally finished my dream system. It took many years and dollars to get this system after visiting countless dealers and reading dozens of reviews over the years only to end up with the latest hot product. Only problem the music, MIA. I have your 5As with Ayre electronics, Basis turntable, and Audioquest cables in a very good sounding study. When I play my favorite jazz, classical, and some female vocals the systems brings me to tears, it is so good. The performances are as realistic as live and piano sounds like it is coming from the grand in my study.  Thank You. In many ways I have the musical enjoyment I had left in 1980 when I sold my 2c speakers to upgrade. My question for you is: some of my favorite music, ie early rock, is better than any previous system I have owned but still not as enjoyable as the best recordings, how can I help the lesser to be more enjoyable? Nick

Answer:  HELLO NICK, I GET CALLS LIKE THIS EVERY WEEK. THEY START WITH A COMMENT "MY SYSTEM DOES NOT SOUND GOOD I NEED SOME SETUP HELP" TO WHICH I RESPOND BY ASKING IF ANY RECORDINGS SOUND GOOD. THE ANSWER IS ALWAYS "OH YES THE AUDIOPHILE STUFF SOUNDS GREAT". I THEN TELL THEM THAT THERE IS NOTHING WRONG WITH YOUR SYSTEM DON'T LET SOMEONE SELL YOU A $500 POWER CORD OR A LINE FILTER. WE MUSIC LOVERS HAVE ALWAYS BEEN PLAGUED BY THE FACT THAT SOME OF OUR FAVORITE MUSIC IS POORLY RECORDED. NO UPGRADED COMPONENT WILL CORRECT FOR THAT DISPARITY. IT IS TRUE THAT IMPROVING THE SYSTEM WILL MAKE THE BAD BETTER WITH THE GOOD BUT THE FRUSTRATING DISPARITY WILL STILL BE THERE. WHAT TO DO? WE WHO HAVE BEEN AT THIS FOREVER LISTEN TO THE MUSIC ANYWAY FOR ITS MUSICAL VALUE AND IGNORE THE FACT THAT IT DOES NOT SOUND AS GOOD AS SOME. OTHERS WHO ARE INTO EQUIPMENT JUST DO NOT PLAY RECORDINGS THAT SOUND LESS THAN GOOD. OTHERS ARE LEFT INSECURE BECAUSE THEY THINK IF THEY HAD THE RIGHT STUFF ALL WOULD BE GREAT, IN MANY WAYS OUR INDUSTRY FOSTERS THIS INSECURITY. I THINK SIMPLE TONE CONTROLS LIKE IN OUR CARS THAT ARE FULLY DEFEAT ABLE (LIKE IN THE TAPE LOOP) OR A SIMPLE EQ BETWEEN AN EXTRA OUTPUT ON THE CD PLAYER TO AN UNUSED INPUT ON THE PREAMP WOULD HELP.  IT WILL NOT MAKE A LESS THAN PERFECT RECORDING STATE OF THE ART BUT COULD MAKE IT TONALLY MORE PALATABLE.  ONE CUSTOMER ASKED ME WHY HE HAD MORE MUSICAL PLEASURE ON SOME MUSIC IN HIS CAR (STOCK RADIO) THAN HIS HI FI. I ASKED IF THE TONE CONTROLS WERE FLAT. HIS ANSWER "NO". SOME WILL SCOFF, SOME WILL USE SE AMPS WITH NO HIGHS AND NO LOWS, SOME WILL BUY EXPENSIVE COLORED CABLES, SOME WILL BUY SPEAKERS WITH FREQUENCY RESPONSE RESEMBLING THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS BUT TONE CONTROLS ARE YOU KIDDING I AM A PUREST! REMEMBER WITH TONE CONTROLS YOU CAN PUSH A BUTTON AND THEY GO AWAY AND YOU ARE NOT OUT THE MONEY FOR NEW COMPONENTS. I WOULD LIKE TO LEAVE THIS WITH ONE RECOMMENDATION FOR NOW.  DO NOT CHASE POOR RECORDINGS THAT MAY BE YOUR FAVORITES WITH EXPENSIVE EQUIPMENT CHANGES. IF YOU FIND A COMBINATION THAT MAKES THE BAD GOOD THE GOOD WILL BE CRAP.

Rob (7/27/06) Richard, Can the composite material base plate on the Vandersteen 5 be replaced and how much would one cost? One of the thread locations is smashed/damaged and the cone can not screw into the base. I would like to replace the whole bottom plate if possible.

Answer: HELLO ROB, THE COMPOSITE BOTTOM IS VERY EXPENSIVE  BUT BECAUSE IT IS COMPOSITE WE CAN USUALLY REPAIR IT. CALL 559-582-0324 FOR DETAILS.

Jack (7/28/06): Since your 5A requires a high pass filter between the preamp and power amp, I assume this eliminates the use of an integrated?

Answer: HELLO JACK, SOME INTEGRATED HAVE PRE-IN AND PRE-OUT THEY WILL WORK.  SOME MANUFACTURES WILL INSTALL A HIGH-PASS AT THE TIME OF ORDER (AUDIO RESEARCH, AYRE, ROGUE, AND ROWLAND).

Craig (7/29/06) Hi Richard, My friend owns a pair of 2Ce's and they sound fantastic. I often go to his place just to hear how music I love is SUPPOSED to sound. I am considering getting a pair. I have recently acquired an Audire Otez power amp that has 250W into 8 ohms. Should I be concerned with this much power driving the 2Ce's? Thank you for your reply.

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, READ THE POSTS ABOUT POWER ON THIS SITE.

Darren (7/31/06): I recently replaced my 1c's with 2ce signatures (new). My room is fairly well treated with the speakers precisely aligned according to the odd dimensions rule and lean back for listening height. With the 1c's I got a great response. However, the model 2ce's have much more range in the midrange. I am hearing a problem with some of the midrange being "over-powering". Such as the mid instruments sound great, but the vocals are being drowned out by it. I read in the manual that this could be an issue with having the speakers close to walls. The speakers are currently slightly toed in (just like I had my 1c's). Do I need to use more toe-in to help with this, or could there be some other acoustic problem I am not aware of? Thank you,

Answer: HELLO DARREN, TOE-IN SHOULD BE ADJUSTED ANY WAY YOU LIKE IN YOUR ROOM. TOO MUCH TOE WILL CAUSE A STRONG "MONO IN THE MIDDLE'. YOUR 1C'S ARE GOOD SPEAKERS BUT AT $850 A PAIR THEY ARE COMPROMISED BY NOT HAVING A MIDRANGE. THE 2CE SIGS HAVE A MIDRANGE AND THEREFORE HAVE MUCH HIGHER RESOLUTION. ON SOME RECORDINGS THAT ARE A LITTLE ROUGH IN THE MIDS (VERY COMMON ON SO SO RECORDINGS) LOWER RESOLUTION COULD BE PREFERRED. THE QUESTION SHOULD BE, HOW DO THE GOOD RECORDINGS SOUND?  IF THE ANSWER IS GREAT THE SYSTEM AND THE ROOM ARE WORKING FINE. THE 2CE SIGS ARE LESS EFFICIENT YOU COULD BE HEARING AMPLIFIER CLIPPING. IF YOU WANT TO BRAIN STORM SOME MORE CALL 559-582-0324 ASK FOR RICHARD.

Eric (8/3/06) I have a pair of 2ce's that were damaged during shipping. You repaired them about 6 months ago. Now one of the speakers has devolped a "popping" or "crackling" sound. It doesn't do it at low volume and at medium volume only with a more bass heavy track. I rarely play music loud and I'm surprised to have developed such a problem. I've narrowed it down and can tell it's coming from the 8" woofer. Can I buy a single woofer and replace it myself? I don't want to ship the speaker across country, for fear of damage, cost and just the fact that I'll be without it for so long. Thanks

Answer: HELLO ERIC, LOOK UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE ON THIS WEB SITE AND YOU WILL FIND YOUR ANSWER OR CALL 559-582-0324 ASK FOR RICHARD.

Richard (8/6/06) I am strongly considering buying a pair of 2ce Sigs. One concern I have is the recommended bi-wiring. As you know, speaker cables can be quite expensive these days, and paying for two pair is a significant factor in a buying decision. I understand the advantages, so if I get your speakers I will certainly bi-wire them. No doubt many of the expensive wires are worth the money, but I imagine there are some good lower-cost values out there (just like Vandersteen speakers!). Your typical recommendation on such matters is to go listen to some, but I'm wondering if you have any general comments or recommendations on desirable attributes (or even brands) of lower-cost wires that would make them a good match for your speakers. Also, do you know of or can you recommend some cables that already have spade or O-lugs that work well with your barrier strips? Crimping and soldering are not my fortes.

Answer: HELLO RICHARD, PRINT THIS QUESTION OUT ON YOUR PRINTER AND TAKE IT TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER. TELL HIM WHAT YOUR BUDGET IS AND AUDITION HIS RECOMMENDATION. WE DESIGN OUR SPEAKERS WITHOUT WIRE AS EXPLAINED MANY TIMES IN THIS FAQ FORUM. I DO NOT AUDITION ANY FULL-RANGE WIRE AND CAN NOT COMMENT WITHOUT EXPERIENCE. IF YOU WANT A RECOMMENDATION MADE WITHOUT ANY ACTUAL EXPERIENCE THERE ARE MANY ON THE COMPUTER FORUMS. NEED MORE HELP CALL 559-582-0324 ASK FOR RICHARD.

Alp (8/7/06) Hi, I recently purchased a pair of 2ce signatures for my home theater system. They are approximately 5 years old. There was no owners manual. Can I download one from the net? I noticed different connections for the amps and I was not sure which one to use. Also I am in the process of evaluating and purchasing a surround receiver. What do you recommend, I am seriously considering the Denon avr4806 ci. I am also considering the new Arcam and Rotel. Thanks for the response.

Answer: HELLO ALP, YOU CAN CALL THE FACTORY FOR A OWNERS MANUAL 559-582-0324. ALL THREE RECEIVERS ARE CANDIDATES BUT CHECK WITH YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER FOR HIS RECOMMENDATION. I HAVE NO EXPERIENCE WITH ANY OF THEM. BASED ON OUR WARRANTY CARDS YOU MIGHT WANT TO THROW NAD IN THE MIX.

Joseph (8/8/06): Can you please let me know what the maximum watts consumption is for the powered subwoofer in the Model 5 speakers? I will need to use a step up transformer to get the voltage from 100v to 120v, but I was hoping that the 500 watt model would be enough, as the 1,000 watt models and up seem to have an audible hum. The 500 watt version is completely silent. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JOSEPH, THE 5A SPEAKER HAS A SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY THAT IS FULLY REGULATED. THE AMPLIFIER WILL WORK FINE ON 100V.

Kevin (8/8/06): Hello Mr. Vandersteen, After living with subwoofer/satellite systems for the past 15 years I've finally decided to make the move to full range speakers but alas I have no room for them. I live in a Manhattan apartment that's only 11 feet wide. I would like to keep my listening position away from any boundaries for best bass response and depth) but that would severely limit my layout because I have two windows behind my front speakers. I would not be able to incorporate VSM's as front speakers because of the windows and being the classical musician performer as well as listener, I am very much enamored with 2Ce Sigs and two 2WQ subs to have the audio nirvana of two channel music. Plus it's in my budget. I thought if I went with the 1C's(which are plenty big for my Manhattan apartment) I might as well go with the 2Ce Sigs. My sensible side is laughing uncontrollably at my vision and every time I look around my room I say it can't be done. Another option is your VLR-1 which will obviously look more balanced with the room but after hearing the 2Ce Sigs it may become a compromise that would be difficult to accept. If you had a choice to setup smaller speakers where you're listening position was away from room boundaries or having full range speakers set up where you had to place your listening position against a room boundary long side wall directly behind you) what would you do?. I am becoming very stuck in making a decision. Can you help?

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, I WOULD USE THE FULL RANGE SPEAKERS WITH THE LISTENING POSITION AGAINST THE WALL. WHEN LISTENING PUT A PILLOW BEHIND YOUR HEAD OR ANY THING TO ABSORB OR DIFFUSE THE WALL BEHIND.

Havish (8/9/06) My question is about the tone controls at the back of my 2Ce signatures. Does not setting them flat (say treble at -1 dB) still preserve the time and phase correct nature of the sound? Also, I have felt sometimes that other brands of speakers that have almost flat measured frequency response curves still seem to sound bright. Does this have something to do with them not being time and phase correct? Is it possible that the sound of the tweeter hitting the ear first makes them sound bright? Thanks!

Answer: HELLO HAVISH, CHECK OUT OTHER POSTS ON THIS SITE ABOUT THIS. MANY SPEAKERS ARE NOT FLAT THEY ARE PUSHED IN THE HIGHS. THE HIGH FREQ INFORMATION ARRIVING FIRST COULD EMPHASIZE THEM.

Terry (8/10/06): Richard: I presently have the 2Ce Sigs driven by the Rogue Stereo 90 power amp, along with a Rogue Perseus preamp. I have one Model V2W sub, and have been toying with adding a second V2W sub. My V2W is approximately 4 or 5 years old and is as I bought it (no modifications). My question is this: Do I need to worry whether the second V2W is of same or similar age? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO TERRY, THE V2W HAS NOT HAD ANY MAJOR CHANGES.

David (8/10/06): I have a new amp, so I want to try a few settings on my 2W. The WX-2 has four RCA plugs. The top two are white, and the bottom two are red. Do I connect the bottom (red) pair to my preamp? And the white pair to the amp? Thank you.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE WX-2 IS JUST A SERIES CAP, IT MAKES NO DIFFERENCE.

Albert (8/13/06): My new Quatros are wonderful straight out of the box. My dealer is not close enough to visit and tune them. The manual describes the process of adjusting the room compensation, but some points aren't clear. First, is the first process done with ONLY the left speaker connected? And is the second process done with ONLY the right speaker connected? Is the "test disc" available to end users? If not, what are the frequencies of the 11 warble tones? Do they match the 11 frequencies controlled by the various bands as mentioned in the manual? With answers to those questions, I think I can do this myself. If I screw it up, I can always return the bands to neutral! Thanks.

Answer: HELLO ALBERT, THE WARBLE TONES ARE FROM A TEST DISC FROM STEREOPHILE. THE FREQUENCIES ARE NOT EXACTLY THE SAME SO YOU WILL HAVE TO INTERPOLATE AND ADJUST TWO TRIM POTS IN A FEW CASES. OUR TEST DISC IS NOT YET AVAILABLE YOUR DEALER WILL BE INFORMED WHEN IT IS.  THE ADJUSTMENTS ARE ONE CHANNEL AT A TIME WITH A RADIO SHACK ANALOG METER ONLY.

Chicar (8/13/06): Hi, I'm interesting to have a pair of Quatro Signature after I read a review on Stereophile its article mentions about have to buy a kit with a box including a high pass filter for Pre amp to amp n it cost US$795 for balanced. Is the kit mandatory to install n how to install between Pre n amp, any alternative in the market? Is Quatro is suit for my gear? My gear included power amp ARC VT 150SE,pre amp ARC Ref 2 MK2,all interconnect cables n speaker are XLO unlimited edition. Thx,

Answer: HELLO CHICAR, THERE IS A KIT THAT IS INCLUDED, BUT YOU WILL NEED A HIGH PASS BETWEEN THE PREAMP AND AMPLIFIER. $795.00 IS THE CORRECT PRICE FOR THE BALANCED VERSION. YOUR EQUIPMENT WILL WORK FINE.

Vassilis (8/13/06): Hello Richard, I plan to replace an old pair of infinity with 3Signatures. I use the 2-ch system for movies as well. I am concerned with some remarks made on failures of low frequency driver. Should I reconsider? My electronics are all FM Acoustics, except the amplifier which is Classed Omega. Thanks

Answer: HELLO VASSILIS, USING THE 2 CHANNEL FOR MOVIES IS FINE. IT IS WHEN USING DOLBY DIGITAL THAT CAN DAMAGE YOUR SPEAKERS BECAUSE OF THE L.F.E.. SOME MOVIES HAVE ENOUGH BASS AND COULD TRY TO PUT THE WOOFERS IN YOUR LAP, A SUB-WOOFER SHOULD BE USED IN 5.1 SYSTEMS.

Albert (8/15/06):

Answer to Albert 8/15/06: HELLO ALBERT, CALL 559-582-0324 FOR INFORMATION OR CONTACT YOUR QUATRO DEALER.

Anthony (8/18/06) What is the life span of the model 2 Vandersteen speakers? Regards

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, MODEL 2'S IN MANY DIFFERENT CONFIGURATION HAVE BEEN MADE FOR ALMOST 30 YEARS. HOW LONG THEY LAST DEPENDS ON HOW THEY ARE USED AND CARED FOR.

Luis (8/21/06) I recently bought 2 2wq subwoofers. I like to change my amplifier (aragon 8008) to a 5 channel amplifier Cary Audio Cinema 5. The crossover I have at the present time is a pair of 2kx2. The speakers are Magnepan 1.6.My question is : Do I have to change crossovers? or what are the parameters for cross over use. I looked in your web page and could not find any information. Specification Aragon Carey Audio Power 200 watts at 8 200 watts at 8 400 at 4 350 at 4Imput impedance 22kohms unbalance 44kohms unbalance am very satisfied buying the subwoofers and the main Magnepan but I might to go a different dealer for the amplifier.  Thanks very much

Answer: HELLO LUIS, IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT YOU CONSULT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER TO MAKE SURE YOUR WOOFERS ARE INSTALLED CORRECTLY. YOUR QUESTIONS REVEAL THAT YOU HAVE NO IDEA AND IT IS TO COMPLICATED FOR THIS FORUM. IF YOUR DEALER CAN NOT ANSWER YOUR QUESTIONS CALL 559-582-0324 ASK FOR RICHARD.

Mike (8/21/06) I have a pair of Model 3As and am considering having them upgraded to Sigs. Two questions... 1) Will all drivers be replaced, or just the tweeters? 2) Will the crossovers be replaced? Thanks

Answer: HELLO MIKE, DEPENDING ON THE AGE OF YOUR 3A'S EVERYTHING THAT NEEDS TO BE REPLACED TO MAKE IT A 3A SIGNATURE WILL BE. MANY PARTS WILL BE CHANGED OR MODIFIED INCLUDING ON YOUR X-OVERS. AFTER THE MOD THEY WILL BE TESTED IN THE CHAMBER JUST LIKE A NEW PAIR. ANY MORE DETAILS CALL 559-582-0324 ASK FOR RICHARD.

Mick (8/21/06): Have placed an order for a pair of Quatros with Sound Reference in Brisbane. In preparing for their arrival I'm needing to make a few changes to my listening area in regard to power points specifically. Question 1: is there a power switch on the rear of the Quatros? Question 2: Should I leave the Quatros "powered up" continuously. Any other considerations I should account for? My system at present is a McCormack UDP1(Conrad Johnson Edition); Valve Preamp (Sound Reference Design) Valve Power Amps (6550x 4 per mono-block). Strictly 2 channel in this household. Enjoyed the Stereophile review but am wondering what a can of worms Michael Fremer has unleashed with his comments re Wilson MAXX speakers. I'm a long term fan of your speakers having moved from the 2CE signatures to my current 3A's. David Neilen at Sound Reference said I should not raise the issue of power cords with you. Cheers

Answer: HELLO MICK, THE QUATRO'S ARE AVAILABLE IN 120 VOLT ONLY SO YOU WILL BE NEEDING A GOOD STEP DOWN TRANSFORMER OF 300VA. DAVID WILL BE ABLE TO HELP YOU WITH THAT. THE SUB AMPLIFIERS ARE DESIGNED TO BE ON 24/7. AS FAR AS EQUIPMENT IS CONCERNED I DEFER TO YOUR DEALER IF HE HAS HEARD THEM. IF YOU HAVE UPGRADED ALL YOUR EQUIPMENT TO THE HIGHEST LEVEL, THEN YOU SHOULD EXPERIMENT WITH ACCESSORIES. UNTIL THEN PUT YOUR MONEY INTO IMPROVED COMPONENTS FOR A GREATER RETURN.

Jenny (8/22/06) I just got a new Kenwood seven channel surround sound amp and had my "techie" son in law redo our audio system so that our Vandersteen Stereo speakers are hooked up to the TV along with our Bose surround sound. It's amazing how much better the sound quality is since the Vandersteen speakers were attached. Why would the stereo speakers make such a difference with the surround sound? My son in law is really impressed, and very curious. I don't know how he configured the audio, but whatever he did, it's a thousand times better than it was before. I'd appreciate a response (non technical for me, but Brian would probably like all the details). Thanks,

Answer:  HELLO JENNY, THE ANSWER TO YOUR QUESTION IS NOT VERY COMPLICATED. THE LIFESTYLE PRODUCTS THAT PROLIFERATE THE MARKET TODAY LIKE YOUR BOSE SYSTEM HAVE VERY SERIOUS SONIC COMPROMISES BECAUSE OF SIZE. IF I WERE TO DESIGN A SPEAKER AND THE MARKET DEMANDED IT BE THAT SMALL IT WOULD NOT BE MUCH BETTER. IN ORDER TO GET WIDE BANDWIDTH, GOOD EFFICIENCY, AND LOW DISTORTION GIMMICKS WON'T FOOL MOTHER NATURE, THE SPEAKER IS GOING TO HAVE SOME SIZE TO IT. MOST CONSUMERS ARE NOT AWARE OF WHAT YOU HEARD OR DO NOT CARE, THEY WANT THE SPEAKERS OUT OF THE WAY. WE HAVE A 9 FOOD GRAND PIANO IN OUR ROOM SO OUR LARGEST SPEAKER LOOKS SMALL IN COMPARISON.

Andy (8/23/06) My pair of 2Ce speakers are serial numbers 71118 and 71119. They are old enough to have come with banana jacks rather than terminal strips. Would it be possible to update the back panels on these speakers with ones with a terminal strip? If so, is it a job I could do myself or would they need to come back to you? I am fairly handy. I've also noted your comments that some banana plugs are too long. As an alternative to replacing the back panels, do you have any recommendations for locking banana plugs that I could re-terminate my cables with that would be the correct length for the jacks in my speakers? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO ANDY, IT WOULD BE VERY DIFFICULT TO GO TO THE TERMINAL STRIP OF THE 2CE SIG'S. WE COULD DO IT AT THE FACTORY BUT THE COST WOULD BE MORE THAN THE DIFFERENCE USED FOR 2CE SIG'S. YOU CAN USE ANY BANANA PLUG JUST DO NOT PUSH IT IN AS FAR.

Hiroshi (8/24/06)I bought used 1CE without owner's manual. I'm very satisfied with its sound expression, but I'd like to bring out maximum performance. Please suggest me how to purchase owner's manual from outside of US (Japan). Thank you.

Answer: HELLO HIROSHI, SEND $5 US AND WE WILL SEND YOU ONE.

Bob (8/24/06) Recently acquired the venerable Vandy Model 2. Do not have the user manual. Is this item (user manual) available and if so where can I get one?Are there any accessories available to upgrade or enhance the performance level of these fine old speakers? How is the sock removed - I need to clean it. Is the sock replaceable if I feel the need for a new one? Please respond - thanks.

Answer: HELLO BOB, WE DO NOT HAVE OWNERS MANUAL FOR SPEAKERS THAT OLD AND THERE ARE NO UPGRADES. CHECK OUT CUSTOMER SERVICE ON THIS WEB SITE ON HOW TO RETURN THEM FOR A GRILL CHANGE. ON A SPEAKER 29 YEARS OLD IT NEEDS TO BE CHANGED NOT CLEANED IN MY OPINION. TO CHANGE GRILL CLOTH IS $80 PER SPEAKER PLUS FREIGHT.

Tony (8/25/06): Can the Quatro's be used with a HT receiver? Or does it require the High-Pass filters to work?

Answer: HELLO TONY, THE QUATRO REQUIRES A HIGH-PASS BETWEEN THE PRE-AMP AND THE AMPLIFIER. I DO NOT BELIEVE A HT RECEIVER WOULD BE UP TO THE TASK ANYWAY.

Matt (8/26/06): Richard, I have model 2Ce speakers. One woofer has a tear in the surround and was repaired with silicone?? but plays ok. The other speaker has 2 red lights that glow softly on and off with the music. What does that mean? what would be the cost of refurbishing this model? Thanks

Answer: HELLO MATT, IT SOUNDS TO ME LIKE THESE SPEAKERS HAVE LIVED A ROUGH LIFE. I WOULD SEND THEM IN FOR A CHECK-UP AND REPAIR. THE RED LIGHTS ARE WHAT WE CALL "IDIOT LIGHTS" WHICH NORMALLY MEANS TURN THE VOLUME DOWN BUT YOURS DO NOT SEEM TO BE WORKING CORRECTLY.  CONTACT VANDERSTEEN AUDIO FOR REPAIRS 559-582-0324.

Bill (8/27/06): Hello -I have a pair of 2ce's and a VCC-1 center channel speaker in a home theater setting. I used to have the center channel speaker sitting on top of my subwoofer, but now I have two subs and they are behind the 2ce's, so I need something like a speaker stand for the VCC-1. Any recommendations? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO BILL, CONTACT YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER FOR A RECOMMENDATION. THERE ARE MANY MANUFACTURES OF DIFFERENT STANDS I AM SURE ONE OF THEM WILL WORK FOR YOU.

Andrew (8/28/06) Richard, thanks for this forum which I find very helpful. I currently power my 3As with an Audio Research VT130 and LS2MkII and am thinking of upgrading to a pair of 3A Signatures or Quatros. Will the VT130 and LS2MkII be adequate for the Quatros? Also, I've gone through the forum and it seems the Quatros are only available for 120v/50Hz power supply. When will you make them for 220v/60Hz electricity supply?

Answer: HELLO ANDREW, YOUR ELECTRONICS SHOULD WORK FINE WITH EITHER SPEAKER. WE DO NOT INTEND TO MAKE A 220 VOLT VERSION AS IT SOUNDS INFERIOR TO A 115 VOLT WITH A STEP/DOWN TRANSFORMER. MAYBE THE EXTRA ISOLATION IS THE REASON.

Adrian (8/29/06): Hi Richard I have a couple of questions; Now that the Vandersteen Quatros have become such a success and have obtained great reviews all over the audiophile community are you going to continue future research and development on the Model 2CE Sigs and 3A Sigs or are these speakers pretty much complete? It seems that you have chosen the "active speaker technology" as the technology of choice. Wouldn't a next logical step be to place a class D full range amplifier in a speaker? I would buy that ASAP because that would make life simple (One interconnect and one power wire). I am an eleven year owner of your model 2CE Signatures, Great Speaker. Thank You

Answer: HELLO ADRIAN, THE MODEL 2'S AND MODEL 3'S ARE NEVER COMPLETE AND GET YEARLY REFINEMENTS. I HAVE NOT HEARD A CLASS D AMPLIFIER THAT I LIKE ESPECIALLY ON HIGH REZ (VINYL) SOURCES AS WELL AS ANALOG AMPLIFIERS WITH LOW OR NO FEEDBACK. IT WOULD BE A MARKETING MISTAKE ANYWAY BECAUSE IT WOULD ASSUME THAT ALL VANDERSTEEN CUSTOMERS LIKE THE SAME SOUND. TRUST ME THAT IS NOT TRUE, I HAVE HEARD THEM SOUND VERY DIFFERENT FROM SYSTEM TO SYSTEM OVER THE YEARS. THE BEAUTY OF A TIME AND PHASE ACCURATE SPEAKER IS THEY ARE VERY NEUTRAL AND CAN BE MADE TO SOUND ANY WAY YOU LIKE WITH CAREFUL SELECTION OF THE ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT.

Fernando (8/31/06): I have a pair of older model 2C speakers with the beige socks. While these speakers have served me well, the socks are showing their age.  I would like to replace them with black socks. It has been stated that the replacement cost is $80 per speaker. However, shipping costs may more than double that figure. I live in the San Francisco Bay area, which is 2-1/2 hours from the Vandersteen Hanford factory. Can I drop off the speakers? Can I pick them up after the work is done? Are there any lower cost shipping options, such as shipping them to my local dealer? I am hoping that my speakers will be part of a larger shipment, and therefore cheaper to ship.

Answer: HELLO FERNANDO, TAKING THEM TO YOUR DEALER IS A OPTION BUT THEY NEED TO BE PAID FOR THEIR TIME SO IT WILL COST MORE. YOU MAY DROP THE SPEAKERS AT THE FACTORY HOWEVER THERE IS A DROP CHARGE $50.00. SHIPPING FROM S.F. WILL BE LESS THAN THAT IF YOU TAKE THEM TO UPS NOT A PACKAGE STORE. I CAN'T IMAGINE BEING ABLE TO DRIVE 500 MILES ROUND TRIP TWICE WITH TODAY'S GAS PRICES FOR LESS THAN UPS. I DO NOT KNOW A SINGLE SPEAKER YOU CAN USE FOR 20 YEARS AND HAVE MADE NEW COSMETICALLY INCLUDING A CHECK-UP FOR APPROX $275.00 TOTAL.

Mike (8/31/06): I have the Model 2 sn:C30062 & 63C. Over the years of service, I am pleased of their performance. Recently the active acoustic coupler (rear cone suspension) had separated from it's base and part of it had cracked around the outer rim. Is there any way that I may purchase or exchange for new couplers, without shipping the speaker to the USA?. I am a Electronic Technician and I have no problems servicing the Model 2 including removing and reinstalling the grill to it's original factory look.

Answer:  HELLO MIKE, I ASSUME YOU ARE OVERSEAS SO CONTACT DELARAMA FAX#480-367-1355. YOU WILL NEED TO PROVIDE HIM WITH THE SPEAKER MODEL NUMBER, SN#, AND ALL CODES AND MARKINGS ON THE BACK OF THE DRIVER ITSELF.

Zvonko (9/06/06): Hi Richard. I currently have 2ce Sigs that I am driving with a 125 watt/channel solid state MOSFET amplifier. I am thinking of getting a couple of the 2WQ subs to fill in the bottom end and was wondering that since the subs have their own amplifier and the main amp will not be driving the low frequencies, can I switch to a lower power amplifier and still get the same volume out of the setup. What I am thinking is that I can switch to a tube amplifier of lower wattage and take advantage of the better mids and high frequency sound reproduction that they deliver. If you agree, what would you recommend as the minimum wattage tube amplifier for this and if there is a model and brand that you have had good experience with. Thanks

Answer: HELLO ZVONKO, THIS IS A COMMON MISUNDERSTANDING. THE PEAK VOLTAGE (NOT CURRENT) SWING IN MUSIC OCCURS MOST OFTEN IN THE MID RANGE, THIS IS WHY THE AMPLIFIER NEEDS TO BE ABOUT THE SAME POWER. IT IS TRUE THAT THE AMPLIFIER WILL BE MUCH HAPPIER NOT HAVING TO DO THE HIGH CURRENT WORK IN THE BASS BUT THE CLIPPING POINT WILL BE ONLY SLIGHTLY IMPROVED BECAUSE THE RAILS WILL SAG LESS. SOME TUBE AMPS HAVE PROBLEMS DELIVERING CURRENT, THIS WILL NOT BE A FACTOR WITH THE SUBS. I SUGGEST YOU AUDITION A FEW AMPLIFIERS AND SEE IF THEY SOUND TO YOUR LIKING AND PLAY LOUD ENOUGH ON YOUR MUSIC.

Ken (9/07/06): Hi Richard, Well, if this is the place for technical questions, I have a technical question...I bought all-new Vandersteens for a 7.1 system, and I am selling an older pair of Model 5s to a guy in the US. I am in Canada, and a shipper tells me that I have to send a declaration form/letter with the speakers, to confirm that, "the field strength of the magnets in the loudspeakers is less than 0.002 gauss at 2.1 meters" and therefore are not restricted as magnetized material under Packing Instruction #902 of the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations." I haven't heard of this before, but I thought it likely that you would know the answer to this question. Can you help me please? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO KEN, THAT IS ALL TRUE BUT THE STANDARDS ARE NOT CLEAR SO I HAVE NEVER SENT ALL OF OUR PRODUCTS OUT FOR TEST (YOU CAN IMAGINE WHAT A LAB WOULD CHARGE). THE BEST ANSWER IS TO GET A DIFFERENT SHIPPER OR METHOD. ONE THING YOU WANT TO BE MINDFUL ABOUT IS WHAT THEY WILL PAY IN CASE OF DAMAGE BECAUSE USED GOODS ARE CLASSIFIED AS "PERSONAL BELONGINGS" AND THE COVERAGE IS NORMALLY POOR.

Mauricio (9/07/06): Do you have a dealer in Colombia? How can I get a pair of Vandersteen in this country?

Answer: HELLO MAURICIO, LOOK UP EXPORT ON THIS SITE AND CONTACT DELRAMA FAX 408-367-1355.

Felix (9/08/06): Hi Richard. I'm looking to add an old 2w subwoofer to my actual stereo setup. My main speakers consist of Totem Model 1 signature which are small Canadian monitors going down to 50Hz. On your site, you recommend using speakers which reach a full octave below the crossover point of 85 Hz(40Hz). If I add a 2w, will it have difficulty integrating my monitors and will I be able to locate it in my listening room? I hope that the answers to both these questions is no...

Answer: HELLO FELIX, THERE ARE MANY EXISTING FAQ'S DEALING WITH THIS QUESTION I SUGGEST YOU PERUSE THEM. REMEMBER THIS IS NOT ABOUT ONLY THE 2WQ BUT ALL SUBWOOFERS.

Ken (9/09/06): I have just purchased a pair of Quatros from Audio Connection (NJ) after a second audition in which John and Carlos painstakingly and patiently inserted my equipment (CARY TUBES) to make sure the components were compatible. WOW! The Quatros were bought to either replace or be used in rotatation with Quad ESL 63s. Unlike virtually every other speaker I have auditioned the Quatros have most of the unique qualities of the Quads and more dynamics. I have used a pair of 2wqs or Celestion 6000s to augment the Quads" bass and have become accustomed to very deep bass. My question is: should I trade the 2wqs in or can they be integrated into the Quatros for even more bass? Or, will you be coming out with 2wqs that use the 11 band compensation in the future? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO KEN, MOST PEOPLE IN MOST ROOMS HAVE PLENTY BASS WITH THE QUATROS. MORE BASS IS THE FUNCTION OF A BASE BOOST CIRCUIT NOT MORE WOOFERS. IF YOU HAVE A VERY LARGE ROOM YOU CAN CONTACT YOUR DEALER ON HOW TO INCORPORATE THEM BOTH.

Frank (9/15/06): I Just purchased a used pair of 2CE's vintage 1996 No's 74398, 74399. My question: I am currently using an Audible Illusions preamp, model M-3. These preamps do not invert phase. AI says to switch red with black at the speaker connection. Any conflicts here regarding phase in the 2CE? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO FRANK, YOU NEED TO KNOW WHETHER YOUR SYSTEM IS IN ABSOLUTE PHASE. THE PRE-AMP AND AMPLIFIER NEED TO BE IN ABSOLUTE PHASE TOGETHER. IF THAT IS THE CASE THE RED WIRE GOES TO THE RED AND BLACK TO BLACK. I BELIEVE THE M-3 DOES INVERT PHASE SO IF YOU AMP DOES NOT YOU WOULD REVERSE THE WIRES ON THE SPEAKER. AGAIN A GOOD DEALER WILL HELP WITH THIS.

Stan (9/16/06):  Hi Mr.V - I have my 5A's for 9 months already. I play them every day for hours, yet I still hear them getting better and better. Is this still the breaking in process?

Answer: HELLO STAN, WE BREAK-IN DRIVERS AND OTHER COMPONENTS FOR 1000 HOURS BEFORE ANY DESIGN WORK IS DONE. THEY WILL CONTINUE TO CHANGE ALTHOUGH SLIGHTLY UNTIL AT LEAST 400 HOURS.

Robert (9/17/06): I'm considering the purchase of a pair of Vandersteen 2C3e Signature series loudspeakers. I've borrowed a pair from my local dealer and love them. The only concern is the base. It "leaves" a large foot print in an already cramped room. Is there any sonic purpose to the base or is it just for stability? Can I do without the base and get optimal performance from the speakers? Thanks

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, THE STAND IS A MUST. IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO GET THE TILT RIGHT FOR YOUR LISTENING HEIGHT AND DISTANCE.

Chuck (9/18/06) I am considering purchasing a pair of 2CE's,,,serial numbers 66126ce and 66127ce...can you tell me date of manufacture from the serial numbers??? Also I am using a pair of MIT Shotgun MH-750 speaker cables....the cables are very high end and detailed but not by-wire. I there another way to connect then without jumper strips to realize full sonic benefits of both speaker and cable? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO CHUCK, I CAN ONLY GUESS AT ABOUT 1990. JUMPERS WILL BE THE ONLY WAY TO HOOK UP THE SPEAKERS. IF THE SOUND IS NOT WHAT YOU EXPECTED BE SURE TO TRY ANOTHER WIRE. HIGH PRICED WIRE DOES NOT GUARANTEE IT IS A PROPER MATCH.

Kevin (9/19/06) I recently purchased a new pair of 2Ce Signature loudspeakers after literally being put into shock after hearing a dealer's demo (Audio Nexus, NJ).  Being a classical musician (trombonist) I can now tell you first hand your loudspeaker design using time aligned phase accurate drivers presents the recorded signal so perfectly, that what I once thought was overly bright recordings with strident brass was actually very natural recordings that were being desecrated by a supposedly high end satellite/subwoofer system which I owned previously. This experience has made me wonder if ALL loudspeakers that don't adhere to these design concepts are seriously flawed in their performance. If that's true, why aren't more loudspeaker companies embracing what you have been advocating for the past 30 years, and why would anybody spend $50,000+ for speakers that don't adhere to these specs? Thanks for a great product.

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, YOU ASK A GOOD QUESTION AND I WILL TRY TO ANSWER IT. ALMOST 30 YEARS AGO OUR FIRST SPEAKERS WERE MORE TYPICAL (BOX WITH HIGH QUALITY DRIVERS AND STEEP X-OVERS). IN MAKING THE DECISION TO CHANGE CAREERS WITH A NEW GROWING FAMILY MY LISTENING PANEL WOULD DISCUSS EAST COAST SOUND VERSES WEST COAST SOUND, WHICH LEFT ME VERY NERVOUS. I SUGGESTED WHY WE WOULD NOT TRY TO REPRODUCE THE SOUND DELIVERED BY THE AMPLIFIER. ALL AGREED AND THIS BEGAN A QUEST INVOLVING LIVE VS RECORDED LISTENING SESSIONS. THE FIRST TO GO WAS THE BOX BECAUSE IT MADE OUR RECORDINGS SOUND BOXY ACCORDING TO THE PANEL OF AUDIOPHILES, BAFFLE-LESS WAS BORN. SOON THE DRIVERS WERE ALIGNED SO THEY ALL SPOKE AT THE SAME TIME BUT THAT ONLY WORKED WITH FIRST ORDER X-OVER'S. MANY EXPERIMENTS AND LIVE VS RECORDING SESSIONS LATER THE MODEL TWO WAS BORN. OVER TIME THAT BASIC DESIGN HAS MORPHED INTO MANY PRODUCTS ALL USING THE SAME DESIGN PHILOSOPHY. AS TO WHY SO FEW SPEAKERS ARE THIS WAY 30 YEARS LATER I CAN ONLY GUESS EXCEPT THAT A LARGE PERCENTAGE BELIEVE THAT MUSIC REPRODUCTION VIA A SPEAKER IS AN ART UNTO ITSELF. IF IT SOUNDS GOOD IT IS GOOD. 30 YEARS AGO THIS WAS THE ROLE OF TONE CONTROLS BUT THEY HAVE DISAPPEARED FOR "ACCURACY". NOW THEY ARE DESIGNED INTO LOUDSPEAKERS THE ONLY PROBLEM IS THEY CANT BE DEFEATED. THE OTHER REASON IS COST. EVERY SPEAKER IS CAREFULLY MATCHED AND ITS X-OVER HAND ADJUSTED IN AN ANECHOIC CHAMBER. THIS IS NOT CONDUCIVE FOR MASS PRODUCTION. IN THE END IT WAS THE ONLY CHOICE FOR ME AND STILL IS 30 YEARS LATER. IF SOME DAY A DEPARTURE FROM WAVEFORM PRESERVATION SOUNDS BETTER TO ME ON ALL MUSIC AND UNDER LIVE VS LISTENING TESTS, I COULD CHANGE MY MIND.

Richard (9/20/06): Hi Richard: I just received a set of Quatros. I want to use them in my home theater. I had 2Ci's and (2) 2Wq's. I will sell those but I was wondering if I should keep one of the 2Wq's to use with my VCC5. The 2Wq manual that I have suggests not using subs with a center channel but that was before you had the VCC5 available. Do you still subscribe to the "no subwoofer with center channel" philosophy? What is the down-side? Also my center channel amp has an input impedance of 47Kohms. I have Vandersteen 33kohm and 50kohm HP filters. Which would you use? 

Answer: HELLO RICHARD, KEEP BOTH 2WQ'S AND USE THEM ON THE REAR CHANNELS. THIS MAKES AN UNBELIEVABLE DIFFERENCE. WE RAN THE QUATRO'S AT CEDIA THIS WAY AND EVERYBODY LOVED IT.

Jim (9/23/06) We're taking our Quatros to Argentina, where I don't believe there is local support for your products. Could we buy a copy of the test disc, so we can use our own SPL meter to adjust the compensation for the new room? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JIM, OUR TEST DISK IS NOT FINISHED BUT ANY STEREOPHILE TEST DISC WITH WARBLE TONES BETWEEN 20HZ AND 120HZ WILL WORK WITH SOME INTERPOLATION.

Yuchyu (9/24/06): I own a pair of Vandersteen 2Ce speaker since 1992. Recently, I found that a red light below the bass speaker is on and sometime I can hear strange unstable noise even without turning on CD player. What is the problem of my speaker? What is the red light for? Should I sent the whole speaker back to you for repair or I just need to pull out one of speaker or crossover for replacement. please let me know, Thanks

Answer: HELLO YUCHYU, YOUR OWNERS MANUAL EXPLAINS THE RED LIGHT. IT IS A WARNING THAT THE SYSTEM IS BEING PLAYED TO LOUD. LOWER THE VOLUME AND IT WILL GO AWAY. DO NOT FOR ANY REASON REMOVE THE X-OVER. IF YOU NEED FURTHER ASSISTANCE CALL 559-582-0324.

Tom (9/25/06): Hi - I have some older model 2 speakers, and I am moving them from a room that had a bi-wired Dennon to one with a 'regular' dennon dra 425Is my best stategy1) use the a and b speaker outs to bi wire2) do a jump from the upper to lower speaker inputs using banana plugs stacked3) use one speaker input with some specific setting 4) something else I haven't thought of.  Thanks!

Answer:  HELLO TOM, SPEAKERS ARE NOT THE SAME SOME TIMES. THE BEST WAY TO DO THIS WOULD BE GETTING SOME SPADES FROM AN AUTO PARTS STORE LARGE ENOUGH FOR BOTH WIRES. PUT THE SPADE UNDER THE 5-WAY BINDING POST ON YOUR AMPLIFIER.

Sarkis (9/27/06): Hi Richard, I've been researching and reading about the Quatro but have not been able to find much info about the high-pass filter and how it works as well as about the subwoofers (e.g. which way do they fire, etc.). Is there a source you can point me to? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO SARKIS, YOU SHOULD CONTACT YOUR NEAREST DEALER THAT HAS THEM ON DEMO. LOOKING AT THEM INSTALLED IN A SYSTEM FOR 5 MIN YOU WILL KNOW MORE THAN I COULD WRITE IN A 1000 WORDS. THE WOOFERS ARE DOWN FIRING AS ALL OUR SUB-WOOFERS ARE. YOU MIGHT WANT TO READ THE DESCRIPTION IN THE REVIEW SECTION ON THIS SITE. THE HIGH PASS IS THE SAME UNIT USED FOR THE MODEL 5A'S.

Stuart (9/28/06): Hello Richard, I own 3A sigs + 2Wq's + HP-5B's (looking to move to 5A's). I am also looking at the new Ayre MX-R mono blocks but they have 2 Megohms Impedance. I asked Charles Hansen of Ayre how they have married Vandersteens to these new amps at the trade shows. His answer was thus:<< Am I reading the MX-R impendence right at 1M Ohm? >>Yes, it is 1 Megohm per phase. For the Vandersteen crossovers running balanced mode, this means 2 Megohms total.<< The HP-5's don't go that high :-( >>Higher input impedances require a smaller capacitor. I think the smallest capacitor in the crossover box is a 0.01 uF. This is still too big to achieve the correct 100 Hz crossover frequency. The solution is to add a resistor in parallel with the amplifier input in order to reduce the input impedance. I'm pretty sure that there is an option for this with the HP-5B. Check with Vandersteen to find out for sure. If they don't have a good answer for you, have Richard give me a call and we'll figure out a solution. Is this an option with the HP-5B's? I know several other folks on the boards have had the same question. Thank you for any insight / advice.

Answer: HELLO STUART, WE HAVE USED THE NEW MONO'S MANY TIMES. FOR 2 MEG USE SWITCHES 4 & 5 ALL OTHER SWITCHES OFF.

Frank (10/02/06) I have the Model 5A speaker. I will be using Bel 1001 Mk IV amp (single ended). Its input impedance is at 27 kilo-ohm. so, would I set the cross over at 20K or 33K? I have it at 100K by mistake - I hope I have not damaged the speaker already? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO FRANK, IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THE THE HIGH-PASS BE ADJUSTED CORRECTLY. THE CORRECT SETTING WOULD BE THE CLOSEST ONE (33K).

Leonard (10/04/06): Hi Richard. I have read all the information on low Q and first order filters. I understand how the 2WQ subs integrate with the main speakers and why corner placement is advised. I just wonder if there is any limit on large rooms for corner placement for subs? I am considering your 3A Signatures and if all goes well, then add a pair of 2WQ subs. My 2 channel only listening room is rather large: 26' X 37' X 14' high. Preferred placement with my past speakers is 12' from the front (short) wall, 8' from the side-wall, and 14' from the corner. My listening chair is 12' from each speaker and there is 13' behind my chair plus an open foyer beyond that for another 14'. Nice free space placement. At what point does a room get large enough that I should be concerned about delay or sound integration problems with corner subs? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO LEONARD, BASS IS OMNI-DIRECTIONAL AND THE WAVE LENGTHS ARE LONG, I WOULD STILL TRY THEM IN THE CORNER. IF THAT IS NOT SATISFACTORY MOVE THEM UNTIL THEY ARE.

John (10/04/06): Hello, my name is John, I'm considering a pair of 3a sigs, or Quattro's, problem is that my room is only 12'wide and 13' long. The room is treated, but I am not sure if these will work well in this small of a room. Thanks for your response.

Answer: HELLO JOHN, THE QUATRO HAS ADJUSTABLE BASS WHICH WOULD GIVE IT THE ADVANTAGE. WITH SOME TREATMENT FOR HIGH FREQUENCY PROBLEMS CAUSED BY EARLY REFLECTIONS AND THE BASS ADJUSTMENTS ON THE QUATRO IT SHOULD WORK FINE.

John (10/06/06) I am putting together a 2-channel system, and am leaning toward buying a Jolida amp, along with Vandersteen speakers. The Jolida will probably be either the JD-302B or the JD-502B. They are only rated at 50 and 50 wpc respectively, so I am concerned with two questions with regard to which Vandersteen speakers would be better. I understand the Model 1C does not have the kind of detail that the Model 2Ce does, but the 2Ce is 3dB lower in sensitivity. A big problem I have is that there are no audio dealers in the area that carry both the Jolida and the Vandersteen lines, so it is not possible to audition both of them together easily (unless I buy one and take it to the other location). My questions are these:1) Are both of the Jolidas capable of driving the 2Ce adequately?2) Is the quality of the Jolidas such that there would be a sonic benefit to getting the 2Cs instead of the 1Cs? The reason for this question is that I was told that the 1C is better for lower resolution electronics because it may not expose the weaknesses as much as 2Cs would. But I am not sure if the Jolidas are at the level to be appropriate for the 2C.Thank you.

Answer: HELLO JOHN, THERE ARE MANY POSTS ON THIS SITE ABOUT POWER. THE ONLY WAY TO ANSWER YOUR QUESTIONS WITH A ANSWER THAT WOULD MEAN ANYTHING, IS TO FIND SOME WAY TO AUDITION THEM TOGETHER.

John (10/08/06): Why the hell don't you put copies of your product manuals on the web site???

Answer: JOHN, WHEN WE GET THE TIME WE INTEND TO. THEY ARE NOT IN A DIGITAL FORM AT THIS TIME.

Greg (10/09/06) Hello, Richard. My name is Greg, and I live on Long Island. Recently, I purchased a pair of used 3A Signature speakers from one of your dealers. Unfortunately, one of the pair was lost by FedEx en route to me. This began a 2 week hunt for the missing speaker. We'd just about given up and began the long process of making a claim. Imagine my surprise when I found that the speaker surfaced at your factory! I want to thank you and especially the fine gal who answered the phone, took the initiative to look about and find my speaker, and handle the necessaries to get it shipped back across the country to me. I am now enjoying the finest sound my home known. Great, great stuff you're turning out there! Thank you again, and please thank for me, again, the staff member who took such good care of me in a time of stress.

Answer: HELLO GREG, CONSIDER IT DONE.

Craig (10/09/06) Richard, I have a question you probably haven't heard before. I am interested in purchasing two 2wq subs but my problem is the are not physically large enough. I intend to use them as end tables. Can I modify or hide the cases inside a larger enclosure (no sides) that will look like your enclosures with black cloth around the outside, without destroying the sound and performance of the subs. Thanks in advance your help.

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, THAT WON'T HURT A THING EXCEPT THE BEST LOCATION WOULD BE IN THE CORNER.

Larry (10/15/06) Richard, I own the V5As and am driving them with an ARC VT100. My dealer once suggested I try the 4ohm taps, instead of the 8ohm. I understand this may affect the damping factor and the frequency response (especially low end). Do you recommend trying this? Can it damage either speaker or amp? What difference might I hear? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO LARRY, TRY THEM ON BOTH TAPS AND STAY WITH THE ONE THAT SOUNDS BEST. THERE WILL BE NO DAMAGE TO THE AMP OR SPEAKERS.

Tom (10/28/06): Hello Richard: I have a pair of Model 5's purchased in early 2002 (sn's 2202, 2203).They are wonderful speakers. The life expectancy of the 5's internal battery pack is stated as 7+ years however the written notation on page 16 of the manual states March 2006. Typo or just a prompt for an early check? Are there audible symptoms which would indicate declining effectiveness of the internal battery pack? Best regards,

Answer: HELLO TOM, IF YOUR MANUAL CAME WITH THE SPEAKERS I WOULD GO BY THAT DATE. IF YOU REPLACE THE BATTERIES WITH LITHIUM THEY WILL LAST APX 11 YEARS.

Tom (10/29/06) Hello Richard--I have a question about your subwoofers, 2WQ. My current set up is a pair of old Model 3's from the mid 1990's (can or should they beupgraded?) with Adcom electronics. I will probably bi-Amp the system with a old rack mount Adcom that I am re-furbishing. My question is about the 2WQ's. Many reviews I have read say that a pair of these guys is really necessary, or to forget it. Another question I have is about placement. If I get a pair, can I place the second 2WQ 20 feet away from the main speakers? I mean they aren't directional are they? This is a 10x25 room with the system on the long wall, going across the shortest length of the room. I would propose having the two 2WQ's on the two ends of the room.

Answer: HELLO TOM, THERE ARE MANY FAQ,S THAT ADDRESS ONE VERSES TWO SUBS ON THIS SITE. I RECOMMEND STEREO SUBS ONE IN EACH CORNER BEHIND AND TO THE OUTSIDE OF YOUR MODEL THREE'S. IF YOU WANT HIGHER PERFORMANCE FROM YOUR MAIN SPEAKERS YOU SHOULD UPGRADE.

Jason (10/31/06) Hi Richard. I totally agree with your designs, and I love your "house sound". However, I also love that distinct and pleasant sound of speakers that use those Vifa XT19/25 ring radiators. Is there any possibility of incorporating the Vifa XT19/25 into you current designs?

Answer: HELLO JASON, THE RING RADIATORS FROM VIFA AND SCAN-SPEAK ARE NOT PISTONIC AND ARE IN CONTROLLED BREAK-UP FROM APX 8K. THE TWEETERS WE USE ARE TRULY PISTONIC THROUGH ALL AUDIBLE FREQUENCIES (27K). THIS WILL BE LOWER IN DISTORTION AND RESULTS IN MORE ACCURATE IMAGING.

Bill (10/31/06): Hi Richard, just a note to tell you how pleased I am with my new 5As. Eric Schmidt recommended these speakers and I could not be more pleased. The piano black finish is truly remarkable. I am driving these 5As with a Macintosh MC 2102 and the preamp is a Macintosh C 2200. Both components are vacuum tube design. The 5As seem to really blossom with these components. Family and friends marvel at the open sound, the realistic sound stage, and the absolute delightful overall presentation. I am a heavy listener and study straight ahead jazz. Given the hours of listening I have suffered ear fatigue many times. But no more. The Vandys just deliver a beautiful presentation without glare or harshness. Thanks very much for your craftsmanship and pride. If you are in the San Jose area please let me know. I would to demo these speakers and give you the chance to see how well they work with the Macintosh tube gear. Of course Miles Davis and John Coltrane would be involved not to mention a glass of vino ! All the best,

Answer: HELLO BILL, I WILL PASS ON THE INFO.

Luciano (10/31/06) After reading how to use the 2Wq and the article from Audio Perfectionist Journal, I agree that this is the way to go but what if the main speaker is very small i.e. with a low frequency response of around 90 - 95 Hz ? in other words there is no way to change the 80 Hz of the crossover as per 2Wq specs and still getting optimum results ?

Answer: HELLO LUCIANO, 80HZ IS ABOUT THE LIMIT IN MY OPINION. MOVE THE X-OVER HIGHER AND THE BASS WILL GET DIRECTIONAL AND THE TWO WILL NEVER SOUND AS ONE (OUR GOAL). SUCH A SMALL SPEAKER CERTAINLY WILL BENEFIT FROM THE HIGH-PASS AND YOU WOULD NOT WANT TO TRY GOING WITHOUT IT, UNLESS YOU LIKE WATCHING A SMALL WOOFER BEAT IT SELF UP, AND LISTENING TO THE RESULTING DISTORTION.

Lars (11/03/06) Hi Richard. Do you have any suggestions for ceiling-mounts of the VSM-1 speakers ?(Running experiments with overhead surround sound as a further extension of the "EX" format. Essentially a 5.0 matrix decoding of the Left/Right surrounds). -Thanks.

Answer: HELLO LARS, THE VSM'S ARE OFTEN USED AS CEILING SPEAKERS. I CAN NOT HELP YOU ON HOW FOR LIABILITY REASONS LEST ONE FALL AND HIT SOMEONE ON THE HEAD. USE YOUR INGENUITY AND MAKE SURE THEY CAN NOT FALL. BECAUSE THE VSM'S ARE POINT SOURCES THEY ARE IDEAL FOR CEILING USE.

Eddy (11/03/06)Eddy, from Brisbane AU Hallo Richard, could I use a pair of 2Wq with the 3A Signature and VCC-5 center. I listen to both music ( cd, SACD, DVD-A) and home theatre, or would I be better off with a pair of V2W. Regards

Answer: HELLO EDDY, YOU CAN USE THE 2WQ'S JUST FINE JUST TELL THE PROCESSOR THAT YOU DO NOT HAVE A SUB SO THE LFE WILL BE REDIRECTED TO THE FRONT TWO CHANNELS.

Mike (11/04/06)Hi Richard, If the battery runs flat in the 5A high pass filter can the loudspeaker be damaged? Regards

Answer: HELLO MIKE, DEAD BATTERIES IN YOUR HIGH-PASS WILL ONLY MAKE YOUR 5'S SOUND BROKEN. ONCE YOU HAVE NEW BATTERIES INSTALLED THEY WILL BE ALL BETTER. DO NOT FORGET THE BATTERIES ON THE INTERNAL X-OVER IN YOUR MODEL 5'S.

John (11/07/06) The spade connectors at the end of my speaker cable are wider than the space allowed by the plastic dividers / "fins" / on each side of the screws that serves as the binding posts on the 3's. What would happen if I removed / cut off the dividers so that the spades could make a better connection / be fully seated around the screw ? Naturally I would be sure that the 2 spades didn't touch each other.

Answer: HELLO JOHN, IT WOULD BE BETTER TO TRIM THE SIDES OF THE CONNECTOR SO THEY WILL FIT. THE LESS METAL IN THE CONNECTOR THE BETTER THE SOUND. IF YOU TRIM THE BARRIERS IT IS VERY EXPENSIVE TO REPLACE THEM FOR RESALE AND THERE IS THE POSSIBILITY OF A SHORT, COULD COST YOU AN AMPLIFIER.

Allen (11/07/06) Dear Sir,I am writing to enquire if an integrated amplifier can be used with the new Quatro model? Doe the Quatro external crossover units require separate amp and preamp for installation or will a very good integrated allow for installation? Many Thanks,

Answer: HELLO ALLEN, THE HIGH-PASS MUST BE USED SO ONLY INTEGRATED WITH PRE OUT-PRE IN WILL BE CANDIDATES. READ OTHER POSTS ON THIS FORUM ON THE IMPORTANCE OF HIGH-PASSING THE AMPLIFIER AND THE SPEAKER.

Steve (11/07/06): Richard, What are the technical details of the upcoming 2CE 25th anniversary edition? (It has been mentioned online) Are there 3-series upgrades in the pipeline as well? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO STEVE, OUR 30TH ANNIVERSARY IS NEXT YEAR. NOTHING GOING ON WITH THE 3A SIGNATURES THEY WERE NOT AROUND 30 YEARS AGO.

Rich (11/08/06): Hi Richard - first the up front compliment: fell in love with your speakers in the late 80's at a NYC Hi-Fi show, and have since then gone from 2Ci to 2Ce Sig and recently to Quatros they sound great. I listen to vinyl and my system will always be optimized for 2 channel. But just been relocated to Nashville, and building a new listening room so may attempt to integrate very modest secondary multi-channel capability in order to watch movies with my significant other or check out the multi-channel content on my SACD's/DVD-A's. I spoke to you briefly (will probably spring for Brian Berdan to come here to set-up the Quatros) and reviewed the FAQs but frankly I'm a complete multi-channel novice and not sure I even understand some of the answers -- what's an LFE? -- so now to the question: I'm thinking about getting an A/V receiver and using its pre-out to feed the front L/R through my primary 2-ch pre-amp's bypass to 2-ch amp/Quatros. Then using the A/V receiver amp to power a couple of your VSM's for the rear and a VCC center. As I want to keep this simple, and my preferences are more towards small group jazz and older classic/foreign movies -- limited large orchestral or car chase/explosion fare -- I'm inclined to skip a subwoofer (I gather I can set most processor/receivers to no sub?) as the Quatros should be fine in a 16' x 26' room. If anything, rather than a sub, I suspect I'm better putting $ towards the

VCC-5 for a better quality center if listening to something like the 3 channel Mercury recordings. Does this make sense to you?

Answer: HELLO RICH, LFE (LOW FREQUENCY EFFECT) IS ANOTHER NAME FOR SUBWOOFER OUT. I AGREE THAT IT WOULD BE BETTER TO PUT THE MONEY INTO A VCC-5. THIS SOUNDS FINE TO ME BUT I WOULD PASS IT BY YOUR DEALER.

Unknown (11/08/06): I have a pair of 2CE signatures running on a Dynaco ST 70. The manual suggests that I put all the low frequency through the left channel and the high frequencies through the right. If I set up the bi wiring to do this it doesn't seem like a natural idea because I wont get channel separation. Is there something I should know?

Answer: HELLO ?????, I HOPE I'M NOT WASTING MY TIME SINCE YOU CAN'T READ SIMPLE INSTRUCTIONS. I THINK YOU ARE TALKING ABOUT BI-AMPING WHICH WOULD REQUIRE 2 STEREO 70 AMPLIFIERS. REREAD THE INSTRUCTIONS ON BI-WIRING IF YOU HAVE ONE STEREO 70 AND FOLLOW THEM. IF YOU DO HAVE 2 STEREO 70 AMPLIFIERS FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR BI-AMPING. IF THIS DOES NOT CLEAR UP CALL ME 559-582-0324.

Kevin (11/10/06): When can we expect your VCC-2 loudspeaker to debut?

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, WE HAVE BEEN SHIPPING THE VCC-2 FOR WEEKS, CONTACT YOUR DEALER AS NOT ALL HAVE IT YET.

David (11/13/06): Two questions regarding Model 5's and the batteries. Sometimes batteries do not last as long as they are expected. What would be the audible signature if either of the battery packs were to give out prematurely? Also, these look like 9V's "strapped" together, as it were. Can you provide a brief tutorial to a person who can solder on battery replacement who is not wanting to send in the modules or take them to a dealer? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, NOT MUCH TO SAY THAT ISN'T OBVIOUS. DO THEM ONE AT A TIME AND MAKE THEM LOOK THE SAME, YOU WILL BE FINE. USE LITHIUM IF YOU WANT IT TO LAST 12 YEARS. WE HAVE NOT FOUND ANY BATTERIES THAT HAVEN'T GONE THE DISTANCE.

Anthony  (11/13/06): I have a pair of 2ce's that I bought in either 1991 or 1992. I had to put them in storage for a short time, only to recover them with what appears to be a water spot on the the bottom grill cloth of each speaker. I would like to send them back to the factory to have them looked at, but can you also replace the grille cloth?

Answer: HELLO ANTHONY, CHECK UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE AND FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS. ANY QUESTIONS CALL 559-582-0324

Bryan  (11/14/06): I am a long-time owner of a pair of your original 2C speakers with low 6,000 serial numbers. These were manufactured before you provided bi-amping. Besides the bi-amping what are the major differences between these and the current version of this speaker? What benefits would I derive besides further speaker life?

Answer: BRYAN, YOUR SPEAKERS ARE ALMOST 30 YEARS OLD, GLAD YOU ARE STILL ENJOYING THEM. THE BASIC TIME AND PHASE CORRECT DESIGN IS STILL USED TODAY HOWEVER EVERY SINGLE PART HAS BEEN IMPROVED WITH NEW TECHNOLOGY MANY TIMES. YOU SHOULD GO TO YOUR VANDERSTEEN DEALER AND HAVE A LISTEN TO THE 2CE SIGNATURE'S. IN ONE WAY YOU WILL HEAR WHAT IS VERY FAMILIAR BUT RESOLUTION, TRANSPARENCY, BASS EXTENSION AND DEFINITION, POWER HANDLING AND IMAGING ARE DRAMATICALLY IMPROVED.

Amy (11/16/06) Dear Richard, my name is Amy and I'd like to thank you for making your expert advise publicly available. Currently I’m running a pair of 1C’s with a 2wq sub placed in between. It’s all set up in a very small room (10x12) with acoustic treatment. I’d like to get more precise imaging, and was wondering if I’m better off upgrading to the 2ce sigs for the added benefit of a midrange driver, OR would I be better off adding a second 2wq so I could place the subs behind the main speakers instead of having just one in the center? Conversely, should I just give up since my room is so small?

Answer: HELLO AMY, I WOULD GET YOUR DEALER TO LOOK AT YOUR ROOM AND ADVISE BASED ON WHAT HE HEARS. A SECOND 2WQ WOULD NOT BE MUCH OF A BENEFIT IN SUCH A SMALL ROOM.  A DEALER VISIT MAY DISCOVER A WAY TO GET YOUR 1C TO IMAGE BETTER OR ADVISE WHAT YOUR NEXT MOVE SHOULD BE.

Dave (11/17/06):   I have a pair of Model one speakers and would like to know what power amp and brands are compatible and would provide the richest sound. I presently have a Kenwood amp.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, ONE ADVANTAGE OF HAVING A WORKING SYSTEM IS THAT YOU CAN TAKE YOUR TIME AND BORROW EQUIPMENT LOCALLY AVAILABLE. THIS IS WHAT I RECOMMEND YOU DO UNTIL YOU FIND ONE WITH A RICH SOUND. TRY AS MANY AS YOU CAN BECAUSE ELECTRONICS CAN SOUND VERY DIFFERENT AND YOU WANT TO FIND ONE ACCORDING TO YOUR TASTE.

Dave (11/19/06) I am upgrading my prepro/amp to Sunfire TGP-5 prepro and TGA-5200 amp. The amp has two sets of binding posts for the front channels. The following describes them:(1) a standard voltage-source (i.e., near zero impedance) output for all typical applications and:(2) a higher-impedance current-source output, which many prefer for electrostatic, planarmag net ic, or ribbon speakers. Or you can bi-wire your system with the voltage source driving the woofer(s) and the current source driving the upper part of the system. In many cases this provides by far the best possible in ter face between the amplifi er and the speaker system. I have 2CeSignatures, front left, front right, V2W sub, VCC and VSM speakers. Can I b-wire the 2Ce's as described in (2) above?

Answer: HELLO DAVE, THE ONLY DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE ONE OUTPUT AND THE OTHER IS ONE HAS A RESISTOR IN SERIES WITH IT. TECHNICALLY THEY THEN ARE NOT EXACTLY THE SAME AND WOULD NOT BE RECOMMENDED, BUT I HAVE NOT TRIED IT SO I DO NOT KNOW. HOW HARD WOULD IT BE TO TRY IT?

Bill (11/23/06): Hello from Canada, I have purchased a pair model 2s. I have not seen them and will not until I recieve them in 2 wks. Could you tell me what type of connectors are on the speaker. I want to have wiring ready when the speakers arrive but connot determine the type of connectors I need at the speaker end. Thank you,

Answer: HELLO BILL, WE HAVE BEEN MAKING MODEL TWO'S FOR 30 YEARS. WHAT CONNECTORS ARE USED DEPENDS ON WHICH MODEL YOUR TALKING ABOUT. IN THAT 30 YEARS MANY THINGS HAVE CHANGED TO THE POINT THAT TODAY THERE ARE NO COMMON PARTS WITH A PAIR 8 YEARS OLD.

Paul (11/24/06): I had my Moscode 600 amplifier upgraded a couple years ago. Recently I got out the radio shack db meter and it appears as though my crossover with my 2w sub is now somewhere around 160 hz. I think the input impedance of my amplifier is 100k ohms. What value capacitor should I be using for the crossover, its currently a multi-cap hard wired into the input. And, larger cap = lower crossover point (or higher?)

Answer: HELLO PAUL, TO CHECK FOR PROPER INPUT IMPEDANCE OF A AMPLIFIER WHEN IT IS NOT KNOWN GET A TEST DISC WITH SINE-WAVE TONES AT 1000HZ AND 80HZ AT LEAST. USE A DIGITAL VOLT METER SET TO AC VOLTS. PLAY THE 1000HZ TRACK AND MEASURE THE VOLTAGE ACROSS THE OUTPUT TERMINALS OF THE AMPLIFIER WITH THE SPEAKERS HOOKED UP. ADJUST THE VOLUME UNTIL THE METER READS 1 VOLT. PLAY THE 80HZ TONE AND READ THE METER WITHOUT CHANGING THE VOLUME. IF THE VOLTAGE IS .707 THE X-OVER IS EXACTLY CORRECT FOR 80HZ. IF THE VOLTAGE IS HIGHER YOU NEED A SMALLER CAPACITOR, IF THE VOLTAGE IS LOWER YOU NEED A LARGER CAPACITOR. TRYING TO MEASURE THE WAY YOU ARE WITH A SPL METER WILL NOT WORK BECAUSE IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE LOW FREQ IN A ROOM.

Kevin (11/25/06): I have a pair of 1c and a pair of 2ci the 1c's are 43 days old and the 2ci's are 17 years old both sound outstanding i won't have any other speakers in my house WELL DONE GREAT JOB! i need a lean angle graph for the 2ci's could you tell me where and how to get it once again love your speakers.

Answer: HELLO KEVIN, THE 2CI OWNERS MANUAL NEVER HAD A CHART FOR TILT. THE PROPER TILT WAS FOUND BY EAR BY THE DEALER DURING SET UP. STRAIGHT UP IS GOOD FOR 36 INCH EAR HEIGHT.

Brien (11/25/06): Richard, I have been using 2C's, a 2W and a VCC1 for years, with gratification. I am ready to try something a bit different. Can I re-wire my 2W so that it feeds from the ".1" signal of Dolby 5.1? Do you have a wiring diagram for the 2W's amplifier?

Answer: HELLO BRIEN, THERE IS NO WAY THE 2W CAN BE USED LINE LEVEL. WHAT YOU NEED IS OUR V2W, LOOKS THE SAME BUT IS LINE LEVEL IN AND HAS AN EXTRA 12 INCH ACOUSTIC COUPLER IN THE FRONT.

 Eddy (11/25/06): Hello Richard, the 2Wq are rated at 220 volt, we have 240 volt, is this ok, also can I leave the unit switched on, or do you recommend that I switch off when it is not in use. The speaker cables which are supplied with the 2Wq, would they need to be upgraded to a better quality, or can I keep using them?

Answer: HELLO EDDY, THE SUB'S WILL WORK FINE ON 240 BUT MAY HAVE A LITTLE MORE TRANSFORMER HUM. THE 2WQ'S ARE DESIGNED TO BE ON EXCEPT DURING VACATION. I WOULD RE READ YOUR OWNERS MANUAL AS IT SEEMS YOU MISSED SOME STUFF. WE SUPPLY THE SUBS WITH VERY BAD WIRE SO THE SUB'S WILL PERFORM POORLY AND WE RECOMMEND THE STUFF. JUST KIDDING, I SEE NO REASON TO USE ANY OTHER WIRE UNLESS YOU HAVE MONEY BURNING A HOLE IN YOUR POCKET. IF YOU DECIDE TO EXPERIMENT WITH DIFFERENT WIRES MAKE SURE YOU CAN TRY THEM BEFORE PAYING FOR THEM. LET ME KNOW IF YOU HEAR ANY DIFFERENCE.

George (11/27/06): George---- Hi, I have a pair of Lowther full range drivers mounted in transmission line, custom cabinets. Currently, after 2 months of notch filter adjustments, room positioning, etc. I have what I think- is a satisfying, musical system. I have excellent response down to 36hz- and about zero after that. So, in an effort to gain a little more reinforcement of true low bass etc. I tried my Axiom HT sub- to no avail. It sounded something like fog horn going off along with the music. I am intrigued by your superior application towards resolving issues these HT type subs present. But with no way to audition your 2wq's....What is your opinion of applying your subs with the full-rangers?? Thank you!!

Answer: HELLO GEORGE, THE 2WQ'S SHOULD WORK FINE AND CLEAN UP YOUR MID-RANGE AT THE SAME TIME. ONE DISADVANTAGE OF FULL RANGE SPEAKERS IS THE BASS CAUSES LARGE EXCURSIONS WHICH RAISES THE DOPPLER DISTORTIONS SIGNIFICANTLY IN THE MID-RANGE. THE 2WQ USES A HIGH PASS AT 80HZ WHICH WILL HELP.

Craig (11/27/06) I just purchased a system including your 1C speakers & a 2wq subwoofer. I noticed the Q control on the back of the subwoofer feels loose when compared to the tweeter adjustment on the 1C's & the sensitivity adjustment on the subwoofer. All the mentioned controls have some resistance when adjusting. The Q does not. Is this normal? By the way your speakers have the best soundstage I have ever heard! I am currently running them with Quicksilver Minis And the midrange reminds me of my old Quads-Except your speakers convey dynamics!! Thanks for creating an affordable speaker that really performs!!

Answer: HELLO CRAIG, THAT IS NORMAL.

David (11/28/06) I'm looking to buy a set of 2ce Signature speakers that a seller purchased new in September, 2005. Will I still be able to have the 5 year warranty in this case? Thanks

Answer: HELLO DAVID, THE WARRANTY ON VANDERSTEEN'S IS NOT TRANSFERABLE.

David (11/28/06) Here is an additional question that occurred to me relative to my previous about your answer below to Dave (2/2/06):"I ASSURE YOU THAT IF IT IS ON THE MOVIE IT WILL BE REPRODUCED ALBEIT WITH PROPER Q. MOST PEOPLE INCLUDING ME WANT MORE THAN WHAT HAS BEEN RECORDED, HENCE THE V2W. THE PROPER WAY WOULD BE ACCURATE REPRODUCTION (2WQ'S) WITH A BASE CONTROL ON THE PROCESSOR SO ONE COULD DIAL ALL THE BOOM DESIRED. THIS IS CONSIDERED SAC-RELIGIOUS IN HIGH END SO WE HAVE IT BUILT INTO OUR SUB-WOOFERS, UNFORTUNATELY WITHOUT A DEFEAT SWITCH. GOING TO ONE INPUT AND HALF A X-OVER WOULD SAVE ABOUT $5 AND NOT ALLOW THE SCENARIO ABOVE." My understanding is that the ".1" in 5.1 is a DISCRETE Bass effects channel referred to as LFE. So, IF the pre-pro is set for no LFE because there is no V2W in the system ("only" Stereo 2Wq's), then there IS no LFE info and therefore, your statement that "I ASSURE YOU THAT IF IT IS ON THE MOVIE IT WILL BE REPRODUCED ALBEIT WITH PROPER Q" is confusing to me. How can it all be there with no LFE? Am I missing something here?

Answer: HELLO DAVID, WHEN YOU TELL THE PRE-PRO THAT YOU DO NOT HAVE A SUB AND THAT THE RIGHT AND LEFT SPEAKERS ARE LARGE (FULL RANGE) ALL OF THE LFE INFORMATION IS MIXED INTO THE RIGHT AND LEFT CHANNELS.

Ken (11/28/06) HELLO KEN, SIX FEET WOULD BE THE MINIMUM BUT YOU WOULD HAVE TO INTERPOLATE THE GRAPH OR TUNE THE TILT BY EAR.

Answer: Hi Richard, Is there a minimum listening distance that the 3A Signatures can be and the drivers stay time coherent? I notice that 8 feet is the shortest distance on the graph provided in the manual that shows the required "tilt" of the speaker relative to ear height...Many thanks for a fine product, Ken

Dave (11/30/06) Hi, Richard. As I continue to audition power amps for my 2ce Signatures, a dealer is recommending that I try out the Audio Refinemine Multi-5, which is a five-channel power amp. Now, he said I could use only two channels, but he also said I'd get the best results by using four channels and bi-amping. My 2ces are already bi-wired, and I know you don't recommend bi-amping. But is bi-amping from a single five-channel amp such as the Audio Refinements: 1.) Reasonable? 2.) Better or worse than bi-amping from two identical amps? 3.)Likely to result in better sound than simply using two of the channels? 4.) Probably a complete waste of time; I should just keep looking for a good two-channel amp? Thanks for your help.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, I DO NOT RECOMMEND BI-AMPING ESPECIALLY SOLID STATE BECAUSE THE CHANNEL DRIVING SEE'S ONLY CAPS WHICH CAN CAUSE OSCILLATIONS AND POTENTIAL EXPENSIVE SPEAKER DAMAGE (NON WARRANTY). SUGGEST YOU GET A BETTER 2 CHANNEL AMP OR MONO'S.

Charles (11/30/06) Richard, Along the lines of Ken's question above, what is the minimum listening distance for the 5as? Thanks so much.

Answer: HELLO CHARLES, THE SAME 6 FEET WITH THE SAME CAUTIONS.

PCall (12/03/06): Mr. Vandersteen: I have a 1984 pair of Vandersteen 2C serial #6911C/6909C. The speakers are in good condition. However, I’m having trouble selling them because people seem to know of the foam surrounds around the speaker cones. Am I unable to sell these old 2C’s? Should I consider finding a dumpster big enough to fit the Vandersteen’s in or what would you consider it’s monetary value. They work fine and I don’t see any broken cone surround.

Answer:  PCALL, WE CAN REBUILD THE WOOFERS EVEN THOUGH THEY ARE 22 YEARS OLD. I HAVE SEEN SPEAKERS THIS OLD GO FOR $300.00 WHICH IS 1/3 RETAIL. NOT BAD.

Peter (12/03/06): Peter (12/3/06): I have had 2Ce Signatures for several years and I am considering upgrading to the Quatro. However, I live in Tucson, AZ, a long distance from any of your "premier" dealers. I would like to learn how to setup the Quatros myself (without dealer help). Can you provide me with instructions/information on how to do this? I have a reasonable knowledge of electronics (i.e., can deal with VOMs & other test equipment) and have built kit components in the past.

Answer:  HELLO PETER, YOUR IN LUCK THERE IS A DEALER NOT FAR AWAY IN SCOTTSDALE, AZ WHO HAS THE QUATRO'S ON DEMO. ASK TO SEE HIS OWNERS MANUAL.

Romano (12/06/06) Please give me the nearest dealer because I would like to buy 3A's. I am helpless, is there any chance to buy them in this part of Europe?

Answer: HELLO ROMANO, CONTACT DELARAMA 480-367-1355

Max (12/07/06) Hi Richard, I am currently using a REL Storm 5 Sub with a Valve (20wpc class a ) ans Electrostatic Hybrid speakers. I am pretty satisfied with this setup. I did find your school of thought regarding 2wq Sub Filters. I think that would work great in my system. Do you think this would be a worthwhile upgrade? Secondly, do you have any dealers in India? I stay in India and would like to purchase 1 for a start and then upgrade to 2?

Answer:  HELLO MAX, USING A SUB WITHOUT A HIGH PASS IS COSTING YOU 70% OF THE ADVANTAGE A PROPER SUB COULD BRING. A HIGH PASS RELIEVES YOU AMP OF THE LOW FREQ LOAD EFFECTIVELY MAKING IT SOUND LARGER. A HIGH PASS REMOVES THE LOW FREQ FROM THE ELECTROSTATIC PANELS DRAMATICALLY REDUCING PANEL ARCING AND DISTORTION.  SUB WOOFERS WITHOUT A HIGH PASS IS FINE FOR MID-FI BUT HAS NO PLACE IN HIGH-END IMO. CONTACT DELARAMA 480-367-1355 OR LOOK ON OUR WEB SITE UNDER INTERNATIONAL.

David (12/07/06) Help, listened to the Quatro's and was impressed. Would like to purchase a pair but after my daughters wedding and two sons in college at the same time, justifying $7k is not in the cards today. As an alternative, I liked the model 2Ce Signatures and thought perhaps coupled with either 1 or 2, 2Wq (s) would solve my sound tastes and budget. The dealer disagreed and recommended purchasing the 2 Ce Signatures and budget permitting, sell the model 2's and step up to the the model 4's. I have not heard the model 2's with the subs, so this might be a pipe dream trying to approximate the model 4 on a economy budget, but would appreciate your unbiased feedback.

Answer: HELLO DAVID, YOUR DEALER HAS GIVEN YOU GOOD ADVICE. ADDING 2WQ'S TO THE 2CE SIGS WILL BE A LARGE IMPROVEMENT BUT THE TOP 3 DRIVERS AND THE STRUCTURE OF THE QUATRO ARE FAR MORE ADVANCED THAN EVEN THE 3A SIGS. YOU MIGHT WANT TO WORK OUT A DEAL WITH YOUR DEALER IN ADVANCE ON TRADING IN THE 2'S FOR QUATRO'S.

Steve (12/08/06): I am interested in the 2Wq sub woofer, a pair of them, but my main speakers (2-way floor standers) use a second order crossover where the 2Wq is first order. Does it matter that the crossover slopes would not be the same?

Answer: HELLO STEVE, IDEALLY FIRST ORDER FOR ALL X-OVER POINTS WOULD GIVE YOU BETTER TRANSIENT RESPONSE BUT THAT IS NOT AN OPTION AND THE 2WQ'S WOULD WORK FINE. YOU MIGHT NEED TO PLAY WITH PHASE BECAUSE 99% OF SPEAKERS WITH SECOND ORDER FILTERS HAVE EVERY OTHER DRIVER OUT OF PHASE.

Vlad (12/13/06): Hi. I have two 2W subwoofers w my main pair of speakers. I using active set up with active crossover set -3db at 300Hz 24 db/oct in each tower four 7" woofers with separate vented encloses. My room 12'4"W,33'L,9'4"H,and then it still continues to the open kitchen (so the space fairly big), when I use subs as per manual with 33K X-2 Xover it seams that I don't gain any additional bass response (subs six 8" compare to main speakers. eight 7"vented),and to mention that I tried different settings with WX-2 47K, 70K,ect. the 33K gives the best mid-bass (my amp Bryston 4 BST is 50K),it seams that when I playing without subs there more punchier response and it does go pretty low too. I try them running without X-2 ,I figure if I have low pass at 300Hz 24db it is almost the same as if 150hz 12 db or 75Hz at 6 db. and this actually worked way better now have weight an fullness I was looking for so its loaded room better than before, just one thing there sound now a little thick I guess appx. after 120Hz up...So my question is: How I can run this subs with out roll off low frequency of my main speakers (and this is full range speakers in my previous house they was sounding awesome, no subs needed, but the space was smaller). It would be nice to run main speakers full range and run subs at 80Hz 6 db or 12 db roll off. Should I buy separate power amp. (I have two Low pass outs in my active crossover) and run the new amp and subs separately from my Bryston? I think there should be an easier way to roll off subs with out affecting main speakers. .I almost at the point of selling the subwoofers and for the info : I played with positioning , moving them , phase reversing bla, bla, bla...Please Help. (I listen mainly acoustical music, classical, Jazz ect. )

Answer: HELLO VLAD, THE BRYSTON HAS A INPUT IMPEDANCE OF 50K BUT THAT IS AT 1000HZ. WE NEED TO KNOW WHAT THE INPUT IMPEDANCE IS AT 100HZ SO THE X-OVER POINT WILL BE CORRECT. IT HAS BEEN REPORTED TO ME BY MY DEALERS THAT THE BRYSTON NEEDS TO BE SET AT 15K. I WOULD TRY THAT MAY BE EVEN 10K BUT NO LOWER OR SUB DAMAGE COULD RESULT. HAVE YOU ASKED YOU DEALER FOR ASSISTANCE?

John (12/18/06): Around August I purchased the 2CE signatures new and would like to know what options I have to upgrade them to the 2CE signature II?

Answer: HELLO JOHN, THE 2CE SIG WILL CONTINUE AT $1545.00. IT WOULD BE WAY TO EXPENSIVE TO UP-GRADE ALL THE COMPONENTS CHANGED IN THE 2CE SIG II. THE PRICE OF THE 2CE SIG II IS $1995.00. IF UPGRADEABILITY IS AN ISSUE I SUGGEST YOU LOOK INTO A PAIR OF 3A SIG'S WHICH ARE UP-GRADABLE.

Bill (12/23/06) I just received my issue of Stereophile and enjoyed reading Art Dudley's rave review on the 2Ce Sig II. I have two questions. I am looking for 3A Sig performance but in a smaller package, how close are the new 2's? Could you explain why the anechoic measurements that John took are very flat yet the in room measurements are not as flat?

Answer: HELLO BILL, THE NEW 2Ce SIGNATURE II DOES HAVE THE TWEETER AND THE MID-RANGE OF THE 3A SIG'S. THIS AND DOZENS OF OTHER CHANGES INCLUDING STRUCTURAL PUSH THE PERFORMANCE IN THE DIRECTION OF THE 3'S. THE MODEL 3'S ARE LARGER AND HAVE MORE ADVANCED DRIVERS IN THE BASS SO THE MID BASS AND BASS ARE STILL SUPERIOR BUT THE GAP IS CLOSED AT THE HIGHER FREQUENCIES. I SUGGEST WHEN YOUR DEALER GET A PAIR AN AUDITION. I WILL SAY IT HAS TURNED AN OLD CLASSIC INTO ONE INCREDIBLE SPEAKER. AS FOR MEASUREMENTS, JOHN MEASURES ALL SPEAKERS THE SAME AND IT IS A SIMPLE PROCESS TO READ THE MANUAL AND GET THE TILT AND ALIGNMENT CORRECT FOR ANY INSTALLATION. THIS WOULD HAVE RESULTED IN BETTER MEASUREMENTS HOWEVER THEY ARE GOOD ENOUGH TO POINT OUT THE SPEAKERS TIME AND PHASE CHARACTERISTICS VERSES OTHER DESIGNS. I HAVE NEVER THOUGHT THE IN ROOM MEASUREMENTS WERE RELEVANT BECAUSE A LISTENER WOULD HAVE TO HAVE A RUBBER NECK TO GET A AVERAGE FROM THAT MANY POSITIONS WHILE LISTENING TO MUSIC. ALL THE OTHER MEASUREMENTS JOHN MAKES I APPLAUD BECAUSE THEY WILL DIFFERENTIATE BETWEEN DIFFERENT DESIGNS FOR THE READER. THE PROOF IS IN THE LISTENING.

Drew (12/27/06)
Hello Richard, I recently purchased a pair of Vandersteen 2CE Signatures from Audio Connection, my third pair of Vandersteen's, and am very happy with them. When I purchased them I was told that major revisions had been made including the addition of the midrange unit from the 3A Signatures. The serial numbers of these speakers are 57416 and 57417 and they have black end caps.  Are my speakers 2CE Signature II's? hank you,

Answer: HELLO DREW, THEY COULD NOT BE 2CE SIG II BECAUSE THEY WILL SHIP JAN 1, 2007.

Drew (12/27/06) Richard: I have M5-HPB crossovers that I want to set for use with 2WQ subs and VSM-1 signatures for my back surround channels. The 2WQ manual suggests a different setting for the temporary crossovers (2nd value below specified input impedance instead of 1st value below) due to a high pass filter in the VSM-1.  If using the method you have previously described to set the crossovers with a voltmeter, assuming 1 volt at 1 Khz, what voltage should I be looking for at 80 Hz? Is it still .707 volts for the VSM-1 speakers, or is there a different target due to the high pass filter in the VSM-1? Thanks for taking the time to consider my question.

Answer: HELLO DREW, YOU WOULD LOOK FOR .707 AT 80HZ. THE RECOMMENDATION IN THE MANUAL IS ONLY A SUGGESTION, I WOULD EXPERIMENT. THE CLOSER TO 80HZ, IF IT WORKS, THE LOWER THE DISTORTION IN THE VSM.

Paul (12/28/06): Richard, I have a pair of 2ce Serial #57xxxce. I need to replace the front woofer. The woofer has separated apart. Vibration and crackling when speaker used.  What would the process of getting the parts? It looks like I need to de-solder and replace with new woofer. Are there other recommended parts that I should replace? Is it my understanding that I cannot upgrade to SIG series? Thank You.

Answer: HELLO PAUL, CHECK OUT CUSTOMER SERVICE.

Michael (12/28/06)
I own Vandersteen 5's, and Ayre electronics. Ayre sent me a cd Irrational But Efficacious. They told me to use tracks one and seven to tune my stereo.  It is basically a sweep of a full glide tone from 5hz to 20khz and track one is a shorter version. It made the system sound better. Why? Thanks

Answer: HELLO MICHAEL, CHECK YOUR OWNERS MANUAL FOR THE DATE THAT THE BATTERIES NEED TO BE REPLACED, IT COULD BE TIME. THE BEST I CAN CONCLUDE IS THAT THE SWEEP IS LIKE A WARM-UP EXERCISE. A SPEAKER IS A MECHANICAL DEVICE AND WE ALWAYS EXERCISE THE DRIVERS BEFORE DOING ANY CRITICAL DESIGN WORK. YOU COULD ASK THE AYRE PEOPLE.

Bill (12/29/06) It was a pleasure meeting you this past year at my local dealer in Raleigh NC. I appreciate the time you took to answer the questions that were asked. I took your advice and tried a "true" bi-wire setup with 2 separate cables per side and I do like the improvement. I am planning on doing some more room placement experimenting with my 3As. Currently I have them on one of the short walls of my room using the room odds method you describe in the manual. I plan on trying then on one of the long walls. If I like this better it brings up the issue of what to do with the speaker cables. If I plan to keep the long wall placement, the room will dictate I keep most of my electronics on one of the short walls. So here is the question... would you either run long speaker wires say 20 feet from the amp or would you run a long interconnect(~20 ft.) between the preamp and amp placing the amp between the speakers and stay with shorter speaker cables?? I currently Cardas 300B interconnects and Crosslink speaker cable. And am currently using Musical Fidelity SS electronics. The capacitance of the interconnects is 42.9 pf/ft and 55 pf/ft on the speaker cables. thanks in advance.

Answer: HELLO BILL, I WISH ALL QUESTIONS WERE THIS EASY. RUN LONG INTERCONNECTS AND SHORT SPEAKER WIRE.

Jim (12/30/06) Hi Richard, I just read Art Dudley's review of the 2Ce Sigs II and the serial numbers of those speakers were #58274 and #58275. Does that mean speakers with serial numbers higher than those are the Signature IIs? I just bought a pair and they are #58320 and #58321. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO JIM, THE 2CE SIG II BEGAN SHIPPING 12-15-06 ALONG WITH NORMAL 2CE SIG'S DEPENDING ON WHAT IS ORDERED. BOTH ARE AVAILABLE WITH A DIFFERENT PRICE OF COURSE. THE MARK II VERSIONS HAVE (II) AFTER THE SERIAL NUMBER THE REGULAR 2CE SIGS HAVE NOTHING.

Rayner (12/31/06): I am planning to add a couple of 2Wq's to my 3As. Can Vandersteen supply crossovers to work with balaced cables? Thanks,

Answer: HELLO RAYNER, WE DO NOT SELL DIRECTLY BUT YOUR LOCAL (OR ANY VANDERSTEEN DEALER) CAN FIX YOU UP.

Dennis (12/31/06):  I'm considering the 2WQ subwoofer. I understand and appreciate the virtues of using two subwoofers, but my budget only allows me to buy one. I'm concerned about localization of the subwoofer using only one, especially with such a shallow filter slope. Is this an issue? Can the crossover be set low enough for this not to be a concern? Also, I have my 2CE Signatures bi-amplified. I know you've said that there aren't many advantages to bi-amping, but I'm already doing it and I'd rather bi-amp than have two idle channels. With this setup, where do I connect the 2WQ? I don't recall the 2CEs having separate high frequency and low frequency connections. Thank you,

Answer: HELLO DENNIS, I WOULD PLACE THE SUB IN ONE OF THE CORNERS FOR BEST RESPONSE IN THE ROOM. THE PROBLEM OF LOCALIZATION YOU MENTION IS ONLY TRUE WHEN USING MINI BOXES FOR MAIN SPEAKERS. WHEN ADDING A SUB PROPERLY (USING FULL RANGE MAIN SPEAKERS) THE MAIN SPEAKERS PROVIDE SIGNIFICANT LOCATION BECAUSE THE SLOPE IS GENTLE. IN THE DEEP BASS MOST RECORDINGS ARE MONO ANYWAY. I WOULD RECOMMEND STEREO SUBS AS SOON AS POSSIBLE NOT BECAUSE OF A LOCATION PROBLEM BUT FOR A MORE LINEAR RESPONSE IN YOUR ROOM. THE 2WQ HAS ITS LOW PASS SET AT 80HZ AND CAN NOT BE CHANGED NOR WOULD YOU WANT TO. WHEN BI-AMPING BOTH CHANNELS NEED TO BE HIGH PASSED TO PREVENT PHASE SHIFT IN THE MID-RANGE. HOOK UP THE 2WQ TO THE CHANEL THAT IS DRIVING THE BASS.

Steve (1/1/07) I noticed the 2WQ sub woofers use a high-pass filter that rolls off at 80Hz. Does the 2WQ have ANY output above 80Hz? If so, how high does it extend? I am wondering how well the 2WQ will work with Merlin VSM-MX speakers. Thanks.

Answer: HELLO STEVE, THE 2WQ'S WORK WITH ANY GOOD FULL-RANGE SPEAKER THAT GOOD RESPONSE TO 40 HZ.

Ashok (1/2/07): Hi Richard, I have a pair of the V-5A's and am going to set up my own 5.1 channel home theater around these speakers. Would you kindly advise on whether it is better to use VSM speakers or the 2ce or 3a speakers for the back/side channels. Also, would I need a subwoofer, and if so, which subwoofer would be better value-wise considering the 5As already have a very good woofing system.  Thanks a lot for your time.

Answer: HELLO ASHOK, THE VSM SIGNATURE WOULD BE THE BEST CHOICE FOR REAR AND SIDE CHANNELS. MOUNT THEM ABOUT 48 INCHES TO THE BOTTOM FROM THE FLOOR. USE ONE OR TWO 2WQ'S TO MAKE THE REAR CHANNEL FULL RANGE LIKE THE FRONT ALREADY IS.

George (1/3/07) Per instructions for my Model 5s, I replaced the 27 volt battery packs on the crossover boards yesterday. The written instructions are clear and for that I thank you. The procedure was so simple on the one speaker that I had my fourth-grade daughter do the second speaker ... all it is after all is cutting the straps holding the battery pack, cutting the double-stick tape, de-soldering two leads, cleaning the board of tape residue, soldering together three 9 volters and gluing them together with adhesive caulk, and re-strapping them in. Optionally, I cleaned some tarnish off the inner surfaces of the 8 silver screws.  These are very early serial numbers, so I do hope that for the sanity of other customers the later models have some form of click-in battery mount. It's a good thing these speakers are so good, for we must earn the right to own them over and over. No, a fourth-grader didn't really do the second speaker.  NOW ... for a question ... I was alarmed to see that on both crossover boards, there were three prominent caps near the speaker input terminals that had corrosion on their ends, where the can was not covered with plastic. They are labeled "Wonder Signature Infiniti Cap .68 microF 425V". I've not heard anything grossly wrong, but then I could be like the frog in a pot of water that's slowly heated up. Of course these are out of warranty. Have you encountered this problem, and is it a problem? If so, and let's assume that I can replace them, exactly what replacement caps should I buy? Thank you

Answer: HELLO GEORGE, GLAD YOU WERE ABLE TO CHANGE THE BATTERIES WITH YOUR DAUGHTERS HELP. THERE WILL NEVER BE CLICK TYPE CONNECTORS AS THE CONNECTIONS MUST BE SOLDERED FOR LOW NOISE. YOU COULD REPLACE THEM WITH LITHIUM, THEY ARE GOOD FOR 12 YEARS. DO NOT EAT THE LITHIUM IT IS THE WRONG TYPE! THE WONDERCAPS ARE FINE, THEY ARE UNPROTECTED BECAUSE THE MANUFACTURE SAYS THEY SOUND BETTER THAT WAY. SILVER OXIDE IS A GOOD CONDUCTOR AND DOES NOT NEED TO BE REMOVED FOR SONIC REASONS. THIS IS WHY SILVER IS USED INSTEAD OF BARE COOPER.

Dave (1/2/07) Hi, Richard. I am currently driving my 2ce Signatures with a McCormack DNA 0.5 amp and a Rotel 1062 integrated amp. I'm considering replacing the integrated with a passive preamp, namely the McCormack TLC-1. At some point, I think I'd like to add the 2wqs to my system. Is there any reason the 2wqs can't be paired (or shouldn't be paired) with a passive preamp? Is this, in general, a good combination? Thanks again for your help

Answer: HELLO DAVE, SOMETIMES WHEN USING A PASSIVE VOLUME CONTROL WITH A HIGH-PASS THERE CAN BE PROBLEMS WITH HUM. KEEP THE ROTEL HANDY IN CASE YOU NEED A LOW IMPEDANCE DRIVE FOR THE 2WQ'S TO ELIMINATE THE HUM.

Juan (1/3/07) Hello Richard, I would like to know what material the 1c woofer loudspeaker model is made of in order to buy the appropriate adhesive to fix it. The problem is that the polycone has become apart from the outer membrane. Thank you in advance.

Answer: HELLO JUAN, THE WOOFER IS DESIGNED TO RUN OUT OF TRAVEL BY THE SPIDER AND SURROUND BEFORE CRASHING THE VOICE COIL. OVER TIME THE SURROUND WILL PULL APART.  UNFORTUNATELY THE SURROUND AND POLY CONE ARE VULCANIZED AND I DO NOT KNOW OF A GLUE THAT WILL WORK. TAKE YOUR BEST TRY IT MAY WORK. IF YOU NEED PARTS CONTACT DELARAMA 408-367-1355.

Will (1/04/07) Hello Richard, I own a pair of 5A's and have heard rumors for a while now that there is a major upgrade in the works.. possibly with a new model number as well. Just curious if there is any truth to the rumor of an update in 2007? Thanks!

Answer:
HELLO WILL, THAT IS A SAFE RUMOR FOR SOMEONE TO SPREAD THAT DOES NOT KNOW. THE MODEL 5 WAS INTRODUCED 10 YEARS AGO WITH THAT ABILITY AS ONE OF ITS MAIN FEATURES, SO IT IS INEVITABLE THERE WILL BE A UPDATE, HOWEVER NOT IN 2007. IT TAKES A LONG TIME TO DEVELOP ENOUGH IMPROVEMENTS TO JUSTIFY AN UPDATE THAT IS SIGNIFICANT ENOUGH TOP TO BOTTOM. THE FIRST ONE TOKE ABOUT 7 YEARS, I DO NOT THINK IT WILL TAKE THAT LONG FOR THE NEXT. REMEMBER THE COST TO THE ORIGINAL OWNER IS GUARANTEED TO BE THE DIFFERENCE IN PRICE.

Steve (1/04/07):   I see that the VCC-2 center channel speaker is designed to go on a wall below a flat panel, but I'm wondering whether the VCC-2 could also be placed either 1) directly below an sxrd rear projection TV on a shelf of the TV stand, or 2) on its own stand in front of the tv, or 3) on top of the TV using something like an Omni mount shelf. Thanks,

Answer:
HELLO STEVE, THE VCC-2 MUST BE AGAINST THE WALL.  THIS IS PART OF THE DESIGN AND WILL NOT WORK WELL IN FREE AIR. THE VCC-1 AND VCC-5 ARE DESIGNED FOR FREE AIR USE.

George (1/04/07):   Richard, I recently purchased a pair of 5A's in the beautiful Bird's Eye Maple finish. They are outstanding, but I have two questions: Question 1:When I connect the powered subs to the same AC line as the rest of my gear, the gear that has a transformer in it (my amp and a voltage regulator) starts to have a low level hum. This is isn't a ground loop, but rather a transformer hum. If I disconnect the powered subs or put them on a different AC line via an extension cord, the transformer hum goes away. Any ideas? Question 2:Can I purchase a copy of the setup cd for the 5A's? I don't have a local dealer (I am just outside of Boston, MA) and would like to be able to setup the speakers in the same manner as described in the documentation. Thanks in advance for your responses. Regards,

Answer:
HELLO GEORGE, IT MUST BE A HARMONIC SET UP BETWEEN THE SWITCH MODE POWER SUPPLY IN THE 5A AND THE TRANSFORMER IN YOUR OTHER EQUIPMENT. I RECOMMEND PLUGGING THE MODEL 5A AMPLIFIERS DIRECTLY INTO THE WALL WITH NO POWER LINE CONDITIONERS OR GROUND LIFTERS. THE DISK IS IN PROTOTYPE FORM AND ONLY GIVEN TO DEALERS WHO HAVE BEEN TRAINED BY ME. MANY OWNERS HAVE DOWN LOADED THE QUATRO MANUAL FROM THIS SITE AND USED THE STEREOPHILE TEST DISC THAT HAS WARBLE TONES BETWEEN 20HZ AND 200HZ, USE THE ANALOG RADIO SHACK SPL METER (DO NOT USE ONE OF THE COPIES THAT HAS ITS FREQ CURVE CORRECTED). SOME HAVE REPORTED THEY WERE VERY SUCCESSFUL. FOLLOW THE QUATRO INSTRUCTIONS INTERPOLATING FOR THE FREQUENCIES BETWEEN BY ADJUSTING THE POT ABOVE AND BELOW SPLITTING THE DIFFERENCE.  THERE IS NOTHING TO LOSE BECAUSE IF IT SOUNDS BAD JUST PUT THE POTS STRAIGHT UP AND THEY WILL STILL BE BETTER THAN THE MAJORITY OF THE SPEAKERS IN THE WORLD. TRUE PUSH-PULL TOTALLY LINEAR SUB-WOOFERS ARE VERY RARE EVEN WITHOUT ROOM ADJUSTMENTS. GIVE IT A SHOT SEE WHAT HAPPENS IF YOU RUN INTO PROBLEMS CALL ME, MAY BE I CAN HELP.

Adrian (1/04/07):   Hi Richard, I read the recently posted instructions for the Quatros and it does not seam to be rocket science to set them up. Now I know you need the CD and the SPL meter which I would gladly buy to set them up myself. I really do not like asking dealers to come to my house every time I change something within my house or move. Are you ever going to make a setup package available for purchase (CD, SPL meter, etc).  This is the only issue from me purchasing the Quatros. We audiophiles are tweakers by nature and to have someone else set up our speakers takes out all of the fun. Thanks

Answer:
HELLO ADRIAN, READ THE POST ABOVE, YOU ARE CORRECT IT IS NOT ROCKET SCIENCE. NOTHING IS KEEPING YOU FROM BUYING A RADIO SHACK ANALOG METER AND A STEREOPHILE DISK AND TWEAKING TILL YOUR HEART IS CONTENT.

Jeff (1/4/07) On 7/8/06, you answered a question from Matt concerning 2CE Sigs vs 3A Sigs. You responded that continual upgrades to the 2CE Sigs "are a moot point and did not cause the 2CE Sigs to rival the 3A Sigs," and you suggested that he buy used 3A Sigs, not new 2CE Sigs. So, why have you now upgraded the 2CE Sigs with 3A Sig components? Would you now answer Matt's question differently, or are we all better off looking for good used versions of the more expensive speakers? By the way, I'm a very satisfied owner of 2 CE Sigs and, call me crazy, but when I auditioned 2CE Sigs vs 3A Sigs at my local dealer (without considering price, since I could afford either), I actually preferred the overall sound integration on the 2s (and my remarkably honest dealer agreed). For me, less is more.

Answer: HELLO JEFF, THE DRIVERS USED IN THE 3A SIG ARE MORE ADVANCED THAN THE 2'S. WHY YOU PREFERRED THE 2'S OVER THE 3'S IS A MYSTERY UNLESS THEY REVILED A PROBLEM UPSTREAM IN THE SYSTEM. I MADE THAT RECOMMENDATION ONLY BECAUSE HE HAD HEARD THE 3 SIGS AND WANTED TO KNOW HOW CLOSE THE NEWER 2'S WOULD BE TO THE 3'S.  IN THE SAME SITUATION WITH AYRE EQUIPMENT THERE WOULD BE NO COMPARISON REGARDLESS THE VERSION. WE HAVE UPDATED THE 2 FOR OUR 30TH ANNIVERSARY WITH 3 COMPONENTS, THE MID AND TWEETER. THEY NOW RIVAL THE 3'S IN THE MIDS AND HIGHS AND ARE CALLED 2CE SIG II. THE NEW 2'S AS BEFORE ARE NOT UPGRADABLE THE 3'S ARE AND THE 3'S STILL HAVE AN ADVANTAGE IN THE BASS. MY COMMENT WAS NOT MEANT TO DEGRADE THE 2'S BUT THE CUSTOMER SEEMED CONCERNED ABOUT UPGRADES. SORRY FOR THE CONFUSION.

Mike (1/6/07) Hi Richard, you commented about silver oxide being a good conductor. I use o-lugs as speaker wire termination and these seem clean as are the inside of the screws on my 2CEsignatures. The visible part of the screws are often tarnished which I periodically clean, is this an issue or is this silver oxide? Thanks,

Answer:
HELLO MIKE, THE SCREWS ON YOUR 2CE'S ARE SILVER PLATED AND DO NOT NEED TOO BE CLEANED. OXIDIZED SILVER IS SILVER OXIDE.

Romesh (1/8/07) Hi Richard, I'm a dealer in New Zealand, and having problems getting a valve amplifier to stably drive a pair of 2ce. When we run one VTL ST85 bi-wired into the 2ce everything work fine. When we try to bi-amp with a second st85 we find that when a amplifier channel sees only the tweeter load it becomes unstable and we see wild variations in bias. The same problem applies with either vertical or horizontal bi-wiring .When we measure the tweeter load using a standard multi-meter we get an open circuit, and when we measure the bass we get varying impedances. Very strange. Are you able to shed any light on the situation? Can you suggest a fix so that we get allow our client to bi-amp?  We would greatly appreciate your help  Best regards,

Answer:
HELLO ROMESH, THIS IS A COMMON PROBLEM WITH SOLID STATE AMPLIFIERS BUT RARELY WITH TUBE AMPS. THE HIGH FREQ AMP IS SEEING THE X-OVER CAPS PROTECTING THE MIDRANGE AND TWEETER LIKE ANY SPEAKER. THIS BY ITS SELF WITHOUT THE RESISTIVE LOAD PRESENTED WITH THE WOOFER SECTION IN PARALLEL IS CAUSING THE AMP TO BE UNSTABLE. THESE AMPLIFIERS CAN NOT BE USED THIS WAY BUT SHOULD BE BRIDGED MONO AND BI-WIRED INSTEAD.

Joe (1/8/07) I don't mean to sound rude but recently heard you Quatro speakers and thought they sounded great. I came to this website for more information and found my faith in the company shaken. The presentation here Is terrible and shouldn't be a representative of a high end speaker company. Also the dates of the notes at the bottom appear to have incorrect dates. The page appears to be sorted by date and the last few dates on the page should have 2007 for the year. If I hadn't heard your speakers and saw this website I would never consider them. This is not met to be posted, just a professional heads-up.

Answer:
HELLO JOE, THANK YOU FOR YOUR "PROFESSIONAL HEADS UP", AND I AM FLATTERED YOU WERE AS IMPRESSED BY THE SOUND AS YOU WERE. I APOLOGIZE THERE IS NOT A LOT OF INFORMATION ABOUT THE QUATRO, IT IS OUR NEWEST PRODUCT AND WE ARE VERY BUSY. DEVELOPING NEW PRODUCTS AND PUTTING THEM INTO PRODUCTION COSTS A LOT OF MONEY AND I WOULD RATHER PUT IT INTO THE PRODUCT. I UNDERSTAND THAT IF TOO MANY POTENTIAL CUSTOMERS HAVE YOUR OPINION AND WE ARE NOT ABLE TO SELL THEM, SLICK LIT WILL BE A NECESSITY. KEEP POSTED WE WILL IMPROVE WITH TIME.

Otto (1/9/07) Hi Richard, I recently came into owning a pair of 3A Signatures and a VCC-1 Signature. Very nice stuff, indeed. I see that some people have inquired about replacing the top and bottom wood caps. As you have referenced many times, there are instructions on how to remove the bottom cap in the "repair" section of this website. I have read that twice, and believe I can remove the bottom cap. My specific question is this --> How do I remove the top cap of the 3A Sig and VCC-1 Sig? I am intent on recreating these caps out of my own wood, and I don't want to destroy the originals, the sock, or any other part of my Vandersteen speakers. I have read on the Internet that you can just pry them off similar to the way your website has described to pry off the bottom caps. I have also "heard" that they are attached with a silicone-based glue, which also sounds similar to what you describe on your disassembly instructions. So, please let me know what's in there. Like I said, I'm intent on doing this. I also have quite a bit of woodworking experience and ability at taking things apart, so I'm sure I can do it. Just don't want to screw it up at step #1. Thanks for your time, your work, and your excellent products.

Answer:
HELLO OTTO, EVERYTHING YOU HAVE READ IS CORRECT EXCEPT "THAT YOU CAN JUST PRY THEM OFF". THEY ARE GLUED WITH TWO DIFFERENT ADHESIVES AND SILICONE FOR SONIC REASONS. THIS IS NOT EASY AND WHY FOR LIABILITY REASONS THERE ARE NO INSTRUCTIONS. PLEASE PROCEED WITH CARE IT SOUNDS LIKE YOU HAVE THE SKILL TO DO IT.

Andy (1/9/07) Hello, I've located a good deal on a Vandersteen VCC-1 Center Channel speaker. How would they match up with up with a non-Vandersteen speaker system ? I own a pair of Ohm Walsh 200 MK2's, with the new Ohm Walsh drivers. I appreciate any input you can give me, as I've come to learn that matching a Center Channel speaker isn't always an easy task. Thanks for your time...

Answer:
HELLO ANDY, IT IS EASY IF YOU USE THE CENTER RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURE OF YOUR SPEAKERS. YOU ARE RIGHT, MIXING DIFFERENT BRANDS OF CENTERS AND MAINS CAN BE A MESS.

Ardian (1/10/07)I am wondering what type of SPL meter do you use to set up the Quatro's low frequency band equalizer? The standard Radio Shack meter which has been mentioned on some of the posting herein does not have a bandwidth down to 20 HZ (Per there specifications posted on RadioShack.com). Thus in short how are bands 1, 2 and 3 accurately measured? Thank You.

Answer:
HELLO ARDIAN, AS THE OWNERS MANUAL STATES, USE THE RADIO SHACK ANALOG METER. THIS METER DOES ROLL OFF THE BOTTOM AT THE SAME RATE AS ROOM GAIN LIFTS IT.  TOGETHER EVERYTHING WORKS. TRY IT BEFORE JUDGING IT.

Bob (1/12/07) Bi-Amping the 3A Signatures From: Bob HoshallI would assume Bi-Amping any speaker could be advantageous, if you had two MATCHING POWER AMPLIFIERS, but what if you don't??? In my case I have a Parasound HCA-1200II High Current Power Amplifier rated at 205 Watts RMS X 2. My second is a PS Audio Amplifier, the Delta 200 rated at 200 Watts RMS X 2. If I were to take a guess, I would think the PS Audio is a bit better amplifier, even if the Parasound has some bells and whistles the PS Audio doesn't, neither have balanced inputs. What is your view of Bi-Amping, especially with two very different power amps? Thanks.

Answer:
HELLO BOB, I NO LONGER RECOMMEND BI-AMPING OF ANY KIND UNLESS BOTH ARE TUBE AMPS. MANY SOLID STATE AMPLIFIERS ARE UNSTABLE DRIVING THE TOP OF ALL OUR SPEAKERS. THIS CAN RESULT IN AMPLIFIER PROBLEMS OR SPEAKER FAILURE. IF CONSIDERING THIS MAKE SURE YOU USE A O' SCOPE ACROSS THE OUTPUT OF THE AMPLIFIER AND LOOK FOR OSCILLATIONS ON TRANSIENTS. MANY REPORT IMPROVED TRANSPARENCY ONLY TO FIND LATER THAT THE AMPLIFIER HAS SHORT BURSTS OF OSCILLATION TRAILING ALL TRANSIENTS.  LISTEN TO BOTH OF YOUR AMPLIFIERS AND PICK THE BEST ONE, BI-WIRE TO YOUR 3A SIGS AND PLAY MUSIC.

Juan (1/13/07) Hello Richard, just a question on power amplifiers the Rotel RB-1092 and RB-1091 use a switching power supply instead of the normal transformer it's also rated at 500 watt with a 20 KHz filter, are these amplifiers OK to use with the 3A Signature speakers VCC-5 center.

Answer:
HELLO EDDY, I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THESE AMPLIFIERS.  IN GENERAL I HAVE NOT BEEN IMPRESSED WITH CLASS D AMPLIFIERS ESPECIALLY WITH A HIGH RESOLUTION SOURCE (VINYL). I WOULD ASK A VANDERSTEEN DEALER THAT HAS ROTEL FOR A DEMO COMPARING THE ROTEL TO OTHER RECOMMENDED AMPLIFIERS ON THE 3A SIG'S. THE 500 WATTS IS NO PROBLEM ASSUMING THE USER IS SOBER AND REASONABLY INTELLIGENT.

Ed (1/15/07) I have a pair of 1B's. I am considering upgrading to a home theater sound system, and need to buy a center channel speaker. Since the 1B's have been out of production for some time, I wonder whether the VCC-1 was designed to work well with the 1B's for a 3 channel home theater setup? Would the VCC-1 be a good choice, and if not, do you have other suggestions? Thank you very much.

Answer: HELLO ED, THE VCC-1 WILL WORK WITH YOUR 1B'S VERY WELL. THE VSM-1 WALL SPEAKERS WOULD BE THE RIGHT CHOICE FOR THE REAR CHANNELS.

Tom (1/16/07) According to the manufacturer, the balanced inputs of my tube mono-blocks have an input impedance of 289K/leg! If accurate, is this out of the upper limit impedance range of the balanced crossovers (400K)? Since the single ended input impedance is 130K, i don't trust the balanced figure and run single ended. Thanks

Answer: HELLO TOM, YOU DID THE RIGHT THING IF YOU DO TRUST THE IMPEDANCE PROVIDED. IT IS IMPORTANT FOR PERFORMANCE AND RELIABILITY THAT YOU HAVE THIS CORRECT. CHECK Q&A PAUL 11/24/06 ON THIS SITE ON HOW TO GET IT RIGHT.

Robert (1/16/07) There is a chance I might be moving to Germany in the near future. My concerns are for my pair of 2Wq,s, I know that I can get a down converter for the voltage but will the difference between the 50/60hz harm the amplifier section in the subwoofer. I would hate to have to part with these as they make a world of difference with my 3A's.

Answer: HELLO ROBERT, IF YOU USE A STEP DOWN TRANSFORMER (500VA) IT WILL WORK GREAT.

Raymond (1/17/07): Hi Richard I'm in the process of replacing the batteries in the vaunted Model 5s and filters with lithium batteries. Could you please tell me the type of wiring that is used to solder the batteries together and on to the boards. I would like to use new wire, it's just easier. Thanks for making the best full range speakers in the universe period, they are truly the ultimate listening experience.

Answer: HELLO RAYMOND, IT IS SPECIAL WIRE SO I WOULD USE THE WIRE ON THE BATTERIES YOU REMOVE.

Tom (1/18/07): Hello, Are you planning a 1C Signature Edition or a new version of the 1C's in the near future?

Answer: HELLO TOM, THE 1C WAS RE-TWEAKED ABOUT 8 MONTHS AGO AND THERE ARE NO SIGNATURE PLANS.

Joseph (1/19/07): Hello, my name is Joseph Lazar, I'm from India, I just placed an order for 2wq, I am using a integrated tube amplifier, Is there any problem in connecting the 2wq with it, Im asking this because, every one I read below are using the speakers with power amplifiers and they have connected x-2 in between, this may be illustrated in the Manuel, just anxious to know!!!!!

Answer: HELLO JOSEPH, THE 2WQ WOOFER REQUIRES THE X-2 BE INSTALLED BETWEEN THE PRE-AMP AND AMPLIFIER. CHECK WITH THE MANUFACTURER OF YOUR INTEGRATED, AND ASK IF THIS IS POSSIBLE.

Andrew (1/22/07) Hello Richard - a question from a happy owner of 1Bs, and looking to add HT capability (while still keeping my faithful 2 channel setup). My dealer in Australia has a used VCC1 and we're looking at a subwoofer such as Quad/ Wharfedale/B&W. The VCC1 should work well with the 1Bs, however what are the ideal initial settings for the subwoofer crossover? Thanks again,

Answer: HELLO ANDREW, THE VCC-1 WAS DESIGNED TO WORK WITH THE MODEL 1B OR C. I AM NOT FAMILIAR WITH THE SUBS YOU MENTIONED, SUGGEST TRYING ONE OF OURS.

Mike (1/23/07): Dear Richard, I am interested in listening and possibly purchasing a pair of your 3a signature speakers (walnut wood and sound anchor stands) but was wondering what you suggest as to where this can be done as I live in the Buffalo/Niagara Falls, NY area? I also wanted to know about some of the discussion with these speakers using "crossovers from the Vandersteen 5 speakers"? Any help and suggestions would be welcomed. Thank You.

Answer: HELLO MIKE, THIS WEB SITE HAS ALL THE DEALERS LISTED. IF YOU ARE TRAVELING ON BUSINESS OR VACATION I SUGGEST MAKING ARRANGEMENTS BEFORE HAND AT A DEALER NEAR YOUR DESTINATION. I THINK THE REFERENCE TO MODEL 5 X-OVERS ARE THE HIGH-PASS FILTERS USED WITH SUB-WOOFERS BY SOME USERS.

Edward (1/24/07) I have a pair of 2c speakers. What is the best/easiest way to remove the cloth material, to get at the drivers. I see there's a seam at the back. Does the top wood frame need to come off? ( I'm hearing some distortion from one of the drivers...I'm guessing it's time to replace the rubber/synthetic material around the speaker cone) Thanks

Answer: HELLO EDWARD, YOU WILL FIND INSTRUCTIONS ON THIS SITE UNDER CUSTOMER SERVICE.

Dave (1/24/07) Concerning the VCC-1 center speaker. Because of its cube shape it is difficult to find an optimum location (ear level). In the photographs of the speaker you show it located on the floor, much like a sub-woofer. Can the VCC-1 be located on floor, not pointed at the listener? Thanks.

Answer: HELLO DAVE, I WOULD NOT PUT IT ON THE FLOOR. PLACE IT ANYWHERE SLIGHTLY ABOVE OR BELOW EAR HEIGHT. YOU WILL GET THE BEST DIALOG LOCALIZATION IF IT IS NEAR THE BOTTOM OR TOP OF THE PICTURE.

Vu Hong (1/24/07) I want to upgrade my Vandersteen 2Ce to 2Ce Signature. Can you sell for me a upgrade kit. i will DIY with your Upgrade kit. Can you tell how much? I will pay for you by pay pal or visa card

Answer: HELLO VU HONG, THE MODEL I AND MODEL 2 WERE NEVER UPGRADEABLE AND THAT IS THE CASE TODAY. THERE WERE 50 PAIR OF 2CE'S THAT WERE MANUFACTURED THAT HAD HALF OF THE 2CE SIG PARTS AND WE REGRETTABLY OFFERED A UPGRADE FOR THEM (77000 AND ABOVE). THIS HAS PROVED TO BE A BIG MISTAKE BECAUSE IT LEFT THE IMPRESSION THAT THE MODEL 2'S WERE UPGRADEABLE..

Romano (1/25/07): Hello Mr. Vandersteen i am planning to buy Vandersteen's in the near future and I am a little bit confused. Now when You have upgraded 2Ce sig. to 2Ce sig II practically. You moved very close to 3 A sig.  For me it would be logical to improve 3A sig  in this situation in order to have some "obvious" difference between 2's and 3's. If You are planning something like that I think it would be very wise to wait for it. Please, excuse my English, best regards,

Answer: HELLO ROMANO, DO NOT BE DECEIVED THE MODEL 3'S ARE A SUPERIOR SPEAKER ESPECIALLY IN THE BASS. SOME MIGHT PREFER THE 2'S WITH LOWER LEVEL ELECTRONICS BECAUSE THE 3'S ARE MORE DEMANDING TO DRIVE. WE KNOW HOW TO IMPROVE THE 3'S HOWEVER THE COST WILL BE CLOSE TO THE QUATRO. THE QUATRO HAS A MORE INERT STRUCTURE WHICH RESULTS IN SUPERIOR PERFORMANCE WITH THE SAME BASIC DRIVERS.

Scott (1/25/07): Hello. I recently purchased a used pair of model 3's. They sound awesome -except one of the 8" woofers buzzes when pushed above lower volume. They still sound awesome and I was wondering if it is possible to purchase a replacement woofer in lieu of sending mine in and not having it to listen to.  .I'd like to replace it myself and was curious where and which direction to go.  Scott

Answer: HELLO SCOTT, WE ONLY HAVE THE SOFT PARTS IN STOCK FOR SUCH AN OLD SPEAKER. WE ARE ABLE TO REBUILD THE DRIVERS WITH THOSE PARTS IN ONE DAY AND YOU CAN INSTALL THEM YOURSELF. CHECK OUT CUSTOMER SERVICE ON THIS SITE FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON WHAT TO DO.

Tony (1/26/07) You have listed that having 2 Sub will allow better performance." Summing the channels into a single subwoffer alters or cancels all the low frequency information containing phase differences between channels. Stereo Subs reproduce all of the bass information" Can you do this with the V2W's or just the 2Wq's.Not sure how the LFE Coaxial out will differ between left and right channel bass information.-Tony

Answer: HELLO TONY, THE LFE IS A MONO SIGNAL.

Joseph (1/27/07): Hey this is Joseph again, Thank you for your reply, My integrated amplifier has only a fixed pre-out, The manufacturer doesn't know any thing about this, they are asking why an external X-over is there for a subwoofer, if its powered it must be built in, I guess they must not be aware of this subwoofer. As I have very little knowledge on electronics, I don't know how to explain it elaborately to them. I'm using Cadence VA-1HP valve amplifier. Nobody is giving me a good advice on this , Can you help me on this matter, I have already purchased 2ce, not yet unpacked, waiting for the sub to come, I always use to check the FAQ section for my knowledge on Vandersteen. Is X-2 available along with the subwoofer, or do I have to purchase it separately.

Answer:  HELLO JOSEPH, DOWNLOAD THE 2WQ MANUAL FROM THIS WEBSITE AND YOU WILL DISCOVER THAT YOUR INTEGRATED WILL NOT WORK WITH THE 2WQ. YOU WILL NEED TO ORDER THE X-2 FROM YOUR DEALER.

Mikael (1/27/07): Bonjour! What a super website! Very refreshing to peruse from where we live in Paris (France). I eat frogs and drink wine. Would like more information's on this. Best regards! Mikael.

Answer: HELLO MIKAEL, SOME DAY WHEN ENEKE AND I ARE IN PARIS WE MAY SEEK YOUR TECHNICAL ADVICE, PLEASE FORWARD YOUR FAQ SITE.

Arianto (1/28/07) I have questions regarding the best partnering for model 5A. eg, what kind / brand name of amplifier, preamp, DA, cables ets. thank you much

Answer: HELLO ARIANTO, I SUGGEST YOU HAVE A LISTENING SESSION WITH YOUR DEALER AND DECIDE WHAT SOUND IS YOUR GOAL.  THE BEAUTY OF A NEUTRAL TIME AND PHASE CORRECT SPEAKER WITH ROOM CONTROL IS THAT YOU CAN MAKE THEM SOUND ANY WAY YOU LIKE.

James (1/28/07): Browsing through the Quatro manual on this web site (I heard them in with Ayre gear at HE2006 and loved the sound), I noticed that the warranty coverage was listed as one year with nothing indicating an extension if you registered/mailed in a card. I always thought your products carried a five year warranty. Apologies if I am missing something...

Answer: HELLO JAMES, THE WARRANTY IS FOR ONE YEAR AUTOMATICALLY, FOR THE NEXT 4 YEARS YOU HAVE TO SEND IN THE FORM PROVIDED IN THE SPEAKERS AFTER PURCHASE WITH A COPY OF THE SALES RECEIPT.

Carl (1/29/07) Dear Sir, I have an upstairs 2600 cubic foot room that is pre-wired for home theater/entertainment and I am in the planning/purchasing phase to have it implemented as such. I am a recent retiree and have not been involved in the audio/stereo/video world for some 20 years, but my family/10 year old son have convinced